إِن
Appears 246 times in Quran
Occurrences in Quran
Found 50 verses containing "إِن".
وَإِن كُنتُمْ فِى رَيْبٍ مِّمَّا نَزَّلْنَا عَلَىٰ عَبْدِنَا فَأْتُوا۟ بِسُورَةٍ مِّن مِّثْلِهِۦ وَٱدْعُوا۟ شُهَدَآءَكُم مِّن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
«古兰经» 无可比拟的优美绝伦的主题, 在五个不同的地方被述及, 即: 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89与52:34, 35中。五处中有两处 (2:24与10:39) 的挑战是相同的, 而在其余三处, 曾向不信道的人提出了三个不同的要求。初看, 三个不同地方的挑战的不同形式似乎不协调。其实并非如此。实际上, 这些经文内一定的要求是时常存在的, 挑战在穆圣时代, 甚至到现在, 在 «古兰经» 所述及的所有不同形式中都是开放的。
在解释这些不同形式挑战以前, 值得注意的是: «古兰经» 提到这些要求时, 始终不忘财产与权力。如前所述, 除了在本节经文中, 没有新的挑战, 而只是重复10:39 中的那个挑战, 由此得到一个肯定的结论:在财产与权力问题和创作像 «古兰经» 或其一部分的挑战之间存在着一种紧密的连系。这一连系在于这样一个事实:即 «古兰经» 是以一种无价之宝向不信道的人提出的。当不信道的人向穆圣要求各种物质财宝时 (11:13), 他告诉他们, 他的 «古兰经» 是他的无与伦比的财宝; 当他们问: “为什么没有一个天使同他一起来?” (11:13) 他回答他们说, 天使确已降临于他, 因为天使们的使命是带来主的启示, 而主的启示已赐给了他。因此, 这两种要求—对于财宝与天使降临的要求—已由天使带来的无与伦比的财宝 «古兰经» 全被满足了, 创作此类天经的挑战是为证明它的无可匹敌的素质而提出的。
现在可以把含有这项挑战的不同经文分开来看。17:89 中提出的最大一个要求, 要求不信道的人拿一本具有像 «古兰经» 全文那样包含多种多样素质的书来。那节经文中并不要求不信道的人把他们的文章做为主的言语陈述。他们可以拿出他们自己的文章并宣称它可与 «古兰经» 相提并论, 或甚至超过 古兰经»。但是, 由于当时提出那个挑战时, 全部 «古兰经» 尚未降下, 并不要求不信道的人当时当地写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经文; 这种挑战因此暗示他们永远也写不出像 «古兰经» 那样的文章, 既写不出当时那种形式的
«古兰经», 也将写不出像将要降示完整的 «古兰经»。而且, 此一挑战并不只局限於穆圣时代的不信道的人, 也可延续到所有时代抱有疑问的人以及评论家。在11:14 节经文中, 不信道的人们被约照写十章而不是写全部 «古兰经», 理由是, 那节经文中的问题并不全面涉及整部 «古兰经» 的完美而是仅涉及其部分的完美。不信道的人反对其中某些部分, 说它们有缺陷。因此, 未曾要求他们写出像全部 «古兰经» 那样一本完整的经典, 而只是用十章来替代他们认为有缺陷的那些 «古兰经» 部分, 这样就可检验它们主张的真实性。说到选择十章这个特定数目, 可以这么说, 因为在17:89 中, 全部 «古兰经» 被声称为一部完美无缺的经典, 反对 «古兰经» 的人就被约照写 «古兰经» 那样的全部经典; 但是在11:14 节经文中的问题是, 某些部分受到反对, 因此请他们挑选他们认为最有缺陷的十个部分, 然后写出类似那些部分的文章。在10:39 节中, 只要求不信教的人写出类似 «古兰经» 中的一章。这是因为, 不像上述的两节经文, 那节经文的挑战是支持 «古兰经» 本身所作出的一个宣称, 而不是驳斥不信教者的反对意见的。在10:38节经文中, «古兰经» 声称有五种非常显著的特点。为了支持这一声称, 10:39 节经文对那些否认或怀疑它的人们提出一个挑战, 要他们以同样完美的形式写出一个单章, 其中要含有像第十章所含有的这些素质。第五次挑战写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经典, 是在这节注释 (2:24) 经文中, 这节像10:39 节一样也约请不信道者写出诸如 «古兰经» 那样的一个单章。这个挑战是在
«古兰经» 被声称为引导正直的人达到精神进步最高阶段之后。不信道的人被告知, 假如他们对 «古兰经» 是源自安拉有怀疑的话, 他们应该写出一章, 使之可与 «古兰经» 对其信者那样产生精神影响方面相比拟。请看我会出版的英文较大版本的古兰注释 (The Larger Edition of Commentary, PP.58-62)。
以上解说可以表明, 这些约请不信教的人写出诸如 «古兰经» 的挑战十分明显而一一分开的, 这些挑战始终存在, 其中没有一个可以替代或取消另一个。可是, 由于 «古兰经» 包含崇高的思想, 必然要用最美丽的措词与最简洁朴实的风格来作为表示那些思想的工具; 否则它的主题就会含糊不清, 使人产生疑问, «古兰经» 的绝美经文就会损毁。这样, 不论用什么形式, 不论在哪一方面, 不信教的人所受到的写出类如 «古兰经» 的文章的挑战, 文体优美与措词雅致使之与 «古兰经» 媲美, 都形成其挑战的一部分。
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Qur’an has been dealt with at five different places, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89 & 52:34, 35. In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. At first sight this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruous. But it is not so. In fact, these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time. The challenge is open even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Qur’an as it was in the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that their mention in the Qur’an is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in the present verse which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be safely concluded that there
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
Important Words:
عبد (servant). For the root meaning of the word see note under 1:5. As explained there, the verb عبد means, he showed complete submissiveness and humility; or he received the imprint of a thing. So عبد would mean a person who, through complete submission and humility to God, has become, as it were, an image of God. The word has been used here about the Holy Prophet by way of endearment and is expressive of the exalted position he holds in the sight of God.
شھداء (helpers) is the plural of شھید which is derived from شھد i.e. he was present; or he gave witness, etc. Thus شھیدmeans, one who is present; one who sees or witnesses; one who gives testimony or evidence; one who possesses much knowledge; one from whose knowledge nothing is hidden (Aqrab & Lane); also a helper (Mufradat). Following the last mentioned signification the word may also refer here to the Jews who were friends of the disbelievers (5:81) and spoke of the idolaters as being better guided in religion than those who believe (4:52).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses the Quran gave its first commandment to the people. Having been thus directly addressed by God, the polytheistic disbelievers felt a natural reaction to repudiate the monotheistic teaching of the Quran, because they felt that its acceptance meant that they should give up their long cherished beliefs.
In the present verse God says that if the Quran created doubts and disquietude in their minds and is not worthy of acceptance, the disbelievers should produce one like it. If they cannot, then this very fact would prove them to be wrong.
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Quran, has been dealt with at five different places in the Quran, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89; & 52:34, 35, and disbelievers have been challenged, to produce its equal.
In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. Thus, to begin with the largest demand in 17:89, disbelievers are challenged to produce the like of the whole Quran, and they have been told that even if all jinn and men should join together, they would not be able to produce it. In 11:14 the challenge is limited to the production of ten chapters. In 2:24 and 10:39, however, it has been confined to one Surah only; while in 52:34-35, the condition of even one Surahhas been omitted and disbelievers have been given the option of producing even a single narration similar to any one narration (i.e. announcement) of the Quran. On the face of it, this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruent and to spring from a lack of harmony in the Quran. Some commentators have endeavoured to explain away this seeming incongruity by saying that it was due to the challenge having been made at different times. At first disbelievers were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran. When they failed to do so, the challenge was whittled down to the production of the like of any ten chapters. When, however, they were unable to produce even ten chapters, the challenge was further reduced to the production of a single chapter; and, lastly, disbelievers were asked to produce even a single narration like any narration of the Quran. This explanation, however, does not seem to be satisfactory. The different Surahs containing these different challenges were revealed, in the following order: (1) 52:34, 35; (2) 17:89; (3) 11:14; (4) 10:39; (5) 2:24 (Rodwell). Now in Surah 52, the first to be revealed, the challenge is not qualified by any condition as regards size, disbelievers having been given the choice of producing even one single narration similar to any narration of the Quran. It is very strange that, whereas at first the challenge was unqualified and disbelievers were called upon to produce something comparable to any narration of the Quran, later it began to be hedged round by conditions and stipulations, first requiring disbelievers to produce the like of the whole book, then reducing the challenge to ten Surahs, and last of all reducing it to a single chapter. The order is most unnatural.
Moreover, some of the Surahs which contain this challenge were revealed on occasions so close to one another that some commentators have found it difficult to fix their order of priority with certainty. Hence it is unwise to settle this question on the basis of the chronological order of the Surahs containing this challenge.
Another point worth considering in this connection is that the verses in question do not mention any historical event but contain only a general challenge which stands for all time. Now the question is, in what form should the challenge be delivered to the world? Should disbelievers be called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran, or to produce ten Surahs like any ten Surahs of the Quran, or should they be called upon to bring forward the like of one Surah only or the like of any single piece of the Quran? If it is enough to make a demand for the like of a single piece of the Quran, why should a demand for the like of a Surah be made, and if it is enough to make a demand for the like of one Surah, the demand for the production of ten Surahs or, for that matter, for the whole of the Quran seems extravagant.
The fact is that these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time, and there is no need to enter into the question of their chronological order. The challenge can be made even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Quran as it was made at the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that mention of them in the Quran is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in 2:24, which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be concluded that there exists a close connection between the question of wealth and power and the challenge for the production of the like of the Quran or a part thereof. This connection lies in the fact that the Quran has been held out to disbelievers as a priceless treasure. When disbelievers demanded material treasures from the Holy Prophet and asked, Wherefore has not a treasure been sent down to him (11:13), they were told in reply that he possessed a matchless treasure in the Quran. The same reply was repeated when disbelievers asked, Wherefore has not an angel come with him? (11:13). They were told in reply that angels did descend upon him; for their function was to bring the word of God, and the Divine Word had already been vouchsafed to him. Thus both the demand for a treasure and the demand for the descent of angels have been jointly met by offering the Quran as a matchless treasure brought down by angels, and the challenge to produce the like of the Quran has been put forward as a proof of its peerless quality.
Let us now take the different verses containing this challenge separately. The greatest demand is that made in 17:89, where disbelievers are required to bring a book like the whole of the Quran in all its manifold qualities. In this verse disbelievers are not required to represent their composition as the word of God. They may bring it forward as their own composition and declare it to be the equal of or, for that matter, better than the Quran. As, however, it was necessary to define in what respect the work to be produced was to resemble the Quran, the Quran says in the next verse, And of a truth We have (herein) set forth for mankind in various ways, all kinds of similitudes, but most of men would reject everything but disbelief (17:90), hinting thereby that if disbelievers reject the Divine origin of the Quran and believe it to be the work of the Prophet himself, then let them produce a book which, like the Quran, should possess the following excellences: (a) it should throw light on every essential subject pertaining to religion; (b) its discussion of these subjects should be exhaustive, offering detailed guidance on every question; (c) it should be free from all harm and contain nothing but good; and (d) it should aim not at the good of any particular people or community but at the well-being of all mankind, containing guidance for all temperaments and dispositions as well as for all circumstances and conditions. But as at the time when this challenge was made the whole of the Quran had not yet been revealed, disbelievers were not required to produce the like of the Quran there and then; and the challenge thus implied a prophecy that they would not be able to produce the like of it, neither in the form in which it then was nor when it became complete. Again, the challenge was not confined to the disbelievers of the Prophet’s time alone, but extended to doubters and critics of all times.
The second verse which contains a challenge is 11:14. In this verse the disbelievers’ objection that the Prophet had not come with a treasure, nor had an angel come to him, has been met by calling upon them to bring similar Surahswhich they should represent as the word of God. The latter demand, i.e. that pertaining to the representation of the required production as the word of God, has a reference to the objection of the disbelievers that no angel has come down to the Prophet. They are told that if no angel has really come to him and his claim to receive divine revelation through the medium of angels is false, then let them also produce ten Surahs, claiming, like him, that they have been brought down to them by angels, and then see what their end would be. If they had not the courage to forge a lie against God, how could they think that the Prophet could be guilty of such fabrication or, if he had dared to commit this forgery, why had he remained secure from God’s punishment?
The reason why the disbelievers in this verse have been called upon to produce ten Surahs and not the whole Quran is that the question here did not relate to the perfection of the Quran in all respects, but to that of only a portion of it. The disbelievers had objected to some parts of it being defective, as is evident from the words: They imagine that thou art now perhaps going to abandon part of that which has been revealed to thee (11:13). Hence, they have not been required here to bring a complete book like the whole Quran, but only ten Surahs in place of those parts of the Quran which they deem to be defective, in order that the truth of their assertion may be tested.
As for the selection of the specific number 10 for this purpose, it should be noted that in Arabic 10 represents a complete number. As the object was to refute the assertion of the disbelievers that certain portions of the Quran were defective, therefore the disbelievers were given the option of making as many as ten efforts to substantiate their claim. They were thus asked to produce ten Surahs not because they could produce less than that number but because the best way to refute their objection was to afford them several opportunities to substantiate the truth of their assertion. In short, since in 17:89 the whole Quran was claimed to be a perfect Book, its opponents were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran; but since in 11:14 the point was that certain portions of it were objected to, so they were asked to choose ten such portions as appeared to them to be most defective and then, produce a composition even like those portions.
The third verse where the Quran has been declared to be matchless is 10:39. Here disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of only one Surah of the Quran. This is so because, unlike the above-mentioned two verses, the challenge made in this verse is in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. In the verses preceding 10:39, it was claimed that God possessed full authority over all things (see 10:32-36), and as a proof of this, in 10:38 the Quran was put forward as possessing the following excellences: (a) it contains teachings which could not be devised by man; (b) it has come in fulfilment of the prophecies contained in the previous Scriptures; (c) in it the imperfect teachings of the previous Scriptures have been perfected; (d) the word of God embodied in it has been made secure from being interpolated or tampered with by man; and (e) its teachings are meant for all men and all time. In support of this claim, verse 10:39 throws out a challenge to those who deny or doubt it to produce a single chapter containing these excellences in the same perfect form in which they are contained in this chapter, i.e. ch.10.
The verses 52:34, 35 contain the smallest of all demands. In these verses disbelievers are challenged to produce a single piece or a single announcement like any piece or announcement of the Quran. This demand also has been made in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. Hence the smallness of the demand. The claim in question is made in the opening verses of chapter 52, i.e. Surah At-Tur, to the effect that the Quranic revelation which was promised to mankind through Moses on Mount Sinai, will continue to be written, read and published throughout the world and that its followers will continue to multiply and will comprise not only common men but persons of great spiritual and temporal eminence, and that the fountain of the new faith will continue to provide the water of eternal life to all the countries of the world so that the fulfilment of these prophecies will constitute a proof of the fact that there is a Day of Judgement. Thereafter the Quran proceeds in 52:34, 35 to challenge disbelievers that, if they look upon the revelation of the Quran to be a fabrication, then they should come forward and make a prophecy like the one made above. This challenge is unconditional and without qualification. Disbelievers are not required to represent what they produce as the word of God, nor is it laid down as a condition that their prophecy should be of their own devising. They may as they like either make a prophecy of their own devising or borrow it from any other Scripture. Again, disbelievers are not asked to bring forward as many prophecies as there are in the Quran—and these are legion—but to bring forward only one single prophecy similar to any one of the prophecies made in the beginning of the Surah. They are told that they will not be able to fulfil this demand, for such a prophecy could be made only by the Being Who is the Creator and Owner of the heavens and the earth, along with their treasures, and Who not only knows, but possesses mastery of, the unseen. This challenge also stands for all time.
The fifth challenge to produce a like of the Quran is contained in the verse under comment (2:24) and here also, as in 10:39, disbelievers have been called upon to bring a Surah like that of the Quran, not in refutation of any of their objections, but in support of a claim made by the Quran itself. In the case of the verse under comment this claim is stated in the beginning of the Surah in 2:3 which says: This is a perfect Book; there is no doubt in it; it is a guidance for the righteous. Similarly, 10:39 is also preceded with the words: there is no doubt about it (10:38). This shows that the challenge to produce a chapter like one of the Quran has special reference to the peculiarity which is described by the words, there is no doubt about it. The challenge given in the present Surah is preceded by the claim that the Quran is a guidance for those who fear God (2:3), which means that it guides the righteous to the highest stages of spiritual progress. Hence in the above challenge it has been declared that if disbelievers are in doubt as to the Divine origin of the Quran, then they should bring forward a Surah that may be comparable to the Quran in the spiritual influence it exercises over its followers.
One of the characteristics of the Quran is that, whatever chapter of it we may read, it casts a subtle and sublime spiritual influence over our minds. Thus, instead of creating doubts it dispels them and takes men to a stage where no doubt can possibly survive, which is the stage of communion with God. This stage can be attained only by the study of the Quran; no other Book can compare with it in this respect.
The above explanation will show that all these challenges calling upon disbelievers to produce the like of the Quran are quite distinct and separate one from another, and all of them stand for all time, none of them superseding or cancelling any other. The misconception that these challenges are one and the same seems to have arisen from the wrong notion that in all of them it is the elegance of the Quranic style and diction that has been held out as unique and incomparable and that it is such elegance of Arabic diction that disbelievers have been called upon to produce. But this is not the case. The challenges made in the five Surahs referred to above are not one or identical nor do they make the same demand; each has a distinct and separate demand of its own and it is in keeping with the nature of these demands that disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran or a part of it.
The question now remains whether these demands also include a challenge to produce a work comparable to the Quran in elegance of style and diction. The answer is that they certainly do so, but only in an indirect way and not as a direct and fundamental demand, for sublime ideas can only be expressed in sublime language. As the Quran comprises sublime and lofty ideas, it was inevitable that the most beautiful diction and the most chaste style should have been employed as the vehicle for the expression of those ideas; otherwise, the subject matter was liable to remain obscure and doubtful and the perfect beauty of the Quran would have become marred. Thus, in whatever form and in whatever respect disbelievers have been challenged to produce a composition like the Quran, the demand for beauty of style and elegance of diction comparable to those of the Quran also forms a part of the challenge.
d
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
29Q
«古兰经» 无可比拟的优美绝伦的主题, 在五个不同的地方被述及, 即: 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89与52:34, 35中。五处中有两处 (2:24与10:39) 的挑战是相同的, 而在其余三处, 曾向不信道的人提出了三个不同的要求。初看, 三个不同地方的挑战的不同形式似乎不协调。其实并非如此。实际上, 这些经文内一定的要求是时常存在的, 挑战在穆圣时代, 甚至到现在, 在 «古兰经» 所述及的所有不同形式中都是开放的。
在解释这些不同形式挑战以前, 值得注意的是: «古兰经» 提到这些要求时, 始终不忘财产与权力。如前所述, 除了在本节经文中, 没有新的挑战, 而只是重复10:39 中的那个挑战, 由此得到一个肯定的结论:在财产与权力问题和创作像 «古兰经» 或其一部分的挑战之间存在着一种紧密的连系。这一连系在于这样一个事实:即 «古兰经» 是以一种无价之宝向不信道的人提出的。当不信道的人向穆圣要求各种物质财宝时 (11:13), 他告诉他们, 他的 «古兰经» 是他的无与伦比的财宝; 当他们问: “为什么没有一个天使同他一起来?” (11:13) 他回答他们说, 天使确已降临于他, 因为天使们的使命是带来主的启示, 而主的启示已赐给了他。因此, 这两种要求—对于财宝与天使降临的要求—已由天使带来的无与伦比的财宝 «古兰经» 全被满足了, 创作此类天经的挑战是为证明它的无可匹敌的素质而提出的。
现在可以把含有这项挑战的不同经文分开来看。17:89 中提出的最大一个要求, 要求不信道的人拿一本具有像 «古兰经» 全文那样包含多种多样素质的书来。那节经文中并不要求不信道的人把他们的文章做为主的言语陈述。他们可以拿出他们自己的文章并宣称它可与 «古兰经» 相提并论, 或甚至超过 古兰经»。但是, 由于当时提出那个挑战时, 全部 «古兰经» 尚未降下, 并不要求不信道的人当时当地写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经文; 这种挑战因此暗示他们永远也写不出像 «古兰经» 那样的文章, 既写不出当时那种形式的
«古兰经», 也将写不出像将要降示完整的 «古兰经»。而且, 此一挑战并不只局限於穆圣时代的不信道的人, 也可延续到所有时代抱有疑问的人以及评论家。在11:14 节经文中, 不信道的人们被约照写十章而不是写全部 «古兰经», 理由是, 那节经文中的问题并不全面涉及整部 «古兰经» 的完美而是仅涉及其部分的完美。不信道的人反对其中某些部分, 说它们有缺陷。因此, 未曾要求他们写出像全部 «古兰经» 那样一本完整的经典, 而只是用十章来替代他们认为有缺陷的那些 «古兰经» 部分, 这样就可检验它们主张的真实性。说到选择十章这个特定数目, 可以这么说, 因为在17:89 中, 全部 «古兰经» 被声称为一部完美无缺的经典, 反对 «古兰经» 的人就被约照写 «古兰经» 那样的全部经典; 但是在11:14 节经文中的问题是, 某些部分受到反对, 因此请他们挑选他们认为最有缺陷的十个部分, 然后写出类似那些部分的文章。在10:39 节中, 只要求不信教的人写出类似 «古兰经» 中的一章。这是因为, 不像上述的两节经文, 那节经文的挑战是支持 «古兰经» 本身所作出的一个宣称, 而不是驳斥不信教者的反对意见的。在10:38节经文中, «古兰经» 声称有五种非常显著的特点。为了支持这一声称, 10:39 节经文对那些否认或怀疑它的人们提出一个挑战, 要他们以同样完美的形式写出一个单章, 其中要含有像第十章所含有的这些素质。第五次挑战写出像 «古兰经» 那样的经典, 是在这节注释 (2:24) 经文中, 这节像10:39 节一样也约请不信道者写出诸如 «古兰经» 那样的一个单章。这个挑战是在
«古兰经» 被声称为引导正直的人达到精神进步最高阶段之后。不信道的人被告知, 假如他们对 «古兰经» 是源自安拉有怀疑的话, 他们应该写出一章, 使之可与 «古兰经» 对其信者那样产生精神影响方面相比拟。请看我会出版的英文较大版本的古兰注释 (The Larger Edition of Commentary, PP.58-62)。
以上解说可以表明, 这些约请不信教的人写出诸如 «古兰经» 的挑战十分明显而一一分开的, 这些挑战始终存在, 其中没有一个可以替代或取消另一个。可是, 由于 «古兰经» 包含崇高的思想, 必然要用最美丽的措词与最简洁朴实的风格来作为表示那些思想的工具; 否则它的主题就会含糊不清, 使人产生疑问, «古兰经» 的绝美经文就会损毁。这样, 不论用什么形式, 不论在哪一方面, 不信教的人所受到的写出类如 «古兰经» 的文章的挑战, 文体优美与措词雅致使之与 «古兰经» 媲美, 都形成其挑战的一部分。
a
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
30
Important Words:
عبد (servant). For the root meaning of the word see note under 1:5. As explained there, the verb عبد means, he showed complete submissiveness and humility; or he received the imprint of a thing. So عبد would mean a person who, through complete submission and humility to God, has become, as it were, an image of God. The word has been used here about the Holy Prophet by way of endearment and is expressive of the exalted position he holds in the sight of God.
شھداء (helpers) is the plural of شھید which is derived from شھد i.e. he was present; or he gave witness, etc. Thus شھیدmeans, one who is present; one who sees or witnesses; one who gives testimony or evidence; one who possesses much knowledge; one from whose knowledge nothing is hidden (Aqrab & Lane); also a helper (Mufradat). Following the last mentioned signification the word may also refer here to the Jews who were friends of the disbelievers (5:81) and spoke of the idolaters as being better guided in religion than those who believe (4:52).
Commentary:
In the preceding two verses the Quran gave its first commandment to the people. Having been thus directly addressed by God, the polytheistic disbelievers felt a natural reaction to repudiate the monotheistic teaching of the Quran, because they felt that its acceptance meant that they should give up their long cherished beliefs.
In the present verse God says that if the Quran created doubts and disquietude in their minds and is not worthy of acceptance, the disbelievers should produce one like it. If they cannot, then this very fact would prove them to be wrong.
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Quran, has been dealt with at five different places in the Quran, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89; & 52:34, 35, and disbelievers have been challenged, to produce its equal.
In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. Thus, to begin with the largest demand in 17:89, disbelievers are challenged to produce the like of the whole Quran, and they have been told that even if all jinn and men should join together, they would not be able to produce it. In 11:14 the challenge is limited to the production of ten chapters. In 2:24 and 10:39, however, it has been confined to one Surah only; while in 52:34-35, the condition of even one Surahhas been omitted and disbelievers have been given the option of producing even a single narration similar to any one narration (i.e. announcement) of the Quran. On the face of it, this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruent and to spring from a lack of harmony in the Quran. Some commentators have endeavoured to explain away this seeming incongruity by saying that it was due to the challenge having been made at different times. At first disbelievers were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran. When they failed to do so, the challenge was whittled down to the production of the like of any ten chapters. When, however, they were unable to produce even ten chapters, the challenge was further reduced to the production of a single chapter; and, lastly, disbelievers were asked to produce even a single narration like any narration of the Quran. This explanation, however, does not seem to be satisfactory. The different Surahs containing these different challenges were revealed, in the following order: (1) 52:34, 35; (2) 17:89; (3) 11:14; (4) 10:39; (5) 2:24 (Rodwell). Now in Surah 52, the first to be revealed, the challenge is not qualified by any condition as regards size, disbelievers having been given the choice of producing even one single narration similar to any narration of the Quran. It is very strange that, whereas at first the challenge was unqualified and disbelievers were called upon to produce something comparable to any narration of the Quran, later it began to be hedged round by conditions and stipulations, first requiring disbelievers to produce the like of the whole book, then reducing the challenge to ten Surahs, and last of all reducing it to a single chapter. The order is most unnatural.
Moreover, some of the Surahs which contain this challenge were revealed on occasions so close to one another that some commentators have found it difficult to fix their order of priority with certainty. Hence it is unwise to settle this question on the basis of the chronological order of the Surahs containing this challenge.
Another point worth considering in this connection is that the verses in question do not mention any historical event but contain only a general challenge which stands for all time. Now the question is, in what form should the challenge be delivered to the world? Should disbelievers be called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran, or to produce ten Surahs like any ten Surahs of the Quran, or should they be called upon to bring forward the like of one Surah only or the like of any single piece of the Quran? If it is enough to make a demand for the like of a single piece of the Quran, why should a demand for the like of a Surah be made, and if it is enough to make a demand for the like of one Surah, the demand for the production of ten Surahs or, for that matter, for the whole of the Quran seems extravagant.
The fact is that these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time, and there is no need to enter into the question of their chronological order. The challenge can be made even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Quran as it was made at the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that mention of them in the Quran is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in 2:24, which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be concluded that there exists a close connection between the question of wealth and power and the challenge for the production of the like of the Quran or a part thereof. This connection lies in the fact that the Quran has been held out to disbelievers as a priceless treasure. When disbelievers demanded material treasures from the Holy Prophet and asked, Wherefore has not a treasure been sent down to him (11:13), they were told in reply that he possessed a matchless treasure in the Quran. The same reply was repeated when disbelievers asked, Wherefore has not an angel come with him? (11:13). They were told in reply that angels did descend upon him; for their function was to bring the word of God, and the Divine Word had already been vouchsafed to him. Thus both the demand for a treasure and the demand for the descent of angels have been jointly met by offering the Quran as a matchless treasure brought down by angels, and the challenge to produce the like of the Quran has been put forward as a proof of its peerless quality.
Let us now take the different verses containing this challenge separately. The greatest demand is that made in 17:89, where disbelievers are required to bring a book like the whole of the Quran in all its manifold qualities. In this verse disbelievers are not required to represent their composition as the word of God. They may bring it forward as their own composition and declare it to be the equal of or, for that matter, better than the Quran. As, however, it was necessary to define in what respect the work to be produced was to resemble the Quran, the Quran says in the next verse, And of a truth We have (herein) set forth for mankind in various ways, all kinds of similitudes, but most of men would reject everything but disbelief (17:90), hinting thereby that if disbelievers reject the Divine origin of the Quran and believe it to be the work of the Prophet himself, then let them produce a book which, like the Quran, should possess the following excellences: (a) it should throw light on every essential subject pertaining to religion; (b) its discussion of these subjects should be exhaustive, offering detailed guidance on every question; (c) it should be free from all harm and contain nothing but good; and (d) it should aim not at the good of any particular people or community but at the well-being of all mankind, containing guidance for all temperaments and dispositions as well as for all circumstances and conditions. But as at the time when this challenge was made the whole of the Quran had not yet been revealed, disbelievers were not required to produce the like of the Quran there and then; and the challenge thus implied a prophecy that they would not be able to produce the like of it, neither in the form in which it then was nor when it became complete. Again, the challenge was not confined to the disbelievers of the Prophet’s time alone, but extended to doubters and critics of all times.
The second verse which contains a challenge is 11:14. In this verse the disbelievers’ objection that the Prophet had not come with a treasure, nor had an angel come to him, has been met by calling upon them to bring similar Surahswhich they should represent as the word of God. The latter demand, i.e. that pertaining to the representation of the required production as the word of God, has a reference to the objection of the disbelievers that no angel has come down to the Prophet. They are told that if no angel has really come to him and his claim to receive divine revelation through the medium of angels is false, then let them also produce ten Surahs, claiming, like him, that they have been brought down to them by angels, and then see what their end would be. If they had not the courage to forge a lie against God, how could they think that the Prophet could be guilty of such fabrication or, if he had dared to commit this forgery, why had he remained secure from God’s punishment?
The reason why the disbelievers in this verse have been called upon to produce ten Surahs and not the whole Quran is that the question here did not relate to the perfection of the Quran in all respects, but to that of only a portion of it. The disbelievers had objected to some parts of it being defective, as is evident from the words: They imagine that thou art now perhaps going to abandon part of that which has been revealed to thee (11:13). Hence, they have not been required here to bring a complete book like the whole Quran, but only ten Surahs in place of those parts of the Quran which they deem to be defective, in order that the truth of their assertion may be tested.
As for the selection of the specific number 10 for this purpose, it should be noted that in Arabic 10 represents a complete number. As the object was to refute the assertion of the disbelievers that certain portions of the Quran were defective, therefore the disbelievers were given the option of making as many as ten efforts to substantiate their claim. They were thus asked to produce ten Surahs not because they could produce less than that number but because the best way to refute their objection was to afford them several opportunities to substantiate the truth of their assertion. In short, since in 17:89 the whole Quran was claimed to be a perfect Book, its opponents were called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran; but since in 11:14 the point was that certain portions of it were objected to, so they were asked to choose ten such portions as appeared to them to be most defective and then, produce a composition even like those portions.
The third verse where the Quran has been declared to be matchless is 10:39. Here disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of only one Surah of the Quran. This is so because, unlike the above-mentioned two verses, the challenge made in this verse is in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. In the verses preceding 10:39, it was claimed that God possessed full authority over all things (see 10:32-36), and as a proof of this, in 10:38 the Quran was put forward as possessing the following excellences: (a) it contains teachings which could not be devised by man; (b) it has come in fulfilment of the prophecies contained in the previous Scriptures; (c) in it the imperfect teachings of the previous Scriptures have been perfected; (d) the word of God embodied in it has been made secure from being interpolated or tampered with by man; and (e) its teachings are meant for all men and all time. In support of this claim, verse 10:39 throws out a challenge to those who deny or doubt it to produce a single chapter containing these excellences in the same perfect form in which they are contained in this chapter, i.e. ch.10.
The verses 52:34, 35 contain the smallest of all demands. In these verses disbelievers are challenged to produce a single piece or a single announcement like any piece or announcement of the Quran. This demand also has been made in support of a claim made by the Quran itself and not in refutation of any objection on the part of disbelievers. Hence the smallness of the demand. The claim in question is made in the opening verses of chapter 52, i.e. Surah At-Tur, to the effect that the Quranic revelation which was promised to mankind through Moses on Mount Sinai, will continue to be written, read and published throughout the world and that its followers will continue to multiply and will comprise not only common men but persons of great spiritual and temporal eminence, and that the fountain of the new faith will continue to provide the water of eternal life to all the countries of the world so that the fulfilment of these prophecies will constitute a proof of the fact that there is a Day of Judgement. Thereafter the Quran proceeds in 52:34, 35 to challenge disbelievers that, if they look upon the revelation of the Quran to be a fabrication, then they should come forward and make a prophecy like the one made above. This challenge is unconditional and without qualification. Disbelievers are not required to represent what they produce as the word of God, nor is it laid down as a condition that their prophecy should be of their own devising. They may as they like either make a prophecy of their own devising or borrow it from any other Scripture. Again, disbelievers are not asked to bring forward as many prophecies as there are in the Quran—and these are legion—but to bring forward only one single prophecy similar to any one of the prophecies made in the beginning of the Surah. They are told that they will not be able to fulfil this demand, for such a prophecy could be made only by the Being Who is the Creator and Owner of the heavens and the earth, along with their treasures, and Who not only knows, but possesses mastery of, the unseen. This challenge also stands for all time.
The fifth challenge to produce a like of the Quran is contained in the verse under comment (2:24) and here also, as in 10:39, disbelievers have been called upon to bring a Surah like that of the Quran, not in refutation of any of their objections, but in support of a claim made by the Quran itself. In the case of the verse under comment this claim is stated in the beginning of the Surah in 2:3 which says: This is a perfect Book; there is no doubt in it; it is a guidance for the righteous. Similarly, 10:39 is also preceded with the words: there is no doubt about it (10:38). This shows that the challenge to produce a chapter like one of the Quran has special reference to the peculiarity which is described by the words, there is no doubt about it. The challenge given in the present Surah is preceded by the claim that the Quran is a guidance for those who fear God (2:3), which means that it guides the righteous to the highest stages of spiritual progress. Hence in the above challenge it has been declared that if disbelievers are in doubt as to the Divine origin of the Quran, then they should bring forward a Surah that may be comparable to the Quran in the spiritual influence it exercises over its followers.
One of the characteristics of the Quran is that, whatever chapter of it we may read, it casts a subtle and sublime spiritual influence over our minds. Thus, instead of creating doubts it dispels them and takes men to a stage where no doubt can possibly survive, which is the stage of communion with God. This stage can be attained only by the study of the Quran; no other Book can compare with it in this respect.
The above explanation will show that all these challenges calling upon disbelievers to produce the like of the Quran are quite distinct and separate one from another, and all of them stand for all time, none of them superseding or cancelling any other. The misconception that these challenges are one and the same seems to have arisen from the wrong notion that in all of them it is the elegance of the Quranic style and diction that has been held out as unique and incomparable and that it is such elegance of Arabic diction that disbelievers have been called upon to produce. But this is not the case. The challenges made in the five Surahs referred to above are not one or identical nor do they make the same demand; each has a distinct and separate demand of its own and it is in keeping with the nature of these demands that disbelievers have been called upon to produce the like of the whole Quran or a part of it.
The question now remains whether these demands also include a challenge to produce a work comparable to the Quran in elegance of style and diction. The answer is that they certainly do so, but only in an indirect way and not as a direct and fundamental demand, for sublime ideas can only be expressed in sublime language. As the Quran comprises sublime and lofty ideas, it was inevitable that the most beautiful diction and the most chaste style should have been employed as the vehicle for the expression of those ideas; otherwise, the subject matter was liable to remain obscure and doubtful and the perfect beauty of the Quran would have become marred. Thus, in whatever form and in whatever respect disbelievers have been challenged to produce a composition like the Quran, the demand for beauty of style and elegance of diction comparable to those of the Quran also forms a part of the challenge.
d
10:39; 11:14; 17:89; 52:35.
44
The subject of the incomparable excellence of the Qur’an has been dealt with at five different places, i.e. in 2:24; 10:39; 11:14; 17:89 & 52:34, 35. In two of these five verses (2:24 & 10:39) the challenge is identical, while in the remaining three verses three separate and different demands have been made from disbelievers. At first sight this difference in the form of the challenge at different places seems to be incongruous. But it is not so. In fact, these verses contain certain demands which stand for all time. The challenge is open even today in all the different forms mentioned in the Qur’an as it was in the time of the Holy Prophet.
Before explaining the various forms of these challenges it is worth noting that their mention in the Qur’an is invariably accompanied by a reference to wealth and power, except in the present verse which, as already stated, does not contain a new challenge but only repeats the challenge made in 10:39. From this it may be safely concluded that there
وَعَلَّمَ ءَادَمَ ٱلْأَسْمَآءَ كُلَّهَا ثُمَّ عَرَضَهُمْ عَلَى ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةِ فَقَالَ أَنۢبِـُٔونِى بِأَسْمَآءِ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
7:181; 17:111; 20:9; 59:24-25.
“一切” 这词在这里并不是指绝对的总数。它只是指 “所必需的一切”。«古兰经» 也在别的地方按此意义使用这词 (6:45; 27:17, 24; 28:58)。
اَسْمَاء (Asma’) 是 اِسْم (Ism) 的复数, 意思是名称或属性; 一种事物的标记或迹象 (Lane和مُفْرَدَات)。注释者们关于 اَسْمَاء (名称) 这词在这里的意义有不同的看法, 有的认为安拉教了阿丹不同事物的名称, 即他教了阿丹语言的原则。毫无疑问, 人类为了文明, 需要语言, 而安拉一定已经教了阿丹语言的原则, 但是 «古兰经» 指出, 有一些 اَسْمَاء (名称或常德) 是人类为了在他道德上的完美所必须学习的, 这在 (7:181) 中提到了。这表明如果缺乏对安拉常德的正确概念和理解, 人就不能知道安拉, 而这只能由安拉来教导。因而有必要在最初时, 安拉就把他的常德知识传授给阿丹 (人), 以便他知道并辨认他 (安拉), 从而取得与他相接近而不致远离他。按照 «古兰经» 所述, 人与天使的不同在于前者可以培养安拉所有的完美常德, 而后者只是体现出其中一部分。天使没有他们自己的意愿, 而只是被动地执行安拉分配给他们的职责 (66:7)。另一方面, 被赋予意志和自由选择的人与天使不同的地方还在于他具有能力使他完美地表现所有安拉常德。简言之, 本节经文表明了安拉最先灌输给阿丹以自由意愿及理解各种安拉的常德所必需的智能, 然后给予他那些常德的知识。
代名词هُمْ (hum, 他们) 指示这里所提到的对象不是无生命的东西。因为阿文中这类代名词仅用于有理性的生命。所以这一词句的意义是, 安拉赐予了天使阿丹子孙中显著的敬畏人士将来表现安拉常德的一个精神境界, 继而他们被问到他们能否表现像那些人们所表现的安拉常德。在这方面, 他们表示他们是无能力的。这就是本节中这句话 “就把他们的名称告诉我吧!” 的意义。
عَلَّمَ اٰدَمَ الۡاَسۡمَآءَ : اِسم کے معنے اِسمِ ذات یعنی نام کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور صفت کے بھی۔ اس آیت میں اسماء سے مراد صفاتِ الٰہیہ ہیں‘ جن کا صحیح علم خداتعالیٰ کے سکھانے سے ہی آسکتا ہے۔ آدمؑ چونکہ مذہب کے قیام اور اللہ تعالیٰ سے اس کی مخلوق کے وصال کی غرض سے مبعوث ہوئے تھے اس لئے ضروری تھا کہ انہیں اسماء الٰہیہ سکھائے جاتے تاکہ ان کی امت ان ناموں کے ذریعہ سے خداتعالیٰ کو شناخت کرتی اور اس سے تعلق پیدا کرتی۔ اگر یہ نام نہ سکھائے جاتے تو ان کی امت کے ملحد اور بے دین ہونے کا خطرہ تھا۔ اس کے ایک اور معنے یہ بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ چونکہ انسانوں کو متمدن ہونے کی صورت می
’’اگر تم درست بات کہہ رہے ہو‘‘یہ ترجمہ اِنْ کُنْتُمْ صٰدِقِیْنَ کا ہے۔ عربی زبان میں کہتے ہیں صَدَقَنِیْ فُلاَ نٌ اَیْ قَالَ لِیَ الصِّدْقَ۔ یعنی اس نے جو بات کہی درست تھی (تاج) اسی طرح حدیث میں آتا ہے کہ ایک دفعہ جبرائیل علیہ السلام نے آنحضرت صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے ایک سوال کیا اور آپ کے جواب پر اس نے کہا صَدَقْتَ یعنی آپ نے درست کہا ہے اس کے یہ معنے نہیں تھے کہ آپ نے سچ بولا ہے۔
اَنۡۢبِـُٔوۡنِیۡ بِاَسۡمَآءِ ہٰۤؤُلَآءِ : چونکہ ملائکہ کو آدم کے خلیفہ بنائے جانے پر اس لئے تعجب تھا کہ اس کے سبب سے خون ریزی اور فساد ہوگا۔اس لئے اللہ تعالیٰ نے ملائکہ کو آئندہ پیدا ہونے والے کاملین کشفی طور پر دکھائے خواہ وہ تقویٰ کے لحاظ سے کامل بننے والے تھے یا کفر کے لحاظ سے۔ اور پوچھا کہ اگر تمہاری بات درست ہے تو پھر ان کے نام بتاؤ‘ یعنی اللہ تعالیٰ کے رحم یا غضب کی صفات جس طرح ان لوگوں کے ذریعہ ظاہر ہونے والی ہیں کیا تم ان کی تفصیل دوسرں کو بتا سکتے ہو۔ دوسرے معنے اس آیت کے یہ بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ آدمؑ کی اولاد میں جو لوگ نیکی میں کامل ہونے والے تھے ان کے
7:181; 17:111; 20:9; 59:24-25.
The word "all" used here does not imply absolute totality. It simply means all that was necessary. The Qur’an uses this word in this sense elsewhere also (6:45; 27:17, 24; 28:58).
Asma’ is plural of Ism which means, name or attribute; a mark or a sign of a thing (Lane & Mufradat). Commentators differ as to what is here meant by the word Asma’ (names). Some think that God taught Adam the names of different things and objects, i.e. He taught him the principles of language. There is no doubt that man needed language in order to become civilized and God must have taught Adam its principles, but the Qur’an indicates that there are Asma’ (names or attributes) which man must learn for the perfection of his morals. They are referred to in 7:181. This shows that man cannot attain to Divine knowledge without a correct conception and comprehension of God’s attributes and that they can be taught only by God. So it was necessary that God should have, in the very beginning, given Adam (man) knowledge of His attributes so that he should know and recognize Him and attain His nearness and should not drift away from Him. According to the Qur’an, man differs
The pronoun hum (these) shows that the objects referred to here are not inanimate things; for in Arabic this form of pronoun is used only for rational beings. The meaning of the expression, therefore, would be that God granted to the angels a vision of the outstandingly righteous persons from among the progeny of Adam who were to become the manifestation of Divine attributes in the future, and were then asked whether they themselves could manifest the Divine attributes like them, to which they signified their inability. This is what is meant by the words, Tell Me the names of these, occurring in the present verse.
7:181; 17:111; 20:9; 59:24, 25.
Important Words:
اسماء (names) is the plural of اسم for which see note on 1:1. اسم means, (1) the name of a thing, i.e. a word fixed for a thing or attribute for the purpose of distinction; (2) a mark or sign of a thing (Aqrab); (3) fame or reputation of a person or thing (Lane); (4) a word, its meanings and combinations (Mufradat).
صادقین (right) is the plural of صادق which is derived from صدق. They say صدق فی ظنه i.e. he was or is correct in his opinion (Lane). صدق فی الحدیث means, he spoke the truth. صدقه means, he was sincere to him or he was his well-wisher (Aqrab). صدقتmeans: (1) you are speaking the truth, not a lie (2) what you say is right, not wrong. It is in the latter sense that the word has been used in the present verse.
Commentary:
Commentators differ as to what is here meant by the word اسماء (names). Some think that God taught Adam the names of different things and objects, i.e. He taught him language. Others hold that God taught him the names of his offspring.
There is no doubt that man needed language in order to become civilized and God must have taught Adam a language, but the Quran indicates that there are اسماء (names or attributes) which man must learn for the perfection of his religion and morals. They are referred to in the verse: And to Allah alone belong all perfect attributes; so call on Him by these and leave alone those who deviate from the right way with respect to His attributes. They shall be requited with what they do (7:181). This verse shows that man cannot attain to divine knowledge without a correct conception of God’s اسماء or attributes and that this can be taught only by God. So it was necessary that God should have, in the very beginning, given Adam knowledge of His attributes so that man should know and recognize Him and attain His nearness, and should not drift away from Him.
The verse quoted above (7:181) shows that the word اسماء (names) is used to signify the attributes of God and that a Muslim must be familiar with those attributes, so that he may pray to Him, invoking attributes most suited to the nature of the prayer. For example, if one prays for forgiveness and mercy, one should invoke the attributes of forgiveness and mercy; and if the prayer be for the attainment of righteousness, God should be invoked by names which pertain to that quality. The above verse also indicates that man must not of himself devise the attributes of God, because it is only God who can describe His attributes; man, being himself the creation of God, cannot do so. In fact, those who try to devise God’s attributes have been threatened with divine punishment.
In short, we learn from this verse that a Muslim must know God’s اسماء (names) which can be taught by Him alone, and which man has no right to devise out of his own fancy. There is strong evidence that God gave Adam a knowledge of His attributes. The view gains further strength when we take into consideration the difference between man and angel. According to the Quran, man differs from angels in that, whereas the former can be an image or reflex of الاسماءالحسنی i.e. all the divine attributes, the latter represent only a few of them. The Quran says: They (the angels) do what they are bidden to do (66:7) which implies that the angels cannot act of their own free will. They have no will of their own, but passively perform the functions allotted to them by Providence. On the other hand, man, endowed with volition and free choice, differs from angels in that he has capabilities which make him a perfect manifestation of all divine attributes. A saying of the Holy Prophet—"the best morals in man are those which are in conformity with the great attributes of God" (‘Ummal, ii. 2)—also points to this. As God is Merciful, we should also show mercy to men; as He is Forgiving, so we must also be ready to forgive our fellow beings; as He connives at faults, so we must try to imitate Him in this particular; and as He protects the weak, so we must be ready to protect the weak, and so on. This injunction of the Holy Prophet justifies the inference that man has the capability to manifest in himself all the attributes of God. Thus, both the Quran and the Holy Prophet’s sayings are agreed that man and angel differ in the manifestation of divine attributes, and the "names" in the clause, He taught Adam all the names, refer to the attributes of God.
The verse means that God first implanted in Adam free will and the needful capacity for the comprehension of the various divine attributes, and then gave him the knowledge of those attributes, which was impossible without the power of assimilation. The verse that follows corroborates this meaning; for therein it is stated that the اسماء (attributes) were such as were not wholly known to the angels and it is evident that such اسماء are only the divine attributes. The word اسماء may also mean the qualities of different things in nature. As man was to make use of the forces of nature, God gave Adam the capacity of knowing their qualities and properties. The word كل (all) used here does not imply absolute totality. It simply means all that was necessary. The Quran uses this word in this sense elsewhere also (see 6:45; 27:7, 24; 28:58). The pronoun in the words عرضھم (He put the objects of these names) shows that the objects referred to here are not inanimate things; for in Arabic this form of pronoun is used only for rational beings. The meaning of the expression, therefore, would be that God showed Adam in a kashf (vision) certain human beings from among his progeny who were to be the manifestations of divine attributes in the future. Such beings were the Prophets or other holy persons who were to enjoy such nearness to God as to become His image and through whom God was to reform mankind. The angels were then asked whether they could manifest the divine attributes like them. This is what is meant by the words, Tell Me the names of these, occurring in the present verse.
a
7:181; 17:111; 20:9; 59:24-25.
35
“一切” 这词在这里并不是指绝对的总数。它只是指 “所必需的一切”。«古兰经» 也在别的地方按此意义使用这词 (6:45; 27:17, 24; 28:58)。
36
اَسْمَاء (Asma’) 是 اِسْم (Ism) 的复数, 意思是名称或属性; 一种事物的标记或迹象 (Lane和مُفْرَدَات)。注释者们关于 اَسْمَاء (名称) 这词在这里的意义有不同的看法, 有的认为安拉教了阿丹不同事物的名称, 即他教了阿丹语言的原则。毫无疑问, 人类为了文明, 需要语言, 而安拉一定已经教了阿丹语言的原则, 但是 «古兰经» 指出, 有一些 اَسْمَاء (名称或常德) 是人类为了在他道德上的完美所必须学习的, 这在 (7:181) 中提到了。这表明如果缺乏对安拉常德的正确概念和理解, 人就不能知道安拉, 而这只能由安拉来教导。因而有必要在最初时, 安拉就把他的常德知识传授给阿丹 (人), 以便他知道并辨认他 (安拉), 从而取得与他相接近而不致远离他。按照 «古兰经» 所述, 人与天使的不同在于前者可以培养安拉所有的完美常德, 而后者只是体现出其中一部分。天使没有他们自己的意愿, 而只是被动地执行安拉分配给他们的职责 (66:7)。另一方面, 被赋予意志和自由选择的人与天使不同的地方还在于他具有能力使他完美地表现所有安拉常德。简言之, 本节经文表明了安拉最先灌输给阿丹以自由意愿及理解各种安拉的常德所必需的智能, 然后给予他那些常德的知识。
37
代名词هُمْ (hum, 他们) 指示这里所提到的对象不是无生命的东西。因为阿文中这类代名词仅用于有理性的生命。所以这一词句的意义是, 安拉赐予了天使阿丹子孙中显著的敬畏人士将来表现安拉常德的一个精神境界, 继而他们被问到他们能否表现像那些人们所表现的安拉常德。在这方面, 他们表示他们是无能力的。这就是本节中这句话 “就把他们的名称告诉我吧!” 的意义。
2
عَلَّمَ اٰدَمَ الۡاَسۡمَآءَ : اِسم کے معنے اِسمِ ذات یعنی نام کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور صفت کے بھی۔ اس آیت میں اسماء سے مراد صفاتِ الٰہیہ ہیں‘ جن کا صحیح علم خداتعالیٰ کے سکھانے سے ہی آسکتا ہے۔ آدمؑ چونکہ مذہب کے قیام اور اللہ تعالیٰ سے اس کی مخلوق کے وصال کی غرض سے مبعوث ہوئے تھے اس لئے ضروری تھا کہ انہیں اسماء الٰہیہ سکھائے جاتے تاکہ ان کی امت ان ناموں کے ذریعہ سے خداتعالیٰ کو شناخت کرتی اور اس سے تعلق پیدا کرتی۔ اگر یہ نام نہ سکھائے جاتے تو ان کی امت کے ملحد اور بے دین ہونے کا خطرہ تھا۔ اس کے ایک اور معنے یہ بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ چونکہ انسانوں کو متمدن ہونے کی صورت می
3
’’اگر تم درست بات کہہ رہے ہو‘‘یہ ترجمہ اِنْ کُنْتُمْ صٰدِقِیْنَ کا ہے۔ عربی زبان میں کہتے ہیں صَدَقَنِیْ فُلاَ نٌ اَیْ قَالَ لِیَ الصِّدْقَ۔ یعنی اس نے جو بات کہی درست تھی (تاج) اسی طرح حدیث میں آتا ہے کہ ایک دفعہ جبرائیل علیہ السلام نے آنحضرت صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے ایک سوال کیا اور آپ کے جواب پر اس نے کہا صَدَقْتَ یعنی آپ نے درست کہا ہے اس کے یہ معنے نہیں تھے کہ آپ نے سچ بولا ہے۔
4
اَنۡۢبِـُٔوۡنِیۡ بِاَسۡمَآءِ ہٰۤؤُلَآءِ : چونکہ ملائکہ کو آدم کے خلیفہ بنائے جانے پر اس لئے تعجب تھا کہ اس کے سبب سے خون ریزی اور فساد ہوگا۔اس لئے اللہ تعالیٰ نے ملائکہ کو آئندہ پیدا ہونے والے کاملین کشفی طور پر دکھائے خواہ وہ تقویٰ کے لحاظ سے کامل بننے والے تھے یا کفر کے لحاظ سے۔ اور پوچھا کہ اگر تمہاری بات درست ہے تو پھر ان کے نام بتاؤ‘ یعنی اللہ تعالیٰ کے رحم یا غضب کی صفات جس طرح ان لوگوں کے ذریعہ ظاہر ہونے والی ہیں کیا تم ان کی تفصیل دوسرں کو بتا سکتے ہو۔ دوسرے معنے اس آیت کے یہ بھی ہو سکتے ہیں کہ آدمؑ کی اولاد میں جو لوگ نیکی میں کامل ہونے والے تھے ان کے
a
7:181; 17:111; 20:9; 59:24, 25.
38
Important Words:
اسماء (names) is the plural of اسم for which see note on 1:1. اسم means, (1) the name of a thing, i.e. a word fixed for a thing or attribute for the purpose of distinction; (2) a mark or sign of a thing (Aqrab); (3) fame or reputation of a person or thing (Lane); (4) a word, its meanings and combinations (Mufradat).
صادقین (right) is the plural of صادق which is derived from صدق. They say صدق فی ظنه i.e. he was or is correct in his opinion (Lane). صدق فی الحدیث means, he spoke the truth. صدقه means, he was sincere to him or he was his well-wisher (Aqrab). صدقتmeans: (1) you are speaking the truth, not a lie (2) what you say is right, not wrong. It is in the latter sense that the word has been used in the present verse.
Commentary:
Commentators differ as to what is here meant by the word اسماء (names). Some think that God taught Adam the names of different things and objects, i.e. He taught him language. Others hold that God taught him the names of his offspring.
There is no doubt that man needed language in order to become civilized and God must have taught Adam a language, but the Quran indicates that there are اسماء (names or attributes) which man must learn for the perfection of his religion and morals. They are referred to in the verse: And to Allah alone belong all perfect attributes; so call on Him by these and leave alone those who deviate from the right way with respect to His attributes. They shall be requited with what they do (7:181). This verse shows that man cannot attain to divine knowledge without a correct conception of God’s اسماء or attributes and that this can be taught only by God. So it was necessary that God should have, in the very beginning, given Adam knowledge of His attributes so that man should know and recognize Him and attain His nearness, and should not drift away from Him.
The verse quoted above (7:181) shows that the word اسماء (names) is used to signify the attributes of God and that a Muslim must be familiar with those attributes, so that he may pray to Him, invoking attributes most suited to the nature of the prayer. For example, if one prays for forgiveness and mercy, one should invoke the attributes of forgiveness and mercy; and if the prayer be for the attainment of righteousness, God should be invoked by names which pertain to that quality. The above verse also indicates that man must not of himself devise the attributes of God, because it is only God who can describe His attributes; man, being himself the creation of God, cannot do so. In fact, those who try to devise God’s attributes have been threatened with divine punishment.
In short, we learn from this verse that a Muslim must know God’s اسماء (names) which can be taught by Him alone, and which man has no right to devise out of his own fancy. There is strong evidence that God gave Adam a knowledge of His attributes. The view gains further strength when we take into consideration the difference between man and angel. According to the Quran, man differs from angels in that, whereas the former can be an image or reflex of الاسماءالحسنی i.e. all the divine attributes, the latter represent only a few of them. The Quran says: They (the angels) do what they are bidden to do (66:7) which implies that the angels cannot act of their own free will. They have no will of their own, but passively perform the functions allotted to them by Providence. On the other hand, man, endowed with volition and free choice, differs from angels in that he has capabilities which make him a perfect manifestation of all divine attributes. A saying of the Holy Prophet—"the best morals in man are those which are in conformity with the great attributes of God" (‘Ummal, ii. 2)—also points to this. As God is Merciful, we should also show mercy to men; as He is Forgiving, so we must also be ready to forgive our fellow beings; as He connives at faults, so we must try to imitate Him in this particular; and as He protects the weak, so we must be ready to protect the weak, and so on. This injunction of the Holy Prophet justifies the inference that man has the capability to manifest in himself all the attributes of God. Thus, both the Quran and the Holy Prophet’s sayings are agreed that man and angel differ in the manifestation of divine attributes, and the "names" in the clause, He taught Adam all the names, refer to the attributes of God.
The verse means that God first implanted in Adam free will and the needful capacity for the comprehension of the various divine attributes, and then gave him the knowledge of those attributes, which was impossible without the power of assimilation. The verse that follows corroborates this meaning; for therein it is stated that the اسماء (attributes) were such as were not wholly known to the angels and it is evident that such اسماء are only the divine attributes. The word اسماء may also mean the qualities of different things in nature. As man was to make use of the forces of nature, God gave Adam the capacity of knowing their qualities and properties. The word كل (all) used here does not imply absolute totality. It simply means all that was necessary. The Quran uses this word in this sense elsewhere also (see 6:45; 27:7, 24; 28:58). The pronoun in the words عرضھم (He put the objects of these names) shows that the objects referred to here are not inanimate things; for in Arabic this form of pronoun is used only for rational beings. The meaning of the expression, therefore, would be that God showed Adam in a kashf (vision) certain human beings from among his progeny who were to be the manifestations of divine attributes in the future. Such beings were the Prophets or other holy persons who were to enjoy such nearness to God as to become His image and through whom God was to reform mankind. The angels were then asked whether they could manifest the divine attributes like them. This is what is meant by the words, Tell Me the names of these, occurring in the present verse.
a
7:181; 17:111; 20:9; 59:24-25.
62
The word "all" used here does not imply absolute totality. It simply means all that was necessary. The Qur’an uses this word in this sense elsewhere also (6:45; 27:17, 24; 28:58).
62A
Asma’ is plural of Ism which means, name or attribute; a mark or a sign of a thing (Lane & Mufradat). Commentators differ as to what is here meant by the word Asma’ (names). Some think that God taught Adam the names of different things and objects, i.e. He taught him the principles of language. There is no doubt that man needed language in order to become civilized and God must have taught Adam its principles, but the Qur’an indicates that there are Asma’ (names or attributes) which man must learn for the perfection of his morals. They are referred to in 7:181. This shows that man cannot attain to Divine knowledge without a correct conception and comprehension of God’s attributes and that they can be taught only by God. So it was necessary that God should have, in the very beginning, given Adam (man) knowledge of His attributes so that he should know and recognize Him and attain His nearness and should not drift away from Him. According to the Qur’an, man differs
62B
The pronoun hum (these) shows that the objects referred to here are not inanimate things; for in Arabic this form of pronoun is used only for rational beings. The meaning of the expression, therefore, would be that God granted to the angels a vision of the outstandingly righteous persons from among the progeny of Adam who were to become the manifestation of Divine attributes in the future, and were then asked whether they themselves could manifest the Divine attributes like them, to which they signified their inability. This is what is meant by the words, Tell Me the names of these, occurring in the present verse.
قَالُوا۟ ٱدْعُ لَنَا رَبَّكَ يُبَيِّن لَّنَا مَا هِىَ إِنَّ ٱلْبَقَرَ تَشَٰبَهَ عَلَيْنَا وَإِنَّآ إِن شَآءَ ٱللَّهُ لَمُهْتَدُونَ
Important Words:
البقر (cows) is the plural ofالبقرة (a cow). The word is used for both male and female (Aqrab).
Commentary:
See under 2:72.
77
Important Words:
البقر (cows) is the plural ofالبقرة (a cow). The word is used for both male and female (Aqrab).
Commentary:
See under 2:72.
وَإِذَا قِيلَ لَهُمْ ءَامِنُوا۟ بِمَآ أَنزَلَ ٱللَّهُ قَالُوا۟ نُؤْمِنُ بِمَآ أُنزِلَ عَلَيْنَا وَيَكْفُرُونَ بِمَا وَرَآءَهُۥ وَهُوَ ٱلْحَقُّ مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا مَعَهُمْ ۗ قُلْ فَلِمَ تَقْتُلُونَ أَنۢبِيَآءَ ٱللَّهِ مِن قَبْلُ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
2:171.
3:113, 182.
2:171.
3:113, 182.
Commentary:
The verse means that whenever Islam is presented to Jews, they, far from reflecting over its claims, consider it enough to say that they will believe in what is sent to Israelite Prophets only, and not in the revelation of outsiders, although the revelation they reject on such flimsy grounds fulfils the prophecies contained in their own Scriptures about a new Book. Further, it is added that the statement that they would adhere to what was revealed to Israelite Prophets is absurd, seeing that they had opposed even their own Prophets in their time.
This verse also makes it clear what the word مصدقا means when followed by the preposition لام. The expression has been used as a proof of the truth of the Quran, and it is therefore clear that it conveys the sense of "fulfilling" and not that of "confirming". It is only the fulfilment of prophecies in the Bible that can serve as evidence of the truth of the Quran. In this connection, see also 2:42.
For the prophecies alluded to in this verse, i.e. the prophecies contained in the Bible about the Quran and the Holy Prophet, the reader is referred to Deut. 18:15-19; Acts 3:19-24; Deut. 33:2; Matt. 21:42-44; Isa. 21:13-17; 28:9-13; chap. 42; 62:2-4; Dan. 7; etc.
For a discussion of the words, why did you attempt to slay the Prophets, see under 2:62.
a
3:113, 182.
e
2:171.
a
2:171.
b
3:113, 182.
98
Commentary:
The verse means that whenever Islam is presented to Jews, they, far from reflecting over its claims, consider it enough to say that they will believe in what is sent to Israelite Prophets only, and not in the revelation of outsiders, although the revelation they reject on such flimsy grounds fulfils the prophecies contained in their own Scriptures about a new Book. Further, it is added that the statement that they would adhere to what was revealed to Israelite Prophets is absurd, seeing that they had opposed even their own Prophets in their time.
This verse also makes it clear what the word مصدقا means when followed by the preposition لام. The expression has been used as a proof of the truth of the Quran, and it is therefore clear that it conveys the sense of "fulfilling" and not that of "confirming". It is only the fulfilment of prophecies in the Bible that can serve as evidence of the truth of the Quran. In this connection, see also 2:42.
For the prophecies alluded to in this verse, i.e. the prophecies contained in the Bible about the Quran and the Holy Prophet, the reader is referred to Deut. 18:15-19; Acts 3:19-24; Deut. 33:2; Matt. 21:42-44; Isa. 21:13-17; 28:9-13; chap. 42; 62:2-4; Dan. 7; etc.
For a discussion of the words, why did you attempt to slay the Prophets, see under 2:62.
c
2:171.
d
3:113, 182.
وَإِذْ أَخَذْنَا مِيثَٰقَكُمْ وَرَفَعْنَا فَوْقَكُمُ ٱلطُّورَ خُذُوا۟ مَآ ءَاتَيْنَٰكُم بِقُوَّةٍ وَٱسْمَعُوا۟ ۖ قَالُوا۟ سَمِعْنَا وَعَصَيْنَا وَأُشْرِبُوا۟ فِى قُلُوبِهِمُ ٱلْعِجْلَ بِكُفْرِهِمْ ۚ قُلْ بِئْسَمَا يَأْمُرُكُم بِهِۦٓ إِيمَٰنُكُمْ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
2:64; 4:155; 7:172.
وَرَفَعْنَا فَوْقَـکُمُ الطُّوْرَ: یعنی تم کو اس کے دامن میں کھڑا کیا تھا۔
عربی کا محاورہ ہے اُشْرِبَ فُـلَا نٌ حُبَّ فُـلَا نٍ اور معنے یہ ہوتے ہیں خَالَطَہٗ حُبُّہٗ قَلْبَہٗ (اقرب) یعنی فلاں کی محبت اس کے دل میں رچ گئی۔ پس اُشْرِبَ مجہول کے صیغہ میں محبت کے رَچ جانے کے لئے بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ بحر محیط میں لکھا ہے۔ وَ قَالُوْا اَشْرَبْتُ الْبَیَاضَ الْحُمْرَۃَ اَی خَلَطْتُّـھَا بِالْحُمْرَۃِ یعنی عرب بعض دفعہ کہتے ہیں کہ میں نے سفیدی کو سرخی پلائی اور مراد ہوتی ہے کہ سفید رنگ میں سرخ رنگ ملا دیا۔ ایک شاعر کہتا ہے۔
اِذَا مَا الْقَلْبُ اُشْرِبَ حُبَّ شَیْئٍ۔ فَـلَا تَـاْمَـلُ لَـہٗ عَنْـہُ انْـصِرَافـًا
ی
See {105}.
The words signify that they practically refused to obey. For the meaning of Qala see {57}.
The expression Ushriba Fi Qalbihi Hubbu Fulanin means, the love of such a person permeated his heart (Aqrab). The word is so used because love is like alcohol that intoxicates one who partakes of it. The words used in the text mean, the love of the calf had sunk deep into their hearts.
2:64; 4:155; 7:172.
Important Words:
اشربوا (were permeated with) is derived from شرب meaning, he drank. اشرب means, he was made to drink. The expression,اشرب فی قلبه حب فلان means, the love of such and such a person permeated his heart (Aqrab). The word is so used because love is like alcohol that intoxicates one who partakes of it. The clause, اشربوا فی قلوبھم العجل (lit. they were made to drink into their hearts the calf) must really be read as اشربوا فی قلوبھم حب العجل (lit. they were made to drink into their hearts the love of the calf), the word حب (love) being understood before the word عجل (calf).
Commentary:
For an explanation of the expression, raised high above you the Mount, see under 2:64.
The words, they said, We hear and we disobey, signify that they practically refused to obey God. They did not necessarily use these exact words; for the word, as pointed out under 2:31, sometimes conveys the sense not of actual speech but of practical conduct.
Reference to calf-worship in verse 93 is not a mere reiteration of what has been already said in verse 55; the incident has been mentioned here as an illustration of what has been said about the Jews in the previous verse. Their attention is drawn to their conduct in the days of Moses. When Moses was absent from them for a short time only, they took the image of a calf for their idol, although they had witnessed how God had helped Moses and had shown mighty Signs at his hands; and that at a time when they had given a solemn promise not to worship anything besides God. In spite of that promise, they showed active opposition to the commandments of God by their deeds.
In the concluding portion of the verse, it is pointed out that the Jews professed to believe in what was revealed to them by God, but their belief was of a strange character for in spite of it, they persisted in their opposition to the Prophets. If this was believing, then their faith was only leading them astray.
c
2:64; 4:155; 7:172.
1
وَرَفَعْنَا فَوْقَـکُمُ الطُّوْرَ: یعنی تم کو اس کے دامن میں کھڑا کیا تھا۔
2
عربی کا محاورہ ہے اُشْرِبَ فُـلَا نٌ حُبَّ فُـلَا نٍ اور معنے یہ ہوتے ہیں خَالَطَہٗ حُبُّہٗ قَلْبَہٗ (اقرب) یعنی فلاں کی محبت اس کے دل میں رچ گئی۔ پس اُشْرِبَ مجہول کے صیغہ میں محبت کے رَچ جانے کے لئے بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے۔ بحر محیط میں لکھا ہے۔ وَ قَالُوْا اَشْرَبْتُ الْبَیَاضَ الْحُمْرَۃَ اَی خَلَطْتُّـھَا بِالْحُمْرَۃِ یعنی عرب بعض دفعہ کہتے ہیں کہ میں نے سفیدی کو سرخی پلائی اور مراد ہوتی ہے کہ سفید رنگ میں سرخ رنگ ملا دیا۔ ایک شاعر کہتا ہے۔
اِذَا مَا الْقَلْبُ اُشْرِبَ حُبَّ شَیْئٍ۔ فَـلَا تَـاْمَـلُ لَـہٗ عَنْـہُ انْـصِرَافـًا
ی
b
2:64; 4:155; 7:172.
100
Important Words:
اشربوا (were permeated with) is derived from شرب meaning, he drank. اشرب means, he was made to drink. The expression,اشرب فی قلبه حب فلان means, the love of such and such a person permeated his heart (Aqrab). The word is so used because love is like alcohol that intoxicates one who partakes of it. The clause, اشربوا فی قلوبھم العجل (lit. they were made to drink into their hearts the calf) must really be read as اشربوا فی قلوبھم حب العجل (lit. they were made to drink into their hearts the love of the calf), the word حب (love) being understood before the word عجل (calf).
Commentary:
For an explanation of the expression, raised high above you the Mount, see under 2:64.
The words, they said, We hear and we disobey, signify that they practically refused to obey God. They did not necessarily use these exact words; for the word, as pointed out under 2:31, sometimes conveys the sense not of actual speech but of practical conduct.
Reference to calf-worship in verse 93 is not a mere reiteration of what has been already said in verse 55; the incident has been mentioned here as an illustration of what has been said about the Jews in the previous verse. Their attention is drawn to their conduct in the days of Moses. When Moses was absent from them for a short time only, they took the image of a calf for their idol, although they had witnessed how God had helped Moses and had shown mighty Signs at his hands; and that at a time when they had given a solemn promise not to worship anything besides God. In spite of that promise, they showed active opposition to the commandments of God by their deeds.
In the concluding portion of the verse, it is pointed out that the Jews professed to believe in what was revealed to them by God, but their belief was of a strange character for in spite of it, they persisted in their opposition to the Prophets. If this was believing, then their faith was only leading them astray.
b
2:64; 4:155; 7:172.121
See {105}.
121A
The words signify that they practically refused to obey. For the meaning of Qala see {57}.
122
The expression Ushriba Fi Qalbihi Hubbu Fulanin means, the love of such a person permeated his heart (Aqrab). The word is so used because love is like alcohol that intoxicates one who partakes of it. The words used in the text mean, the love of the calf had sunk deep into their hearts.
قُلْ إِن كَانَتْ لَكُمُ ٱلدَّارُ ٱلْءَاخِرَةُ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ خَالِصَةً مِّن دُونِ ٱلنَّاسِ فَتَمَنَّوُا۟ ٱلْمَوْتَ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
2:112; 62:7.
یعنی رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے مباہلہ کرو۔ جیسا کہ سورۃ آل عمران آیت ۶۲ میں ہے۔
2:112; 62:7.
The meaning is that if the Jews are convinced that they are justified in their claim that God will bestow His favours upon them alone, and that the Holy Prophet’s claim is false, then they should invoke death and destruction upon the liar.
d
2:112; 62:7.
3
یعنی رسول کریم صلی اللہ علیہ وسلم سے مباہلہ کرو۔ جیسا کہ سورۃ آل عمران آیت ۶۲ میں ہے۔
a
2:112; 62:7.
101
Commentary:
See under 2:96 below.
c
2:112; 62:7.
122A
The meaning is that if the Jews are convinced that they are justified in their claim that God will bestow His favours upon them alone, and that the Holy Prophet’s claim is false, then they should invoke death and destruction upon the liar.
وَقَالُوا۟ لَن يَدْخُلَ ٱلْجَنَّةَ إِلَّا مَن كَانَ هُودًا أَوْ نَصَٰرَىٰ ۗ تِلْكَ أَمَانِيُّهُمْ ۗ قُلْ هَاتُوا۟ بُرْهَٰنَكُمْ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
2:63.
اس کلام کے یہ معنے ہیں کہ یہودی کہتے ہیں کہ صرف یہودی‘ اور مسیحی کہتے ہیں کہ صرف مسیحی جنت میں داخل ہوں گے۔ یہ مرادنہیں کہ یہودی یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ یہودی اور مسیحی ہی جنتی ہیں اور مسیحی سمجھتے ہیں کہ مسیحی اور یہودی ہی جنتی ہیں۔
2:95; 62:7.
Important Words:
ھود (the Jews) has by some been looked upon as the plural of ھائد which is active participle from ھاد meaning, he repented and turned towards the truth or towards God. In this sense ھود would mean, a people who have turned to God with repentance. The word ھود is a proper name for the Jews. The original and commoner word, however, is الیھود or یھود from which, according to some, the letter یا has been dropped, leaving the word ھود (Aqrab). See also 2:63.
Commentary:
So far Christians were not separately addressed. But now the Quran mentions them along with the Jews, indicating that their case was no better than that of the latter, both being under the delusion that one could obtain salvation merely by becoming a Jew or a Christian. They forgot the fact that when God had established a fresh covenant, salvation could not be possible without conforming thereto. If, however, the Jews and the Christians were justified in their claims, they should advance some reasons or scriptural evidence to show that it was enough for the purposes of salvation to join their folds. And they could not do it, because in their very Scriptures was foretold the appearance of a Prophet whom they were enjoined to accept and whose rejection was stated to lead to estrangement from God.
Christianity, as well as Judaism, was meant for the guidance of the Israelites alone. The mission of Jesus was not meant for the whole world (Matt. 7:6; 10:6; 15:24; Mark 7:27). Though later on the followers of Jesus violated the limit imposed upon his mission and claimed universality for it, yet the hard fact remains that he was sent only for the Israelites, and his mission was to uplift that people alone. As other nations of the world are also the creation of God, it is therefore only right to believe that God must have made some arrangement for their guidance as well. Hence, it is quite unreasonable on the part of the Jews and Christians to hold that the door of salvation was closed against the followers of other faiths. Such a view would mean that God had confined salvation to certain tribes, to the exclusion of others, which is evidently absurd.
Islam, however, is not exposed to that objection. In the first place, it is not a tribal faith, but is universal in character. In the Quran, God enjoins the Holy Prophet to Say, O mankind! truly I am a Messenger to you all from Allah (7:159). Similarly, there is a saying of the Holy Prophet to the effect, "I have been sent for the whole mankind while the Prophets before me were sent to particular peoples only" (Musnad).
Secondly, unlike Judaism and Christianity, Islam does not hold Hell to be ever-lasting, but a place of reformation, where sinners will be purged of their sins to enable them to find their way ultimately to Heaven and enjoy the reward of whatever good deeds they had done in this world. On the other hand, Islam looks upon the bounties of Heaven to be everlasting. With Jews and Christians, it is only the wish that has been father to the thought and nothing else. Produce your proof, if you are truthful, says the Quran.
f
2:63.
2
اس کلام کے یہ معنے ہیں کہ یہودی کہتے ہیں کہ صرف یہودی‘ اور مسیحی کہتے ہیں کہ صرف مسیحی جنت میں داخل ہوں گے۔ یہ مرادنہیں کہ یہودی یہ سمجھتے ہیں کہ یہودی اور مسیحی ہی جنتی ہیں اور مسیحی سمجھتے ہیں کہ مسیحی اور یہودی ہی جنتی ہیں۔
c
2:95; 62:7.
118
Important Words:
ھود (the Jews) has by some been looked upon as the plural of ھائد which is active participle from ھاد meaning, he repented and turned towards the truth or towards God. In this sense ھود would mean, a people who have turned to God with repentance. The word ھود is a proper name for the Jews. The original and commoner word, however, is الیھود or یھود from which, according to some, the letter یا has been dropped, leaving the word ھود (Aqrab). See also 2:63.
Commentary:
So far Christians were not separately addressed. But now the Quran mentions them along with the Jews, indicating that their case was no better than that of the latter, both being under the delusion that one could obtain salvation merely by becoming a Jew or a Christian. They forgot the fact that when God had established a fresh covenant, salvation could not be possible without conforming thereto. If, however, the Jews and the Christians were justified in their claims, they should advance some reasons or scriptural evidence to show that it was enough for the purposes of salvation to join their folds. And they could not do it, because in their very Scriptures was foretold the appearance of a Prophet whom they were enjoined to accept and whose rejection was stated to lead to estrangement from God.
Christianity, as well as Judaism, was meant for the guidance of the Israelites alone. The mission of Jesus was not meant for the whole world (Matt. 7:6; 10:6; 15:24; Mark 7:27). Though later on the followers of Jesus violated the limit imposed upon his mission and claimed universality for it, yet the hard fact remains that he was sent only for the Israelites, and his mission was to uplift that people alone. As other nations of the world are also the creation of God, it is therefore only right to believe that God must have made some arrangement for their guidance as well. Hence, it is quite unreasonable on the part of the Jews and Christians to hold that the door of salvation was closed against the followers of other faiths. Such a view would mean that God had confined salvation to certain tribes, to the exclusion of others, which is evidently absurd.
Islam, however, is not exposed to that objection. In the first place, it is not a tribal faith, but is universal in character. In the Quran, God enjoins the Holy Prophet to Say, O mankind! truly I am a Messenger to you all from Allah (7:159). Similarly, there is a saying of the Holy Prophet to the effect, "I have been sent for the whole mankind while the Prophets before me were sent to particular peoples only" (Musnad).
Secondly, unlike Judaism and Christianity, Islam does not hold Hell to be ever-lasting, but a place of reformation, where sinners will be purged of their sins to enable them to find their way ultimately to Heaven and enjoy the reward of whatever good deeds they had done in this world. On the other hand, Islam looks upon the bounties of Heaven to be everlasting. With Jews and Christians, it is only the wish that has been father to the thought and nothing else. Produce your proof, if you are truthful, says the Quran.
f
2:95; 62:7.
134
The Jews and the Christians both suffer from the delusion that only a Jew or a Christian could obtain salvation.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُلُوا۟ مِن طَيِّبَٰتِ مَا رَزَقْنَٰكُمْ وَٱشْكُرُوا۟ لِلَّهِ إِن كُنتُمْ إِيَّاهُ تَعْبُدُونَ
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
اصل عبارت میں عِبَادَۃ کے ساتھ ضمیر اور شُکْر کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے لیکن ترجمہ میں عبادت کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ اور شکر کے ساتھ ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے کیونکہ اردو ترتیب میں اس کے سوا چارہ نہ تھا۔
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of good, pure and wholesome things (Tayyibat) indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be allowed by the Shari‘ah.
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
Commentary:
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of طیبات i.e. good, pure and wholesome things", indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be حلال i.e. allowed by Law. The injunction is thus very important and far-reaching in its effect. The words, We have provided for you, further imply that Muslims are also not allowed to make use of things acquired by unfair and unlawful means. Only the things bestowed by God, i.e. those lawfully earned, are to be used.
g
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
5
اصل عبارت میں عِبَادَۃ کے ساتھ ضمیر اور شُکْر کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ استعمال ہوا ہے لیکن ترجمہ میں عبادت کے ساتھ اللہ کا لفظ اور شکر کے ساتھ ضمیر استعمال کی گئی ہے کیونکہ اردو ترتیب میں اس کے سوا چارہ نہ تھا۔
a
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
179
Commentary:
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of طیبات i.e. good, pure and wholesome things", indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be حلال i.e. allowed by Law. The injunction is thus very important and far-reaching in its effect. The words, We have provided for you, further imply that Muslims are also not allowed to make use of things acquired by unfair and unlawful means. Only the things bestowed by God, i.e. those lawfully earned, are to be used.
a
5:6; 16:115; 23:52; 40:65.
197
The injunction contained in the words, "eat of good, pure and wholesome things (Tayyibat) indicates that Muslims are not allowed to use things which may, in any way, injure their physical or moral or spiritual health, though they may be allowed by the Shari‘ah.
كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِذَا حَضَرَ أَحَدَكُمُ ٱلْمَوْتُ إِن تَرَكَ خَيْرًا ٱلْوَصِيَّةُ لِلْوَٰلِدَيْنِ وَٱلْأَقْرَبِينَ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۖ حَقًّا عَلَى ٱلْمُتَّقِينَ
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
4:12,13经文注定了对所有应该继承死者产业的那些人的分配份额。这些经文被有些注经家误解为废止本节经文的, 实际上本节经文对遗产继承权制订了一条附加而且十分必要的规定, 这种遗产仅指有利于在法律上不该分得遗嘱的遗产的人, 或是出于慈善目的, 或由于战争状况的遗产。它不指有利于合法继承者的遗产, 关于那种遗产在4:12,13中业已述及。因此本节经文为制定遗赠规章的几节经文所废止的问题是不应发生的, 而且那几节经文也承认任何遗产的合法性。是以每一节经文都在自己的范围内起其一定的作用而且相辅相成。所以这样所规定的遗产, 根据萨德•彬•阿比•瓦卡斯 (سَعْد بِنْ اَبِیْ وَقَاص, Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas) 的见解, 像穆圣在讲话中所提到的那样, 不应超过所留产业的三分之一 (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); 这是立遗嘱者可以行使自由支配的处理权的最高限制, 不过这种遗产继承权只有那留下像خَيْر (Khair, 许多财富) 这词所表示的大笔财产者
才能使用。根据经文5:107, 一个将死的穆斯林可以规定遗产。一般的看法, 这节经文是在4:12, 13之后下降的; 这进一步支持了这个看法, 事实上, 本节没有被4:12, 13所代替。一切经文废止的说法是没有根据的。
خَیْر کے معنے مطلق مال کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور بہت سے مال کے بھی۔ اس جگہ آیت کے سیاق و سباق سے ظاہر ہوتا ہے کہ مالِ کثیر مراد ہے۔
یہاں والدین اور اقربین کو وصیت کرنا کہا ہے حالانکہ اولاد قلبی تعلقات کے لحاظ سے نہایت اہم ہے اس سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ یہ مال کی تقسیم کی وصیت نہیں ورنہ اولاد کا ذکر ضرور ہوتا۔ بلکہ وصیت سے مراد عام تاکید ہے کہ احکامِ الٰہیہ کے مطابق جائیداد تقسیم کی جائے۔ اور اگر مال کا کوئی حصہ صدقہ کرنا ہو تو اس کا اظہار کردے۔ اس آیت پر بہت بحث ہوئی ہے۔ اکثر مفسرین اسے منسوخ قرار دیتے ہیں کیونکہ اس میں وصیت واجب لکھی ہے اور احکام وراثت کے نزول کے بعد رشتہ داروں کے نام وصیت جائز نہیں۔ اور جنہوں نے جائز قرار دی ہے ان کے نزدیک بھی واجب نہیں‘ مگر یہ غلطی اس وجہ سے لگی ہے کہ وصیت کے معنے
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
Verses 4:12, 13 fix the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property. These verses have been mistakenly understood by some Commentators to abrogate the verse under comment, which, in fact, lays down an additional and very necessary provision, and refers only to bequests made in favour of individuals not legally entitled to a share in the testator’s property, or for charitable purposes, or for war conditions. It does not refer to bequests made in favour of legal heirs which subject has been dealt with in 4:12, 13. There is no question, therefore, of the abrogation of this verse by those verses which lay down the rules of inheritance and also recognise the validity of any bequests that may have been made. Each operates in its own sphere and draws strength from the other. The bequests thus made, however, should not exceed one third of the property left as is mentioned in a saying of the Holy Prophet related by Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); thi
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
Important Words:
خیر (much wealth) means: (1) good as opposed to evil; (2) wealth acquired or collected by fair and praiseworthy means; (3) much wealth or abundance of wealth; (4) a thing that all desire; (5) welfare and good fortune (Mufradat); (6) the existence of a thing in abundance and perfection; (7) horses, etc. (Aqrab).
حقا (obligation) is derived from حق and has been used in the verse in the accusative case, having something understood before it, the complete expression being حق ذالك حقا (Kashshaf). الحق means: (1) equity or justice; (2) right mode of acting; (3) an obligation or a duty; (4) a debt or anything that is owed; (5) a thing suitable to the requirements of justice, truth, duty, etc. (Lane). See also 2:148.
Commentary:
As disputes about inheritance are a fruitful source of quarrels, murders, etc., the Quran here suitably turns from the subject of retaliation to that of inheritance.
The word used here for "wealth" is خیر and not مال which is the ordinary word used in this sense. خیر means, "wealth acquired by fair and praiseworthy means". Thus by substituting the word خیر for مال, the Quran has also emphasized the necessity of being very circumspect in the acquisition of wealth which should be acquired only by fair and lawful means. Incidentally, therefore, it has been hinted that it is not lawful for a Muslim to make a will with regard to property that has been acquired by unlawful means; for such wealth does not really belong to him.
In 4:12, 13 the Quran fixes the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property, according to the Islamic law of inheritance, and these in the first instance include parents, children, and wife or husband. In the presence of this law, the injunction given in the verse under comment would, at first sight, appear to be uncalled-for and unnecessary. As a matter of fact, those who believe in the abrogation theory, have actually declared this verse to be abrogated by the ones referred to above. But they are clearly mistaken; for the verse under comment makes an additional and necessary provision in regard to inheritance. Not seldom there come forward claimants who allege that a deceased person had bequeathed such and such portion of his property to them, and even witnesses are not wanting to support their claims. The rightful heirs, not knowing anything about it, naturally suspect the claim. The result is quarrel and litigation. Every Muslim is, therefore, enjoined to make a proper bequest at the time of his death that his property be divided among his heirs, i.e. parents, children, wives, etc., according to the Law of Islam, stating therein also the portion of any other individual who is not legally entitled to inherit from him but to whom he may wish to bequeath some of his wealth. Such a declaration made with the knowledge of his heirs and relatives is calculated to put a stop to much litigation. Such a provision is all the more essential in cases when the property or wealth is considerable.
The verse also throws out a hint that a Muslim should, before his death, bequeath a part of his property, not exceeding one-third, to such of his relations as have been debarred by Law from inheriting from him, for instance, distant but deserving relations, non-Muslim parents, non-Muslim children and so on. In such a case the remaining two-thirds will go to his lawful heirs. As to the restriction relating to one-third, it may be noted that the Holy Prophet has made it clear that no testator can bequeath more than one-third of his wealth to others than the lawful heirs. At least two-thirds of the property must go to the heirs (Bukhari).
Islam excludes non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs to avoid complications. For instance, the near relatives of a deceased person might belong to a people who are at war with the Muslims or in open hostility toward them. In that case, to put money into their hands would be to damage the cause of Islam and injure one’s own interests. Non-Muslim relatives have, therefore, been excluded from lawful heirs so that they may not claim their part of the inheritance as of right. The Quran, however, instructs Muslims to leave to them a part of their property by a special will, so that, in case such property is not likely to be used against the interests of Islam, the former may in this way discharge the obligations they owe to the latter as kinsmen. Another reason for excluding non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs is that generally non-Muslims do not in practice allow their Muslim relatives to succeed them as heirs. There is no sense, therefore, in allowing Muslim wealth to flow to non-Muslims where no such flow takes place the other way.
The verse serves yet another purpose. According to the Law of Islam, as generally accepted, the grandchild of a deceased Muslim is debarred from inheritance in case the former’s father has predeceased the latter. The Quran, therefore, directs that a portion of the property may be left by a special will by a dying Muslim for such of his relatives as are otherwise rightful heirs but cannot inherit owing to some of their near kinsmen having predeceased them.
The verse must not be understood to lend itself to the interpretation that the heirs whose portions have been definitely fixed by the Law, can be given more than their prescribed share. This is expressly forbidden by the Holy Prophet (Tirmidhi, ch. on Wasaya).
b
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
115
4:12,13经文注定了对所有应该继承死者产业的那些人的分配份额。这些经文被有些注经家误解为废止本节经文的, 实际上本节经文对遗产继承权制订了一条附加而且十分必要的规定, 这种遗产仅指有利于在法律上不该分得遗嘱的遗产的人, 或是出于慈善目的, 或由于战争状况的遗产。它不指有利于合法继承者的遗产, 关于那种遗产在4:12,13中业已述及。因此本节经文为制定遗赠规章的几节经文所废止的问题是不应发生的, 而且那几节经文也承认任何遗产的合法性。是以每一节经文都在自己的范围内起其一定的作用而且相辅相成。所以这样所规定的遗产, 根据萨德•彬•阿比•瓦卡斯 (سَعْد بِنْ اَبِیْ وَقَاص, Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas) 的见解, 像穆圣在讲话中所提到的那样, 不应超过所留产业的三分之一 (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); 这是立遗嘱者可以行使自由支配的处理权的最高限制, 不过这种遗产继承权只有那留下像خَيْر (Khair, 许多财富) 这词所表示的大笔财产者
才能使用。根据经文5:107, 一个将死的穆斯林可以规定遗产。一般的看法, 这节经文是在4:12, 13之后下降的; 这进一步支持了这个看法, 事实上, 本节没有被4:12, 13所代替。一切经文废止的说法是没有根据的。
2
خَیْر کے معنے مطلق مال کے بھی ہوتے ہیں اور بہت سے مال کے بھی۔ اس جگہ آیت کے سیاق و سباق سے ظاہر ہوتا ہے کہ مالِ کثیر مراد ہے۔
3
یہاں والدین اور اقربین کو وصیت کرنا کہا ہے حالانکہ اولاد قلبی تعلقات کے لحاظ سے نہایت اہم ہے اس سے معلوم ہوتا ہے کہ یہ مال کی تقسیم کی وصیت نہیں ورنہ اولاد کا ذکر ضرور ہوتا۔ بلکہ وصیت سے مراد عام تاکید ہے کہ احکامِ الٰہیہ کے مطابق جائیداد تقسیم کی جائے۔ اور اگر مال کا کوئی حصہ صدقہ کرنا ہو تو اس کا اظہار کردے۔ اس آیت پر بہت بحث ہوئی ہے۔ اکثر مفسرین اسے منسوخ قرار دیتے ہیں کیونکہ اس میں وصیت واجب لکھی ہے اور احکام وراثت کے نزول کے بعد رشتہ داروں کے نام وصیت جائز نہیں۔ اور جنہوں نے جائز قرار دی ہے ان کے نزدیک بھی واجب نہیں‘ مگر یہ غلطی اس وجہ سے لگی ہے کہ وصیت کے معنے
a
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
187
Important Words:
خیر (much wealth) means: (1) good as opposed to evil; (2) wealth acquired or collected by fair and praiseworthy means; (3) much wealth or abundance of wealth; (4) a thing that all desire; (5) welfare and good fortune (Mufradat); (6) the existence of a thing in abundance and perfection; (7) horses, etc. (Aqrab).
حقا (obligation) is derived from حق and has been used in the verse in the accusative case, having something understood before it, the complete expression being حق ذالك حقا (Kashshaf). الحق means: (1) equity or justice; (2) right mode of acting; (3) an obligation or a duty; (4) a debt or anything that is owed; (5) a thing suitable to the requirements of justice, truth, duty, etc. (Lane). See also 2:148.
Commentary:
As disputes about inheritance are a fruitful source of quarrels, murders, etc., the Quran here suitably turns from the subject of retaliation to that of inheritance.
The word used here for "wealth" is خیر and not مال which is the ordinary word used in this sense. خیر means, "wealth acquired by fair and praiseworthy means". Thus by substituting the word خیر for مال, the Quran has also emphasized the necessity of being very circumspect in the acquisition of wealth which should be acquired only by fair and lawful means. Incidentally, therefore, it has been hinted that it is not lawful for a Muslim to make a will with regard to property that has been acquired by unlawful means; for such wealth does not really belong to him.
In 4:12, 13 the Quran fixes the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property, according to the Islamic law of inheritance, and these in the first instance include parents, children, and wife or husband. In the presence of this law, the injunction given in the verse under comment would, at first sight, appear to be uncalled-for and unnecessary. As a matter of fact, those who believe in the abrogation theory, have actually declared this verse to be abrogated by the ones referred to above. But they are clearly mistaken; for the verse under comment makes an additional and necessary provision in regard to inheritance. Not seldom there come forward claimants who allege that a deceased person had bequeathed such and such portion of his property to them, and even witnesses are not wanting to support their claims. The rightful heirs, not knowing anything about it, naturally suspect the claim. The result is quarrel and litigation. Every Muslim is, therefore, enjoined to make a proper bequest at the time of his death that his property be divided among his heirs, i.e. parents, children, wives, etc., according to the Law of Islam, stating therein also the portion of any other individual who is not legally entitled to inherit from him but to whom he may wish to bequeath some of his wealth. Such a declaration made with the knowledge of his heirs and relatives is calculated to put a stop to much litigation. Such a provision is all the more essential in cases when the property or wealth is considerable.
The verse also throws out a hint that a Muslim should, before his death, bequeath a part of his property, not exceeding one-third, to such of his relations as have been debarred by Law from inheriting from him, for instance, distant but deserving relations, non-Muslim parents, non-Muslim children and so on. In such a case the remaining two-thirds will go to his lawful heirs. As to the restriction relating to one-third, it may be noted that the Holy Prophet has made it clear that no testator can bequeath more than one-third of his wealth to others than the lawful heirs. At least two-thirds of the property must go to the heirs (Bukhari).
Islam excludes non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs to avoid complications. For instance, the near relatives of a deceased person might belong to a people who are at war with the Muslims or in open hostility toward them. In that case, to put money into their hands would be to damage the cause of Islam and injure one’s own interests. Non-Muslim relatives have, therefore, been excluded from lawful heirs so that they may not claim their part of the inheritance as of right. The Quran, however, instructs Muslims to leave to them a part of their property by a special will, so that, in case such property is not likely to be used against the interests of Islam, the former may in this way discharge the obligations they owe to the latter as kinsmen. Another reason for excluding non-Muslim relatives from the category of heirs is that generally non-Muslims do not in practice allow their Muslim relatives to succeed them as heirs. There is no sense, therefore, in allowing Muslim wealth to flow to non-Muslims where no such flow takes place the other way.
The verse serves yet another purpose. According to the Law of Islam, as generally accepted, the grandchild of a deceased Muslim is debarred from inheritance in case the former’s father has predeceased the latter. The Quran, therefore, directs that a portion of the property may be left by a special will by a dying Muslim for such of his relatives as are otherwise rightful heirs but cannot inherit owing to some of their near kinsmen having predeceased them.
The verse must not be understood to lend itself to the interpretation that the heirs whose portions have been definitely fixed by the Law, can be given more than their prescribed share. This is expressly forbidden by the Holy Prophet (Tirmidhi, ch. on Wasaya).
a
4:12, 13, 177; 5:107.
205
Verses 4:12, 13 fix the shares of all those persons who should succeed to a deceased person’s property. These verses have been mistakenly understood by some Commentators to abrogate the verse under comment, which, in fact, lays down an additional and very necessary provision, and refers only to bequests made in favour of individuals not legally entitled to a share in the testator’s property, or for charitable purposes, or for war conditions. It does not refer to bequests made in favour of legal heirs which subject has been dealt with in 4:12, 13. There is no question, therefore, of the abrogation of this verse by those verses which lay down the rules of inheritance and also recognise the validity of any bequests that may have been made. Each operates in its own sphere and draws strength from the other. The bequests thus made, however, should not exceed one third of the property left as is mentioned in a saying of the Holy Prophet related by Sa‘d bin Abi Waqqas (Bukhari, Kitabul-Jana’iz); thi
أَيَّامًا مَّعْدُودَٰتٍ ۚ فَمَن كَانَ مِنكُم مَّرِيضًا أَوْ عَلَىٰ سَفَرٍ فَعِدَّةٌ مِّنْ أَيَّامٍ أُخَرَ ۚ وَعَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ يُطِيقُونَهُۥ فِدْيَةٌ طَعَامُ مِسْكِينٍ ۖ فَمَن تَطَوَّعَ خَيْرًا فَهُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّهُۥ ۚ وَأَن تَصُومُوا۟ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۖ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ
2:204.
经文中这一阿拉伯语 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ (Yutiquna-hu) 这个意义可由该语的另一读法 يُطَيِّقُوْنَهٗ (Yutayyiquna-hu) 得到支持。يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 的意义是, 他们只有面临大困难才能这样做 (جَرِيْر, Jarir)。本节经文提到三类信者可以得到暂不封斋的许可: 病人; 旅行; 身体虚弱而斋戒对其健康有危险者。这句也可解释为; “不能斋戒的那些人” {لِسَان (Lisan) 和مُفْرَدَات}。全句的意思也可以看作: “有能力负担的人, 除了斋戒之外, 作为一种虔敬的行为, 还应供养一个穷人;” 在 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 中的代词 ه hu意味着 “供养一个穷人。”
وَعَلَی الَّذِیْنَ یُطِیْـقُوْنَہٗ مفسرین اس جگہ یہ معنے کرتے ہیں کہ ’’جو طاقت نہ رکھتے ہوں۔‘‘حضرت مسیح موعود علیہ السلام نے بھی ان معنوں کو ہی اختیار فرمایا ہے۔
اصل بات یہ ہے کہ یُطَیْـقُوْنَہٗ میں جو ہٗ کی ضمیر استعمال ہوئی ہے‘ اس کے َمرجع کے متعیّن نہ ہونے کی وجہ سے مشکل پیش آئی ہے۔شاہ ولی اللہ صاحب نے اس مشکل کو الفوزالکبیر میں اس طرح حل کیا ہے کہ یُطِیْقُوْنَہٗ میں ہٗ کی ضمیر فِدْیَۃٌ طَعَامُ مِسْکِیْن کی طرف گئی ہے اس پر یہ اعتراض پڑتا تھا کہ یہ اضمار قبل الذکر ہے یعنی ضمیر پہلے آگئی ہے اور مرجع بعد میں ہے‘ حالانکہ مرجع پہلے
2:204.
This meaning of the Arabic expression in the text is supported by another reading of Yutiquna-hu which is Yutayyiquna-hu meaning, they can do so only with great difficulty (Jarir). The verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed: the sick; those on a journey and those too weak to fast except with danger to their health. The expression may also mean: "Those who are unable to fast" (Lisan and Mufradat). The whole sentence has also been taken to signify: "Those, who can afford, should, besides fasting, feed a poor man as an act of piety;" the pronoun hu in Yutiquna-hu standing for "the feeding of a poor man."
2:204.
Important Words:
یطیقونه (are able to fast only with great difficulty) is derived from طاق. They say طاق الشیء or اطاق الشیء meaning, he was able or fit to do it; or he had the strength and power to do it (Aqrab). But the word طاقة is not used of strength generally but of such strength only as, so to speak, lies on the border, i.e. just the strength with which a thing may be done and no more—a strength required to do a thing only with difficulty and trouble (Mufradat & Lane). This is why the word طاقة is never used to express the power of God for which words like قدرة and قوة are used; for whereas the latter two words express the sense of vastness of power, the former expresses only that of its narrowness. The Quran uses the word طاقةonly twice and at both these places it uses it in a negative sentence, i.e. لاطاقة لنا viz. "we do not even possess the requisite strength to do that" (2:250 & 287). Thus the correct rendering of the clause علی الذین یطیقونه would be, "for those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty." طوقه (Tawwaqahu) which is from the same root means, he put a collar or a neck-ring round his neck, i.e. he imposed on him a thing that was difficult, troublesome or inconvenient. طاقه also means, a single strand which after combining with others goes to make a rope (Lane), i.e. the weak part of a rope which cannot stand tension alone.
فدیة (an expiation) is derived from فدی. They say فدی الرجل meaning, the man secured his release from captivity, etc. by paying his ransom. Thus فدیة means, such payment as is made for obtaining release of a person; or such expenditure as is made in expiation of some sin or shortcoming, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse again refrains from giving the actual commandment regarding fasting but prepares further ground by pointing out that the fasting about to be prescribed is not meant for all days but only for a limited number of days. Again, the commandment to come is not meant to be observed in all circumstances; for those suffering from disease or those on a journey will be exempt from it. In fact, Islam is a practical religion. It does not give any commandment which is impossible of compliance. Hence, while referring to its injunctions about fasting, the Quran makes it clear that whosoever is ill or is on a journey should not fast but should redeem the omission by fasting an equal number of days at some other time when the sickness is gone or the journey is over.
The pronoun الذین (those) in the clause, those who are able, refers to believers in general, the words الذین یطیقونه meaning, those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty. This interpretation is supported by another reading of the verse in which the word یطوقونه (yutawwaqunahu) has been substituted for یطیقونه (yutiqunahu) (Jarir), the former word meaning, those to whom fasting is like a tight collar, i.e. those who are not actually sick but whose physical condition or general health is such that they are unable to fast without running the risk of injuring their health. Such people, who include old men and raw youths and weakly persons and pregnant women and mothers giving suck to their children, may not fast but should make amends for their non-observance of each day’s fast by feeding a poor man according to their standard of food. Another reading of the word یطیقونه is یطیقون (yutayyaqunahu) (Jarir) meaning, they can do it only with great difficulty, which also bears out the above meaning. Thus the verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed with respect to fasting: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; and (3) those neither on a journey nor actually sick but otherwise too weak to fast except with real risk to their health.
Some commentators do not recognize the last-mentioned class as being separate from, and independent of, the first two, but take it as being an exception from them. In this case the verse would mean that such of the sick and of those on a journey as can afford to feed poor men should also do so, besides fasting the same number of days after the sickness or the state of journey is over.
a
2:204.
118
经文中这一阿拉伯语 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ (Yutiquna-hu) 这个意义可由该语的另一读法 يُطَيِّقُوْنَهٗ (Yutayyiquna-hu) 得到支持。يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 的意义是, 他们只有面临大困难才能这样做 (جَرِيْر, Jarir)。本节经文提到三类信者可以得到暂不封斋的许可: 病人; 旅行; 身体虚弱而斋戒对其健康有危险者。这句也可解释为; “不能斋戒的那些人” {لِسَان (Lisan) 和مُفْرَدَات}。全句的意思也可以看作: “有能力负担的人, 除了斋戒之外, 作为一种虔敬的行为, 还应供养一个穷人;” 在 يُطِيْقُوْنَهٗ 中的代词 ه hu意味着 “供养一个穷人。”
3
وَعَلَی الَّذِیْنَ یُطِیْـقُوْنَہٗ مفسرین اس جگہ یہ معنے کرتے ہیں کہ ’’جو طاقت نہ رکھتے ہوں۔‘‘حضرت مسیح موعود علیہ السلام نے بھی ان معنوں کو ہی اختیار فرمایا ہے۔
اصل بات یہ ہے کہ یُطَیْـقُوْنَہٗ میں جو ہٗ کی ضمیر استعمال ہوئی ہے‘ اس کے َمرجع کے متعیّن نہ ہونے کی وجہ سے مشکل پیش آئی ہے۔شاہ ولی اللہ صاحب نے اس مشکل کو الفوزالکبیر میں اس طرح حل کیا ہے کہ یُطِیْقُوْنَہٗ میں ہٗ کی ضمیر فِدْیَۃٌ طَعَامُ مِسْکِیْن کی طرف گئی ہے اس پر یہ اعتراض پڑتا تھا کہ یہ اضمار قبل الذکر ہے یعنی ضمیر پہلے آگئی ہے اور مرجع بعد میں ہے‘ حالانکہ مرجع پہلے
a
2:204.
191
Important Words:
یطیقونه (are able to fast only with great difficulty) is derived from طاق. They say طاق الشیء or اطاق الشیء meaning, he was able or fit to do it; or he had the strength and power to do it (Aqrab). But the word طاقة is not used of strength generally but of such strength only as, so to speak, lies on the border, i.e. just the strength with which a thing may be done and no more—a strength required to do a thing only with difficulty and trouble (Mufradat & Lane). This is why the word طاقة is never used to express the power of God for which words like قدرة and قوة are used; for whereas the latter two words express the sense of vastness of power, the former expresses only that of its narrowness. The Quran uses the word طاقةonly twice and at both these places it uses it in a negative sentence, i.e. لاطاقة لنا viz. "we do not even possess the requisite strength to do that" (2:250 & 287). Thus the correct rendering of the clause علی الذین یطیقونه would be, "for those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty." طوقه (Tawwaqahu) which is from the same root means, he put a collar or a neck-ring round his neck, i.e. he imposed on him a thing that was difficult, troublesome or inconvenient. طاقه also means, a single strand which after combining with others goes to make a rope (Lane), i.e. the weak part of a rope which cannot stand tension alone.
فدیة (an expiation) is derived from فدی. They say فدی الرجل meaning, the man secured his release from captivity, etc. by paying his ransom. Thus فدیة means, such payment as is made for obtaining release of a person; or such expenditure as is made in expiation of some sin or shortcoming, etc. (Aqrab).
Commentary:
This verse again refrains from giving the actual commandment regarding fasting but prepares further ground by pointing out that the fasting about to be prescribed is not meant for all days but only for a limited number of days. Again, the commandment to come is not meant to be observed in all circumstances; for those suffering from disease or those on a journey will be exempt from it. In fact, Islam is a practical religion. It does not give any commandment which is impossible of compliance. Hence, while referring to its injunctions about fasting, the Quran makes it clear that whosoever is ill or is on a journey should not fast but should redeem the omission by fasting an equal number of days at some other time when the sickness is gone or the journey is over.
The pronoun الذین (those) in the clause, those who are able, refers to believers in general, the words الذین یطیقونه meaning, those who are able to fast but can fast only with great difficulty. This interpretation is supported by another reading of the verse in which the word یطوقونه (yutawwaqunahu) has been substituted for یطیقونه (yutiqunahu) (Jarir), the former word meaning, those to whom fasting is like a tight collar, i.e. those who are not actually sick but whose physical condition or general health is such that they are unable to fast without running the risk of injuring their health. Such people, who include old men and raw youths and weakly persons and pregnant women and mothers giving suck to their children, may not fast but should make amends for their non-observance of each day’s fast by feeding a poor man according to their standard of food. Another reading of the word یطیقونه is یطیقون (yutayyaqunahu) (Jarir) meaning, they can do it only with great difficulty, which also bears out the above meaning. Thus the verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed with respect to fasting: (1) the sick; (2) those on a journey; and (3) those neither on a journey nor actually sick but otherwise too weak to fast except with real risk to their health.
Some commentators do not recognize the last-mentioned class as being separate from, and independent of, the first two, but take it as being an exception from them. In this case the verse would mean that such of the sick and of those on a journey as can afford to feed poor men should also do so, besides fasting the same number of days after the sickness or the state of journey is over.
a
2:204.
207
This meaning of the Arabic expression in the text is supported by another reading of Yutiquna-hu which is Yutayyiquna-hu meaning, they can do so only with great difficulty (Jarir). The verse mentions three classes of believers to whom concession is allowed: the sick; those on a journey and those too weak to fast except with danger to their health. The expression may also mean: "Those who are unable to fast" (Lisan and Mufradat). The whole sentence has also been taken to signify: "Those, who can afford, should, besides fasting, feed a poor man as an act of piety;" the pronoun hu in Yutiquna-hu standing for "the feeding of a poor man."
وَٱلْمُطَلَّقَٰتُ يَتَرَبَّصْنَ بِأَنفُسِهِنَّ ثَلَٰثَةَ قُرُوٓءٍ ۚ وَلَا يَحِلُّ لَهُنَّ أَن يَكْتُمْنَ مَا خَلَقَ ٱللَّهُ فِىٓ أَرْحَامِهِنَّ إِن كُنَّ يُؤْمِنَّ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۚ وَبُعُولَتُهُنَّ أَحَقُّ بِرَدِّهِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ إِنْ أَرَادُوٓا۟ إِصْلَٰحًا ۚ وَلَهُنَّ مِثْلُ ٱلَّذِى عَلَيْهِنَّ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۚ وَلِلرِّجَالِ عَلَيْهِنَّ دَرَجَةٌ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَزِيزٌ حَكِيمٌ
4:35.
2:235; 65:5.
قُرُؤ (Quru’) 是 قُرْء (Qur’) 或 قَرْء (Qar’) 的复数, 意思是:一次; 月经; 月经前后的那段时间即洁净状态, 也就是说, 两次月经之间的那段时间; 一次月经的终止; 月经与沽净状态算在一起的那段时间, 即整个月份; 一个女人离开她洁净状态进入经期的时间或状态 {مُحِيْط (Muhit) 和 مُفْرَدَات (Mufradat)}。穆圣的同伴阿布•白克尔 (اَبُوْبَكر, Abu Bakr)、欧麦尔 (عُمَرْ, ‘Umar)、法理学教长阿布•哈尼法 (اَبُوْحَنِيْفَة, Abu Hanifa) 和阿哈默德•彬•汉巴尔 (اَحْمَدْ بِنْ حَنْبَلْ, Ahmad bin Hanbal) 认为 قُرْء 意指月经而不指洁净时期。与此相反, 穆圣另两位同伴阿依莎 (عَائِشَة, ‘A’ishah) 和伊本•欧麦尔 (اِبْنِ عُمَرْ, Ibn-e-‘Umar) 以及法理学教长马利克 (مٰلِكْ, Malik) 和沙斐伊 (شَافِعِیْ Shafi‘iy) 却持相反的看法 (مُحِيْط)。既然是见仁见智, 可以让一个穆斯林自己去采取两种看法中的任何一种。但是对有关争论的集体调查 (这里不必细说) 使人得到一个结论: 两种看法中第一种看来更近乎情理。虽然如此, 如果 (一个人) 要想稳当一些的话, 可以 (由他) 采用 قُرْء (Qur’), 的词义为月经洁净状态算在一起的那段时期, 即整个月份。
由於离婚是安拉在所有合法事情中最不愿意见到的事情 (دَاؤد), 它受到许多限制: (a) 丈夫只能在妻子洁净即月经洁净的状态时而且他在她洁净的时期与她无性关系时才能离婚。(b) 宣布离婚以后, 妻子必须等候三次月经即大约三个月的时间, 这段时间称为 عِدَّة (‘Iddat) 即等候时期。这是因为给丈夫充份的时间来考虑与他的这一行动有牵连的所有事情;假如他心中仍有一丝潜藏在那里的火花的话,他还可爱她;可以使他有再次决定的机会。(c) 离了婚的妇女如果已受孕不必对丈夫隐瞒, 因为可以认为将要出生的孩子有助于两口子重归和好。(d) 完全而不可撤回的分离, 可以有三次离婚。在第一和第二次宣布离婚后, 以及在等候时期到期前, 丈夫享有带回妻子的特权, 如果他想这样做的话。即使在等候时期结束后, 在第一和第二次离婚的情况下, 两口子仍能团圆, 只要重新结婚就可以了。
就个人权利而言, 夫妻是平等的。可是, 像4:35节经文指出的那样, 男人在体力方面条件较好, 又负有供养家庭的经济上的责任, 因此有管理权利。
حضرت ابوبکرؓ‘‘ عمرؓ‘‘ عثمانؓ‘‘ علیؓ اور ابن مسعودؓ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ نے قُرْئٌ کے معنے حیض کے لئے ہیں اور زید بن ثابتؓ‘ حضرت عائشہؓ اور ابن عمرؓ اور مالکؒ اور شافعیؒ نے طُہر کے معنے کیے ہیں (محیط)
بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ کا ترجمہ یہاں ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ بعض جگہ انہی الفاظ کا ترجمہ ’’مناسب حال‘‘ یا مناسب طور پر کیا گیا ہے۔ یہ فرق اردو میں مضمون کی وضاحت کی خاطر ہے۔ ہاں یہ یادرکھنا چاہیے کہ ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ میں دستور کا جو لفظ ہے اس کے اصل معنے تو قانون اور رواج کے ہیں۔ لیکن اردو میں کبھی یہ دستور کا لفظ Common Sense یعنی عقل عامہ کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے اور مراد یہ ہوتی ہے کہ شرفا اور عقلا کا یہی طریق ہے۔ جس کے معنے دوسرے لفظوں میں یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ عقل کا تقاضا یہی ہے۔ اس جگہ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ کے چونکہ یہی معنے ہیں اس لئے ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کے ا
اس جگہ واؤ ہے اور واؤ کے معنے عام طور پر ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں‘ لیکن اردو قواعد کے مطابق ’’اور‘‘ کا لفظ اسی وقت استعمال ہو سکتا تھا کہ اس جگہ مردوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہوتا۔ لیکن جیسا کہ ظاہر ہے اس موقعہ پر عورتوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہے اس لئے ’’اور‘‘ سے واؤ کا ترجمہ کرنا بالکل مفہوم کو بدل دیتا ہے اور کلام کا زور عورتوں کے حقوق سے ہٹ کر مردوں کے حقوق کی طرف چلا جاتا ہے حالانکہ انداز کلام سے ظاہر ہے کہ عورتوں کو اس امر کی طرف توجہ دلائی جا رہی ہے کہ تمہارے حقوق کی حفاظت ہم نے کر دی ہے اور جس طرح مردوں کو تم پر بعض حق دئے ہیں تم کو بھی ان پر بعض حق دئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ ضرور ہے کہ بعض
4:35.
2:235; 65:5.
Quru’ is plural of Qur’ or Qar’ which means, a time; menstruation; period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; termination of a menstruation; the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Muhit & Mufradat). Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the view that Qur’ means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah and Ibn-e-‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it is open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that o
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations: (a) A husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean, i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. (b) After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called ‘Iddat or the period of waiting. This is because this period gives the husband sufficient time to consider all the implications of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. (c) A divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. (d) For complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as
As far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but as pointed out in 4:35 men have a supervisory authority on account of the physical advantage they possess and the financial responsibility that they carry for providing for the household.
2:235; 65:5.
4:35.
Important Words:
قروء (courses) is the plural of قرء which is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الشیء i.e. he collected or put together the thing. قرأت الناقة means, the she-camel became pregnant. قرأت الحامل means, the pregnant woman gave birth to a child. قرات المرأة or اقرأت المرأة means, the woman became pure from menstrual discharge. اقرأت المرأة also means, she menstruated, thus giving contrary meanings. قرء (Qur’un or Qar’un), means: (1) a time, and this is the primary significance of the word, as we say ھبت الریح لقرئھا i.e. the wind blew at its fixed time; (2) menstruation; (3) period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; thus the word gives contrary meanings; (4) termination of a menstruation (Aqrab & Lane). The word قرء is also sometimes applied to the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month (Muhit). According to Raghib قرء means the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Mufradat).
ارحام (wombs) is the plural of رحم (rihm or rahim) which is from the verb رحم. They say رحمه i.e. he showed him mercy, he was tender towards him. رحمت المرأة means, the woman had complaint of the womb after childbirth. رحم (rahim) or رحم(rihm) means, (1) womb; (2) relationship, particularly by the female side. The expression اولواالارحام or ذوالارحام means, relatives or kinsmen. In Muslim jurisprudence the expression signifies such relations as are not direct heirs (Lane).
بعولة (husbands), like بعول, is the plural of بعل. They say بعل الرجل i.e. the man became a husband. بعلت المرأة means, the woman married and had a husband. بعل is like زوج meaning, both a husband and a wife, i.e. a partner in life; but the significance of husband is more common. The word also means, lord, master or owner of a thing; or a person in authority. The Arabs sometimes gave the name بعل to their idols also (Lane & Mufradat).
المعروف (equity) is a common Arabic word which has been freely used in the Quran as well as the Hadith. The word is derived from عرف. They say عرفه i.e. he knew it either by means of the five senses or by mental perception, as by reflection, or by consideration of the effect of a thing on the mind; he recognized it. المعروف means, (1) a known or commonly known thing; (2) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by reason, i.e. equity; (3) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by the law of Shari‘ah; (4) goodness, kindness and beneficence; (5) liberality coupled with moderation; (6) good fellowship with one’s family and others; (7) sincere and honest word of advice, etc. (Lane). It may be noted here that while taking the oath of allegiance from would-be Muslims, the Holy Prophet always used the word المعروف asking them to solemnly affirm that they would obey him in all معروف things, i.e. not only in such things as formed part of the divine law of Shari‘ah but also in those which the Prophet held to be good by his own reason.
درجة (rank) means, (1) the various steps forming a set of stairs; (2) rank; (3) eminence (4) degree (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations. One of these checks is that a husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called عدة(‘iddah) or the period of waiting. This is another check, because this period of waiting gives to the husband sufficient time to consider the pros and cons of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. The third check laid down in this verse is that a divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. The fourth check, as mentioned in the succeeding verses, is that for complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as well as the second divorce, and before the expiry of the period of waiting, the husband enjoys the privilege of taking his wife back, if he so desires. Even after the period of waiting is over, the couple can become reunited in the case of the first and second divorce by renewing the marriage tie.
The verse adds that as far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but in matters relating to discipline, the husband has superiority over the wife, i.e. in case of difference, the final authority is vested in him. The reasons for this are given in 4:35.
The divine attribute Mighty added at the end of the verse contains a reminder and a warning to the husband that he must not misuse the authority he has been given in household affairs, for there is the Almighty God over his head to Whom he is responsible for his actions. The attribute also provides a reason for vesting authority in the husband, who is the stronger of the parties. The attribute Wise brings home to the husband the fact that the vesting of the final authority in him is based on just and wise considerations, because wherever two or more persons live together, it is necessary that the wisest among them be appointed the Amir or the chief for the efficient running of their affairs and the uniformity of their actions.
A word here about the significance of قرء seems essential. As explained under Important Words, this word gives two distinct and contrary meanings, i.e. (1) menstruation; and (2) the period of purity between two menstruations. This has given rise to much difference of opinion among scholars of Muslim jurisprudence; Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal the Imams of jurisprudence have held the view that by using the word قرء
the Quran means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah (wife of the Holy Prophet) and Ibn ‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of jurisprudence have held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it would be open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that the first-mentioned view is perhaps the more reasonable of the two. If, however, one should desire to be on the perfectly safe side, it is open to him to take the word قرء to signify the periods of menstruation and purity taken together, i.e. the whole month.
a
4:35.
c
2:235; 65:5.
167
قُرُؤ (Quru’) 是 قُرْء (Qur’) 或 قَرْء (Qar’) 的复数, 意思是:一次; 月经; 月经前后的那段时间即洁净状态, 也就是说, 两次月经之间的那段时间; 一次月经的终止; 月经与沽净状态算在一起的那段时间, 即整个月份; 一个女人离开她洁净状态进入经期的时间或状态 {مُحِيْط (Muhit) 和 مُفْرَدَات (Mufradat)}。穆圣的同伴阿布•白克尔 (اَبُوْبَكر, Abu Bakr)、欧麦尔 (عُمَرْ, ‘Umar)、法理学教长阿布•哈尼法 (اَبُوْحَنِيْفَة, Abu Hanifa) 和阿哈默德•彬•汉巴尔 (اَحْمَدْ بِنْ حَنْبَلْ, Ahmad bin Hanbal) 认为 قُرْء 意指月经而不指洁净时期。与此相反, 穆圣另两位同伴阿依莎 (عَائِشَة, ‘A’ishah) 和伊本•欧麦尔 (اِبْنِ عُمَرْ, Ibn-e-‘Umar) 以及法理学教长马利克 (مٰلِكْ, Malik) 和沙斐伊 (شَافِعِیْ Shafi‘iy) 却持相反的看法 (مُحِيْط)。既然是见仁见智, 可以让一个穆斯林自己去采取两种看法中的任何一种。但是对有关争论的集体调查 (这里不必细说) 使人得到一个结论: 两种看法中第一种看来更近乎情理。虽然如此, 如果 (一个人) 要想稳当一些的话, 可以 (由他) 采用 قُرْء (Qur’), 的词义为月经洁净状态算在一起的那段时期, 即整个月份。
168
由於离婚是安拉在所有合法事情中最不愿意见到的事情 (دَاؤد), 它受到许多限制: (a) 丈夫只能在妻子洁净即月经洁净的状态时而且他在她洁净的时期与她无性关系时才能离婚。(b) 宣布离婚以后, 妻子必须等候三次月经即大约三个月的时间, 这段时间称为 عِدَّة (‘Iddat) 即等候时期。这是因为给丈夫充份的时间来考虑与他的这一行动有牵连的所有事情;假如他心中仍有一丝潜藏在那里的火花的话,他还可爱她;可以使他有再次决定的机会。(c) 离了婚的妇女如果已受孕不必对丈夫隐瞒, 因为可以认为将要出生的孩子有助于两口子重归和好。(d) 完全而不可撤回的分离, 可以有三次离婚。在第一和第二次宣布离婚后, 以及在等候时期到期前, 丈夫享有带回妻子的特权, 如果他想这样做的话。即使在等候时期结束后, 在第一和第二次离婚的情况下, 两口子仍能团圆, 只要重新结婚就可以了。
169
就个人权利而言, 夫妻是平等的。可是, 像4:35节经文指出的那样, 男人在体力方面条件较好, 又负有供养家庭的经济上的责任, 因此有管理权利。
1
حضرت ابوبکرؓ‘‘ عمرؓ‘‘ عثمانؓ‘‘ علیؓ اور ابن مسعودؓ اور امام ابوحنیفہؒ نے قُرْئٌ کے معنے حیض کے لئے ہیں اور زید بن ثابتؓ‘ حضرت عائشہؓ اور ابن عمرؓ اور مالکؒ اور شافعیؒ نے طُہر کے معنے کیے ہیں (محیط)
2
بِالْمَعْرُوْفِ کا ترجمہ یہاں ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کیا گیا ہے۔ بعض جگہ انہی الفاظ کا ترجمہ ’’مناسب حال‘‘ یا مناسب طور پر کیا گیا ہے۔ یہ فرق اردو میں مضمون کی وضاحت کی خاطر ہے۔ ہاں یہ یادرکھنا چاہیے کہ ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ میں دستور کا جو لفظ ہے اس کے اصل معنے تو قانون اور رواج کے ہیں۔ لیکن اردو میں کبھی یہ دستور کا لفظ Common Sense یعنی عقل عامہ کے معنوں میں بھی استعمال ہوتا ہے اور مراد یہ ہوتی ہے کہ شرفا اور عقلا کا یہی طریق ہے۔ جس کے معنے دوسرے لفظوں میں یہ ہوتے ہیں کہ عقل کا تقاضا یہی ہے۔ اس جگہ بِالۡمَعۡرُوۡفِ کے چونکہ یہی معنے ہیں اس لئے ’’مطابق دستور‘‘ کے ا
3
اس جگہ واؤ ہے اور واؤ کے معنے عام طور پر ’’اور‘‘ کے ہوتے ہیں‘ لیکن اردو قواعد کے مطابق ’’اور‘‘ کا لفظ اسی وقت استعمال ہو سکتا تھا کہ اس جگہ مردوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہوتا۔ لیکن جیسا کہ ظاہر ہے اس موقعہ پر عورتوں کے حقوق کا ذکر ہے اس لئے ’’اور‘‘ سے واؤ کا ترجمہ کرنا بالکل مفہوم کو بدل دیتا ہے اور کلام کا زور عورتوں کے حقوق سے ہٹ کر مردوں کے حقوق کی طرف چلا جاتا ہے حالانکہ انداز کلام سے ظاہر ہے کہ عورتوں کو اس امر کی طرف توجہ دلائی جا رہی ہے کہ تمہارے حقوق کی حفاظت ہم نے کر دی ہے اور جس طرح مردوں کو تم پر بعض حق دئے ہیں تم کو بھی ان پر بعض حق دئے ہیں۔ ہاں یہ ضرور ہے کہ بعض
a
2:235; 65:5.
b
4:35.
235
Important Words:
قروء (courses) is the plural of قرء which is derived from قرأ. They say قرأ الشیء i.e. he collected or put together the thing. قرأت الناقة means, the she-camel became pregnant. قرأت الحامل means, the pregnant woman gave birth to a child. قرات المرأة or اقرأت المرأة means, the woman became pure from menstrual discharge. اقرأت المرأة also means, she menstruated, thus giving contrary meanings. قرء (Qur’un or Qar’un), means: (1) a time, and this is the primary significance of the word, as we say ھبت الریح لقرئھا i.e. the wind blew at its fixed time; (2) menstruation; (3) period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; thus the word gives contrary meanings; (4) termination of a menstruation (Aqrab & Lane). The word قرء is also sometimes applied to the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month (Muhit). According to Raghib قرء means the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Mufradat).
ارحام (wombs) is the plural of رحم (rihm or rahim) which is from the verb رحم. They say رحمه i.e. he showed him mercy, he was tender towards him. رحمت المرأة means, the woman had complaint of the womb after childbirth. رحم (rahim) or رحم(rihm) means, (1) womb; (2) relationship, particularly by the female side. The expression اولواالارحام or ذوالارحام means, relatives or kinsmen. In Muslim jurisprudence the expression signifies such relations as are not direct heirs (Lane).
بعولة (husbands), like بعول, is the plural of بعل. They say بعل الرجل i.e. the man became a husband. بعلت المرأة means, the woman married and had a husband. بعل is like زوج meaning, both a husband and a wife, i.e. a partner in life; but the significance of husband is more common. The word also means, lord, master or owner of a thing; or a person in authority. The Arabs sometimes gave the name بعل to their idols also (Lane & Mufradat).
المعروف (equity) is a common Arabic word which has been freely used in the Quran as well as the Hadith. The word is derived from عرف. They say عرفه i.e. he knew it either by means of the five senses or by mental perception, as by reflection, or by consideration of the effect of a thing on the mind; he recognized it. المعروف means, (1) a known or commonly known thing; (2) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by reason, i.e. equity; (3) an action or thing the goodness of which is known by the law of Shari‘ah; (4) goodness, kindness and beneficence; (5) liberality coupled with moderation; (6) good fellowship with one’s family and others; (7) sincere and honest word of advice, etc. (Lane). It may be noted here that while taking the oath of allegiance from would-be Muslims, the Holy Prophet always used the word المعروف asking them to solemnly affirm that they would obey him in all معروف things, i.e. not only in such things as formed part of the divine law of Shari‘ah but also in those which the Prophet held to be good by his own reason.
درجة (rank) means, (1) the various steps forming a set of stairs; (2) rank; (3) eminence (4) degree (Aqrab).
Commentary:
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations. One of these checks is that a husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called عدة(‘iddah) or the period of waiting. This is another check, because this period of waiting gives to the husband sufficient time to consider the pros and cons of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. The third check laid down in this verse is that a divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. The fourth check, as mentioned in the succeeding verses, is that for complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as well as the second divorce, and before the expiry of the period of waiting, the husband enjoys the privilege of taking his wife back, if he so desires. Even after the period of waiting is over, the couple can become reunited in the case of the first and second divorce by renewing the marriage tie.
The verse adds that as far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but in matters relating to discipline, the husband has superiority over the wife, i.e. in case of difference, the final authority is vested in him. The reasons for this are given in 4:35.
The divine attribute Mighty added at the end of the verse contains a reminder and a warning to the husband that he must not misuse the authority he has been given in household affairs, for there is the Almighty God over his head to Whom he is responsible for his actions. The attribute also provides a reason for vesting authority in the husband, who is the stronger of the parties. The attribute Wise brings home to the husband the fact that the vesting of the final authority in him is based on just and wise considerations, because wherever two or more persons live together, it is necessary that the wisest among them be appointed the Amir or the chief for the efficient running of their affairs and the uniformity of their actions.
A word here about the significance of قرء seems essential. As explained under Important Words, this word gives two distinct and contrary meanings, i.e. (1) menstruation; and (2) the period of purity between two menstruations. This has given rise to much difference of opinion among scholars of Muslim jurisprudence; Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal the Imams of jurisprudence have held the view that by using the word قرء
the Quran means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah (wife of the Holy Prophet) and Ibn ‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of jurisprudence have held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it would be open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that the first-mentioned view is perhaps the more reasonable of the two. If, however, one should desire to be on the perfectly safe side, it is open to him to take the word قرء to signify the periods of menstruation and purity taken together, i.e. the whole month.
a
4:35.
b
2:235; 65:5.
277
Quru’ is plural of Qur’ or Qar’ which means, a time; menstruation; period or state of purity preceding and following a menstrual discharge, i.e. the period between two menstruations; termination of a menstruation; the period of menstruation and that of purity taken together, i.e. the whole month the time or state when a woman leaves her state of purity and enters that of menstruation (Muhit & Mufradat). Abu Bakr and ‘Umar among the Companions of the Holy Prophet and Abu Hanifah and Ahmad bin Hanbal among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the view that Qur’ means menstruation and not the period of purity. On the contrary, ‘A’ishah and Ibn-e-‘Umar among the Companions, and Malik and Shafi‘i among the Imams of Jurisprudence held the opposite view (Muhit). Opinions being so balanced, it is open to a Muslim to take either of the two views, but a collective survey of relevant arguments, which need not be stated here, leads one to the conclusion that o
278
In view of the fact that divorce is the most hateful of all lawful things in the sight of God (Dawud), it has been hedged round by many checks and limitations: (a) A husband can divorce his wife only when she is clean, i.e. in a state of purity, and he has had no sexual knowledge of her in her period of purity. (b) After the pronouncement of divorce the wife must wait for three menstruations, i.e. about three months, which period is called ‘Iddat or the period of waiting. This is because this period gives the husband sufficient time to consider all the implications of his action and to allow his love for her, if there is yet a dormant spark lying smouldering somewhere, to reassert itself. (c) A divorced woman, if pregnant, must not conceal this fact from her husband, for the expected birth of a child is calculated to go a long way in bringing about reconciliation between the couple. (d) For complete and irrevocable separation there should be three divorces. After the pronouncement of the first as
279
As far as personal rights are concerned, the husband and the wife stand on a par, but as pointed out in 4:35 men have a supervisory authority on account of the physical advantage they possess and the financial responsibility that they carry for providing for the household.
فَإِن طَلَّقَهَا فَلَا تَحِلُّ لَهُۥ مِنۢ بَعْدُ حَتَّىٰ تَنكِحَ زَوْجًا غَيْرَهُۥ ۗ فَإِن طَلَّقَهَا فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِمَآ أَن يَتَرَاجَعَآ إِن ظَنَّآ أَن يُقِيمَا حُدُودَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَتِلْكَ حُدُودُ ٱللَّهِ يُبَيِّنُهَا لِقَوْمٍ يَعْلَمُونَ
这节经文述及第三次和最终一次离婚。在该次离婚后, 丈夫再也无权与妻子破镜重圆, 除非那离了婚的女人再嫁另一个男人并建立夫妻关系, 然后又与他正式离婚, 或者他死了, 使她有自由再嫁另一个男人。藉着离婚法律中包括这一条款, 伊斯兰教一方面提高婚姻关系的严肃性, 另一方面, 也给一度过着夫妻生活的两个人提供一个重新结合的机会, 虽然机会是很小的。
This verse refers to the third and final divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with; and, on the other, it has afforded yet another, though extremely remote, opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desire.
Important Words:
یتراجعا (return to each other) is derived from رجع i.e. he returned; the word is used to indicate the coming together of people after their dispersal or separation, as they say تراجع القوم i.e. the people returned to the place from where they separated or left (Aqrab).
یقیما (observe) is derived from اقام which means, he made a thing stand upright; he observed or duly performed a religious commandment or duty, etc. (Lane). See also under 2:4.
تنکح (she marries) is derived from نکح. They say نکح or نکحت meaning (1) he or she married a spouse; (2) he or she had sexual intercourse with his or her spouse. In the present verse the word is used in the latter sense. See also 2:222.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the third and final pronouncement of divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce, Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with and has declared unlawful the evil practice of حلالة (halalah); and, on the other, it has afforded yet another opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desired. The practice of halalah referred to above consists in a divorced woman marrying a man, other than her former husband, with the object of obtaining divorce from him and thereby making herself lawful for the former husband. Islam condemns this practice as a thing accursed (Tirmidhi ch. on Nikah) and enjoins that marriage with and divorce from another husband must both be genuine.
173
这节经文述及第三次和最终一次离婚。在该次离婚后, 丈夫再也无权与妻子破镜重圆, 除非那离了婚的女人再嫁另一个男人并建立夫妻关系, 然后又与他正式离婚, 或者他死了, 使她有自由再嫁另一个男人。藉着离婚法律中包括这一条款, 伊斯兰教一方面提高婚姻关系的严肃性, 另一方面, 也给一度过着夫妻生活的两个人提供一个重新结合的机会, 虽然机会是很小的。
237
Important Words:
یتراجعا (return to each other) is derived from رجع i.e. he returned; the word is used to indicate the coming together of people after their dispersal or separation, as they say تراجع القوم i.e. the people returned to the place from where they separated or left (Aqrab).
یقیما (observe) is derived from اقام which means, he made a thing stand upright; he observed or duly performed a religious commandment or duty, etc. (Lane). See also under 2:4.
تنکح (she marries) is derived from نکح. They say نکح or نکحت meaning (1) he or she married a spouse; (2) he or she had sexual intercourse with his or her spouse. In the present verse the word is used in the latter sense. See also 2:222.
Commentary:
This verse refers to the third and final pronouncement of divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce, Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with and has declared unlawful the evil practice of حلالة (halalah); and, on the other, it has afforded yet another opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desired. The practice of halalah referred to above consists in a divorced woman marrying a man, other than her former husband, with the object of obtaining divorce from him and thereby making herself lawful for the former husband. Islam condemns this practice as a thing accursed (Tirmidhi ch. on Nikah) and enjoins that marriage with and divorce from another husband must both be genuine.
283
This verse refers to the third and final divorce after which the husband loses all right of reunion with his wife unless the divorced woman marries another man and establishes conjugal relations with him, and is then formally divorced by him or he dies, leaving her free to marry another man. By the inclusion of this provision in the law of divorce Islam has, on the one hand, enhanced the sanctity of the marriage tie which must not be trifled with; and, on the other, it has afforded yet another, though extremely remote, opportunity to the couple who once had lived as husband and wife to become reunited if they so desire.
لَّا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِن طَلَّقْتُمُ ٱلنِّسَآءَ مَا لَمْ تَمَسُّوهُنَّ أَوْ تَفْرِضُوا۟ لَهُنَّ فَرِيضَةً ۚ وَمَتِّعُوهُنَّ عَلَى ٱلْمُوسِعِ قَدَرُهُۥ وَعَلَى ٱلْمُقْتِرِ قَدَرُهُۥ مَتَٰعًۢا بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ ۖ حَقًّا عَلَى ٱلْمُحْسِنِينَ
这是一种例外的情况, 但有时确实会发生。在缔结婚约后, 情况发生了变化, 或发现婚姻难以圆满继续, 或令人不快。这一节和下一节经文对这样的一些情况作出了规定。
بظاہر یہ ایک بیہودہ بات معلوم ہوتی ہے کہ جو شخص چھونے سے پہلے طلاق دے گا وہ نکاح ہی کیوں کرے گا۔ لیکن ایسی مجبوریاں پیش آجاتی ہیں۔ مثلاً نکاح کے معاً بعد ایسے گواہ مل گئے جنہوں نے ایسی گواہیاں دیں جن سے نکاح کی حرمت ثابت ہوگئی یا کم سے کم نکاح کی کراہت پیدا ہوگئی۔ مثلاً ادھوری گواہی ایسی مل گئی کہ یہ عورت خاوند کی رضائی بہن ہے پس گو وہ گواہی ادھوری ہو مگر خاوند کے دل میں کراہت تو پیدا ہو جائے گی اور اس قسم کی گواہیاں اکثر نکاحوں کے بعد مل جاتی ہیں یا خاندان کے بڑے آدمیوں نے جن کو پہلے حالات کا علم نہ تھا فیصلہ دیا کہ ہمارے آپس کے ایسے تعلقات ہیں کہ تم دونوں آپس میں نبھ
بغیر مہر مقرر کرنے کے اسلام نے نکاح ناجائز رکھا ہے لیکن اس جگہ سے پتہ لگتا ہے کہ شاید یہ بھی جائز ہے۔ فقہاء نے اس کے یہ معنے کیے ہیں کہ تعیین روپیہ کی چاہے نہ ہو لیکن یہ ضرور سمجھا جائے گا کہ مہر مقرر ہے اور اس کی تعیین مہر ِبالمثل سے ہوگی یعنی اسی حیثیت کے خاندان کے دوسرے افراد کو دیکھا جائے گا کہ ان کا کیا مہر ہے۔
مَتَاعًا۔ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ کا مصدر ہے اور یہ تاکید کے لئے آتا ہے جو کبھی تقلیل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور کبھی تکثیر و تکمیل کے۔ کبھی ایسا مصدر صرف غیر معین شے پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے آتا ہے اور کچھ کے معنے دیتا ہے اس جگہ یہی معنے چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
اگر اس معاوضہ کے متعلق اختلاف ہو تو قرآن کریم نے اصولی طور پر فرمایا ہے کہ جھگڑے کی صورت میں اُولِی الْاَمْر کی طرف رجوع کرو۔ پس اختلاف کی صورت میں قاضی کے پاس فیصلہ لے جانا چاہیے۔ وہ فیصلہ دے گا کہ خاوندنے اپنی حیثیت کے مطابق عورت کا نقصان پورا کیا ہے یا نہیں۔
This would be an exceptional case. But cases do sometimes happen where after a marriage contract has been completed, circumstances arise or become known which render the consummation and continuation of the marriage difficult or undesirable. This and the next verse make provision for such cases.
Important Words:
متعوھن (provide for them) is derived from متع (mata‘a). They say متع الشیء i.e. the thing became tall. متع الرجل means, the man became well off. متع الله فلانا (matta‘a) means, God granted him life and the necessaries thereof. متع المرأة المطلقة means, he provided his divorced wife with necessaries of life. تمتع به أو منه or استمتع means, he profited by it for some length of time; he was afforded an opportunity to enjoy it. المتاع means, things that are necessary for life without affording opulence; things useful and necessary such as food, clothing, household utensils, furniture, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
المقتر (the poor man) is derived from قتر. They say قتر علی عیاله i.e. he was niggardly towards his family. اقتر الرجل means, the man became poor and straitened in circumstances. المقتر is, therefore, one who is poor, one who is in straitened circumstances (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Circumstances might arise when a husband may consider it necessary or desirable to divorce his wife before they have had conjugal relations, i.e. before the man has gone in unto his wife and even before any مھر (dowry) has been decided upon by the parties. The verse allows this procedure but makes it obligatory on the husband to see that in such a case his divorced wife receives suitable provision according to his means. Thus Islam seeks not only to provide for the divorced woman but to leave no trace of bitterness, which is very often the result of the dissolution of a marriage. The word المحسنین i.e. the virtuous or those who act benevolently, has been used to exhort the husband that the more generous he is in his treatment of his divorced wife, the more pleasing will his conduct be in the sight of God.
183
这是一种例外的情况, 但有时确实会发生。在缔结婚约后, 情况发生了变化, 或发现婚姻难以圆满继续, 或令人不快。这一节和下一节经文对这样的一些情况作出了规定。
1
بظاہر یہ ایک بیہودہ بات معلوم ہوتی ہے کہ جو شخص چھونے سے پہلے طلاق دے گا وہ نکاح ہی کیوں کرے گا۔ لیکن ایسی مجبوریاں پیش آجاتی ہیں۔ مثلاً نکاح کے معاً بعد ایسے گواہ مل گئے جنہوں نے ایسی گواہیاں دیں جن سے نکاح کی حرمت ثابت ہوگئی یا کم سے کم نکاح کی کراہت پیدا ہوگئی۔ مثلاً ادھوری گواہی ایسی مل گئی کہ یہ عورت خاوند کی رضائی بہن ہے پس گو وہ گواہی ادھوری ہو مگر خاوند کے دل میں کراہت تو پیدا ہو جائے گی اور اس قسم کی گواہیاں اکثر نکاحوں کے بعد مل جاتی ہیں یا خاندان کے بڑے آدمیوں نے جن کو پہلے حالات کا علم نہ تھا فیصلہ دیا کہ ہمارے آپس کے ایسے تعلقات ہیں کہ تم دونوں آپس میں نبھ
2
بغیر مہر مقرر کرنے کے اسلام نے نکاح ناجائز رکھا ہے لیکن اس جگہ سے پتہ لگتا ہے کہ شاید یہ بھی جائز ہے۔ فقہاء نے اس کے یہ معنے کیے ہیں کہ تعیین روپیہ کی چاہے نہ ہو لیکن یہ ضرور سمجھا جائے گا کہ مہر مقرر ہے اور اس کی تعیین مہر ِبالمثل سے ہوگی یعنی اسی حیثیت کے خاندان کے دوسرے افراد کو دیکھا جائے گا کہ ان کا کیا مہر ہے۔
3
مَتَاعًا۔ مَتِّعُوْھُنَّ کا مصدر ہے اور یہ تاکید کے لئے آتا ہے جو کبھی تقلیل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور کبھی تکثیر و تکمیل کے۔ کبھی ایسا مصدر صرف غیر معین شے پر دلالت کرنے کے لئے آتا ہے اور کچھ کے معنے دیتا ہے اس جگہ یہی معنے چسپاں ہوتے ہیں۔
4
اگر اس معاوضہ کے متعلق اختلاف ہو تو قرآن کریم نے اصولی طور پر فرمایا ہے کہ جھگڑے کی صورت میں اُولِی الْاَمْر کی طرف رجوع کرو۔ پس اختلاف کی صورت میں قاضی کے پاس فیصلہ لے جانا چاہیے۔ وہ فیصلہ دے گا کہ خاوندنے اپنی حیثیت کے مطابق عورت کا نقصان پورا کیا ہے یا نہیں۔
243
Important Words:
متعوھن (provide for them) is derived from متع (mata‘a). They say متع الشیء i.e. the thing became tall. متع الرجل means, the man became well off. متع الله فلانا (matta‘a) means, God granted him life and the necessaries thereof. متع المرأة المطلقة means, he provided his divorced wife with necessaries of life. تمتع به أو منه or استمتع means, he profited by it for some length of time; he was afforded an opportunity to enjoy it. المتاع means, things that are necessary for life without affording opulence; things useful and necessary such as food, clothing, household utensils, furniture, etc. (Aqrab & Lane).
المقتر (the poor man) is derived from قتر. They say قتر علی عیاله i.e. he was niggardly towards his family. اقتر الرجل means, the man became poor and straitened in circumstances. المقتر is, therefore, one who is poor, one who is in straitened circumstances (Aqrab).
Commentary:
Circumstances might arise when a husband may consider it necessary or desirable to divorce his wife before they have had conjugal relations, i.e. before the man has gone in unto his wife and even before any مھر (dowry) has been decided upon by the parties. The verse allows this procedure but makes it obligatory on the husband to see that in such a case his divorced wife receives suitable provision according to his means. Thus Islam seeks not only to provide for the divorced woman but to leave no trace of bitterness, which is very often the result of the dissolution of a marriage. The word المحسنین i.e. the virtuous or those who act benevolently, has been used to exhort the husband that the more generous he is in his treatment of his divorced wife, the more pleasing will his conduct be in the sight of God.
292
This would be an exceptional case. But cases do sometimes happen where after a marriage contract has been completed, circumstances arise or become known which render the consummation and continuation of the marriage difficult or undesirable. This and the next verse make provision for such cases.
أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلْمَلَإِ مِنۢ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مُوسَىٰٓ إِذْ قَالُوا۟ لِنَبِىٍّ لَّهُمُ ٱبْعَثْ لَنَا مَلِكًا نُّقَٰتِلْ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ قَالَ هَلْ عَسَيْتُمْ إِن كُتِبَ عَلَيْكُمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ أَلَّا تُقَٰتِلُوا۟ ۖ قَالُوا۟ وَمَا لَنَآ أَلَّا نُقَٰتِلَ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ وَقَدْ أُخْرِجْنَا مِن دِيَٰرِنَا وَأَبْنَآئِنَا ۖ فَلَمَّا كُتِبَ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلْقِتَالُ تَوَلَّوْا۟ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا مِّنْهُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌۢ بِٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
4:78.
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
4:78.
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
4:78.
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
d
4:78.
3
دیکھئے پرانا عہدنامہ کتاب قاضیوں باب۶ آیت ۷ و ۸۔
4
عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہیں ’’تم قریب ہو‘‘ اور ھَلْ عَسَیْتُمْ کے معنے ہوئے ’’کیا تم اس امر کے قریب ہو‘‘ مگر اردو میں اس ترجمہ کے کوئی معنے نہیں بنتے۔ اس لئے لفظی ترجمہ کی بجائے اس کا بامحاورہ ترجمہ کر دیا گیا ہے۔
5
عربی میں صرف قَلِیْل کا لفظ ہے مگر عربی کے قاعدہ کی رو سے یہاں جماعت وغیرہ کے ہم معنی کوئی لفظ محذوف ہے۔ اردو میں اگر صرف قلیل رکھا جائے تو بے معنے ہو جاتا ہے۔ اس لئے ’’جماعت‘‘ کا لفظ عام قاعدہ کے خلاف خطوط میں نہیں لکھا گیا۔ بلکہ ظاہر میں لکھا گیا ہے۔
6
استثناء میں ’’سب‘‘ کا لفظ پہلے حصہ جملہ میں مقدر ہوتا ہے۔ اس جگہ اس کے ظاہر کرنے کے بغیر معنے واضح نہیں ہوتے۔
a
4:78.
253
Important Words:
الملاء (chiefs) is derived from ملاء. They say ملاء الاناء بالماء i.e. he filled the vessel with water. ملی رعبا means, he was filled with fright. الملاء means: (1) assembly of persons; (2) chiefs and nobles, for they fill the eyes and hearts of the commoners withawe and admiration; or because with them a meeting becomes full and appears to be properly attended. الملاء الاعلی means, the community of high placed angels (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The Quran now proceeds to give the story of how the different tribes of Israel were welded into one great nation, also noting incidentally the weaknesses displayed by them, so that their example may serve as a lesson to Muslims.
The incident mentioned in the verse under comment indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites in the time to which this verse relates over that of the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Quran relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse the Israelites are reported to have said, What reason have we to abstain from fighting in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons? The improvement, however, was more verbal than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of these people wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
a
4:78.
306
The incident mentioned indicates an improvement in the condition of the Israelites at the time to which this verse relates compared with the time of Moses himself. In 5:25 the Qur’an relates that when Moses exhorted his followers to fight the enemy in the cause of Allah, they replied, Go thou and thy Lord and fight, and here we sit. On the contrary, in the present verse they are reported to have said, What reason have we that we should not fight in the cause of Allah when we have been driven forth from our homes and our sons. The improvement, however, was only verbal rather than real; for when the time of actual fighting came, many of them wavered and refused to fight. The incident thus serves as a grim warning to Muslims to beware of treading the same path.
وَقَالَ لَهُمْ نَبِيُّهُمْ إِنَّ ءَايَةَ مُلْكِهِۦٓ أَن يَأْتِيَكُمُ ٱلتَّابُوتُ فِيهِ سَكِينَةٌ مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ وَبَقِيَّةٌ مِّمَّا تَرَكَ ءَالُ مُوسَىٰ وَءَالُ هَٰرُونَ تَحْمِلُهُ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ ۚ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً لَّكُمْ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
تَابُوْت (Tabut) 意指: (1) 箱子或盒子; (2) 胸腔、胸部、腹部或肋骨以及他们内部包含的。例如, 心脏等等的东西 (Lane); (3) 心即知识、智慧和宁静的储藏室 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。注释者们对 تَابُوْت (Tabut) 这个字的意义有不同看法。«圣经»中把它作 “方舟” 或 “约柜” 解, 但是 «古兰经» 中的描述肯定地表明, 此间这字的意义是 “心” 或 “腹”。这节经文描写 تَابُوْت 这个字说, “从养主那里来的宁静的心境; ”不能用作 “一只方舟” 解; 因为, «圣经» 中谈及的那只方舟, 非但不能给别人以和平和宁静, 而且也不能保护以色列人不遭受失败, 也不能保护它自己, 因为被敌人带走了。即使在各次战役中带着方舟走的扫罗 (Saul), 也屡受惨败, 连敌人也觉得他可怜, 最后遭遇到不光采的结局。这样的一只方舟从未能使古以色列人有什么宁静。安拉赐给他们的是充满了勇气和毅力的心, 因此, 在所述及的宁静的心境降给他们之后, 他们成功地抵御了敌人的攻击, 并使他们遭到沉重的失败。
安拉给以色列人的另一恩赐, 在传下来的 “精神遗物”一词中谈及。安拉使他们心里充满高贵品质, 这是他们的祖先穆撒 (摩西) 和哈融 (哈伦) 子孙的特点。穆撒和哈融的子孙传下来的, 不是物质的东西, 而是他们伟大的祖先作为遗产传给他们的良好道德品质。
تَابُوْت کے عام معنے تو صندوق کے اور کشتی کے ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) لیکن استعارۃ ً اسے دل کے معنٰی میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ مفردات راغب میں ہے قِیْلَ عِبَارَۃٌ عَنِ الْقَلْبِ وَالسَّکِیْنَۃِ وَ عَمَّا فِیْہِ مِنَ الْعِلْمِ یعنی کبھی لفظ تابوت کو استعارۃ ًدل کے معنے میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ الفاظ قرآنیہ صاف دلالت کر رہے ہیں کہ اس جگہ تابوت سے مراد دل ہے۔ کیونکہ فرماتا ہے۔ اس تابوت میں تمہارے رب کی طرف سے سکینت ہے۔ اب یہ ظاہر ہے کہ سکینت دل میں ہوتی ہے نہ کہ صندوقوں میں۔ اسی طرح اس تابوت کے متعلق فرماتا ہے تَحْمِلُہُ الْمَلٰٓئِکَۃُ فرشتے اسے اٹھائے ہ
Tabut means, (1) a chest or box; (2) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (3) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat). Commentators have differed about the significance of the word Tabut and the Bible mentions it as an ark or chest, and the description given in the Qur’an definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom." The description of the Tabut in the verse "wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord" cannot apply to an ark; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, as it was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelite
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites is referred to in the word "legacy." God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities, which characterised their ancestors, the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist in any material things but meant the good moral qualities with which they were endowed as the heritage of their great ancestors.
Important Words:
التابوت (heart) is derived from تاب i.e. he returned; he returned to God; he repented; he left off the way of sin and began to tread the path of rectitude. التابوت means: (1) a chest or box, as things are repeatedly taken out of, and returned to, it; (2) a coffin or a bier; (3) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (4) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat).
سکینة (tranquillity) is derived from سکن i.e. it became calm and tranquil. سکینة means, peace, tranquillity, calmness, freedom from agitation and disturbance (Aqrab & Lane).
بقیة (legacy) is derived from بقی i.e. he or it remained behind; or he or it continued or lasted for long or forever. بقیة means, that which remains behind, i.e. legacy; remainder; remains; remnant; residue; relic; the best portion of a thing, as it is always the best part of a thing that survives. فلان بقیة القوم means, such a one is the best and the most excellent of the party (Lane).
Commentary:
Though commentators have differed about the significance of the word تابوت and the Bible mentions it as an "ark" or chest, the description of the Quran definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom.'' The words of the Quran are: wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord. Now this description cannot apply to an ark or a chest; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, and was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns, suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelites. What God gave them was a heart full of tranquillity which was aided by angels who buoyed up the Israelites and filled their hearts with courage and perseverance so that, after the coming of the said tranquillity, they successfully resisted the attacks of the enemy and inflicted heavy defeats on them.
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites has been referred to in the word بقیة or legacy. God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities which characterized their ancestors, the people or the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist of any material things but referred to the good qualities which they were given as the heritage of their great ancestors. This heritage was similar to the one to which reference has been made in the words, that (he) may be heir to me and to the House of Jacob (19: 7). Evidently, it is not a material heritage but a spiritual and moral heritage that is mentioned in this verse. Similarly, the followers of Gideon were imbued with a spiritual and moral بقیة i.e. such noble attributes of Moses and Aaron and their descendants as God had endowed them with. It was a sign that it was God Who had set up Gideon as king over the tribes of Israel so that he might protect them against the ravages of their enemy and breathe into them a martial spirit, a work which saw its consummation in the days of David.
192
تَابُوْت (Tabut) 意指: (1) 箱子或盒子; (2) 胸腔、胸部、腹部或肋骨以及他们内部包含的。例如, 心脏等等的东西 (Lane); (3) 心即知识、智慧和宁静的储藏室 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。注释者们对 تَابُوْت (Tabut) 这个字的意义有不同看法。«圣经»中把它作 “方舟” 或 “约柜” 解, 但是 «古兰经» 中的描述肯定地表明, 此间这字的意义是 “心” 或 “腹”。这节经文描写 تَابُوْت 这个字说, “从养主那里来的宁静的心境; ”不能用作 “一只方舟” 解; 因为, «圣经» 中谈及的那只方舟, 非但不能给别人以和平和宁静, 而且也不能保护以色列人不遭受失败, 也不能保护它自己, 因为被敌人带走了。即使在各次战役中带着方舟走的扫罗 (Saul), 也屡受惨败, 连敌人也觉得他可怜, 最后遭遇到不光采的结局。这样的一只方舟从未能使古以色列人有什么宁静。安拉赐给他们的是充满了勇气和毅力的心, 因此, 在所述及的宁静的心境降给他们之后, 他们成功地抵御了敌人的攻击, 并使他们遭到沉重的失败。
193
安拉给以色列人的另一恩赐, 在传下来的 “精神遗物”一词中谈及。安拉使他们心里充满高贵品质, 这是他们的祖先穆撒 (摩西) 和哈融 (哈伦) 子孙的特点。穆撒和哈融的子孙传下来的, 不是物质的东西, 而是他们伟大的祖先作为遗产传给他们的良好道德品质。
1
تَابُوْت کے عام معنے تو صندوق کے اور کشتی کے ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) لیکن استعارۃ ً اسے دل کے معنٰی میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ مفردات راغب میں ہے قِیْلَ عِبَارَۃٌ عَنِ الْقَلْبِ وَالسَّکِیْنَۃِ وَ عَمَّا فِیْہِ مِنَ الْعِلْمِ یعنی کبھی لفظ تابوت کو استعارۃ ًدل کے معنے میں بھی استعمال کیا جاتا ہے۔ الفاظ قرآنیہ صاف دلالت کر رہے ہیں کہ اس جگہ تابوت سے مراد دل ہے۔ کیونکہ فرماتا ہے۔ اس تابوت میں تمہارے رب کی طرف سے سکینت ہے۔ اب یہ ظاہر ہے کہ سکینت دل میں ہوتی ہے نہ کہ صندوقوں میں۔ اسی طرح اس تابوت کے متعلق فرماتا ہے تَحْمِلُہُ الْمَلٰٓئِکَۃُ فرشتے اسے اٹھائے ہ
255
Important Words:
التابوت (heart) is derived from تاب i.e. he returned; he returned to God; he repented; he left off the way of sin and began to tread the path of rectitude. التابوت means: (1) a chest or box, as things are repeatedly taken out of, and returned to, it; (2) a coffin or a bier; (3) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (4) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat).
سکینة (tranquillity) is derived from سکن i.e. it became calm and tranquil. سکینة means, peace, tranquillity, calmness, freedom from agitation and disturbance (Aqrab & Lane).
بقیة (legacy) is derived from بقی i.e. he or it remained behind; or he or it continued or lasted for long or forever. بقیة means, that which remains behind, i.e. legacy; remainder; remains; remnant; residue; relic; the best portion of a thing, as it is always the best part of a thing that survives. فلان بقیة القوم means, such a one is the best and the most excellent of the party (Lane).
Commentary:
Though commentators have differed about the significance of the word تابوت and the Bible mentions it as an "ark" or chest, the description of the Quran definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom.'' The words of the Quran are: wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord. Now this description cannot apply to an ark or a chest; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, and was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns, suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelites. What God gave them was a heart full of tranquillity which was aided by angels who buoyed up the Israelites and filled their hearts with courage and perseverance so that, after the coming of the said tranquillity, they successfully resisted the attacks of the enemy and inflicted heavy defeats on them.
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites has been referred to in the word بقیة or legacy. God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities which characterized their ancestors, the people or the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist of any material things but referred to the good qualities which they were given as the heritage of their great ancestors. This heritage was similar to the one to which reference has been made in the words, that (he) may be heir to me and to the House of Jacob (19: 7). Evidently, it is not a material heritage but a spiritual and moral heritage that is mentioned in this verse. Similarly, the followers of Gideon were imbued with a spiritual and moral بقیة i.e. such noble attributes of Moses and Aaron and their descendants as God had endowed them with. It was a sign that it was God Who had set up Gideon as king over the tribes of Israel so that he might protect them against the ravages of their enemy and breathe into them a martial spirit, a work which saw its consummation in the days of David.
308
Tabut means, (1) a chest or box; (2) chest or breast or bosom or the ribs with what they contain, as the heart, etc. (Lane); (3) the heart which is the storehouse of knowledge, wisdom and peace (Mufradat). Commentators have differed about the significance of the word Tabut and the Bible mentions it as an ark or chest, and the description given in the Qur’an definitely shows that the word has been used here in the sense of "heart" or "bosom." The description of the Tabut in the verse "wherein there will be tranquillity from your Lord" cannot apply to an ark; for, far from granting peace and tranquillity to others, the ark spoken of by the Bible could neither protect the Israelites against defeat nor could it protect itself, as it was carried away by the enemy. Even Saul who took with him the ark during his campaigns suffered crushing defeats, so much so that even the enemy pitied him and he met with an ignominious end. Such an ark could not be a source of tranquillity to the Israelite
309
Another favour which God conferred on the Israelites is referred to in the word "legacy." God imbued their hearts with the noble qualities, which characterised their ancestors, the descendants of Moses and Aaron. The legacy left by the descendants of Moses and Aaron did not consist in any material things but meant the good moral qualities with which they were endowed as the heritage of their great ancestors.
إِن تُبْدُوا۟ ٱلصَّدَقَٰتِ فَنِعِمَّا هِىَ ۖ وَإِن تُخْفُوهَا وَتُؤْتُوهَا ٱلْفُقَرَآءَ فَهُوَ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۚ وَيُكَفِّرُ عَنكُم مِّن سَيِّـَٔاتِكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرٌ
نِعِمَّا ھِیَ اصل میں نِعْمَ مَا ھِیَ ہے۔ یعنی یہ بہت اچھی بات ہے۔ یہ مخصوص بالمدح کہلاتا ہے اور اس کا حل نِعْمَ الشَّیْئُ شَیْئًا ہے (املاء ابوالبقاء) جیسے اردو میں کہتے ہیں کہ بس کام تو یہ ہے۔
مِنْ سَیِّاٰ تِکُمْ کے معنے یہ بھی ہیں کہ بدیوں سے بعض کو اس کے سبب سے چھپا دے گا‘ مٹا دے گا۔ اور مِنْ زائد بغرضِ تاکید بھی ہو سکتا ہے اس صورت میں یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ تمہاری بدیاں بالکل مٹا دے گا۔ اخفش نے اس جگہ یہی معنے کیے ہیں (املاء ابوالبقاء)
4:32, 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
9:60, 103, 104.
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, open and secret. By giving alms openly a man sets a good example to others which they may imitate. Secret almsgiving in some cases is better, because then one refrains from exposing the poverty of his less fortunate brethren, and there is also little occasion for feeling proud in giving secretly.
The particle min either may have been used for the sake of emphasis, or in the sense of "many" or "some."
9:60, 103, 104.
4:32; 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
Important Words:
یکفر (will remove) is derived from کفر (kaffara) which again is derived from کفر (kafara) for which see 2:7. They say کفر عنه سیئته i.e. (1) He (God) covered or removed, or did away with his sin; (2) He expiated his sin; (3) He effaced or obliterated his sin (Lane).
Commentary:
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, i.e. open and secret. By giving alms openly, a man sets a good example to others and many begin to imitate him. Secret alms-giving is in many cases better, because in this way one refrains from exposing the poverty of his brethren and there is also little occasion for pride in secret giving. It should be noted that the word خیر (better) occurring in the verse is qualified by the words "for You", while the word نعما (well and good) is not so qualified, which points to the fact that whereas secret giving to the poor is better for the giver, open giving may often be conducive to more good for the Community in general.
Again, the particle من (many) in the clause, "many of your sins" may, according to Arabic idiom, either be redundant and used merely for the sake of emphasis, or used in the sense of "many" or "some"; or it denotes ابتداءالغایة i.e. the commencement of the limit. Following these different senses and also keeping in view the different meanings of the word یکفر (will remove), the clause ویکفر عنکم من سیآتکم may be rendered in four different ways: (1) He (God) will certainly remove from you your sins. (2) He will remove from you many or some of your sins. (3) He will expiate many or some of your sins for you. (4) He will certainly obliterate, or efface from you, your sins.
In the first and the fourth rendering, the particle من has been treated as redundant, used for the sake of emphasis only, and therefore it has been omitted in the translation and the word "certainly" has been added. But if we take the word من in the sense of "many" or "some", the meaning of the sentence will be as given in the second and the third rendering.
In the case of the second rendering, the idea is that if we practise charity, those of our sins which are committed against the rights of God will be pardoned, but not those which are committed against the rights of men for which other acts of virtue have been recommended. In the case of the third rendering, the idea is that on the basis of charity practised in accordance with the injunctions of the Quran, God will so arrange that sins committed by the giver of charity, against the rights of men, will be pardoned by the very men who are sinned against.
But as it is possible that even after a man has been pardoned, his sins may continue to rankle in his own mind, so God has promised to show a further favour to those who practise charity according to the teachings of Islam. This promise is implied in the word یکفر (efface and obliterate) which is intended to hint that God will make them forget their sins and thus obliterate and efface from their minds all traces of the sins committed by them. This idea has been expressed in the last rendering. Thus a single small sentence has been so worded as to cover all the possible forms of forgiveness, from its lowest phase to its highest manifestation.
a
4:32, 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
d
9:60, 103, 104.
1
نِعِمَّا ھِیَ اصل میں نِعْمَ مَا ھِیَ ہے۔ یعنی یہ بہت اچھی بات ہے۔ یہ مخصوص بالمدح کہلاتا ہے اور اس کا حل نِعْمَ الشَّیْئُ شَیْئًا ہے (املاء ابوالبقاء) جیسے اردو میں کہتے ہیں کہ بس کام تو یہ ہے۔
2
مِنْ سَیِّاٰ تِکُمْ کے معنے یہ بھی ہیں کہ بدیوں سے بعض کو اس کے سبب سے چھپا دے گا‘ مٹا دے گا۔ اور مِنْ زائد بغرضِ تاکید بھی ہو سکتا ہے اس صورت میں یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ تمہاری بدیاں بالکل مٹا دے گا۔ اخفش نے اس جگہ یہی معنے کیے ہیں (املاء ابوالبقاء)
b
9:60, 103, 104.
c
4:32; 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
278
Important Words:
یکفر (will remove) is derived from کفر (kaffara) which again is derived from کفر (kafara) for which see 2:7. They say کفر عنه سیئته i.e. (1) He (God) covered or removed, or did away with his sin; (2) He expiated his sin; (3) He effaced or obliterated his sin (Lane).
Commentary:
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, i.e. open and secret. By giving alms openly, a man sets a good example to others and many begin to imitate him. Secret alms-giving is in many cases better, because in this way one refrains from exposing the poverty of his brethren and there is also little occasion for pride in secret giving. It should be noted that the word خیر (better) occurring in the verse is qualified by the words "for You", while the word نعما (well and good) is not so qualified, which points to the fact that whereas secret giving to the poor is better for the giver, open giving may often be conducive to more good for the Community in general.
Again, the particle من (many) in the clause, "many of your sins" may, according to Arabic idiom, either be redundant and used merely for the sake of emphasis, or used in the sense of "many" or "some"; or it denotes ابتداءالغایة i.e. the commencement of the limit. Following these different senses and also keeping in view the different meanings of the word یکفر (will remove), the clause ویکفر عنکم من سیآتکم may be rendered in four different ways: (1) He (God) will certainly remove from you your sins. (2) He will remove from you many or some of your sins. (3) He will expiate many or some of your sins for you. (4) He will certainly obliterate, or efface from you, your sins.
In the first and the fourth rendering, the particle من has been treated as redundant, used for the sake of emphasis only, and therefore it has been omitted in the translation and the word "certainly" has been added. But if we take the word من in the sense of "many" or "some", the meaning of the sentence will be as given in the second and the third rendering.
In the case of the second rendering, the idea is that if we practise charity, those of our sins which are committed against the rights of God will be pardoned, but not those which are committed against the rights of men for which other acts of virtue have been recommended. In the case of the third rendering, the idea is that on the basis of charity practised in accordance with the injunctions of the Quran, God will so arrange that sins committed by the giver of charity, against the rights of men, will be pardoned by the very men who are sinned against.
But as it is possible that even after a man has been pardoned, his sins may continue to rankle in his own mind, so God has promised to show a further favour to those who practise charity according to the teachings of Islam. This promise is implied in the word یکفر (efface and obliterate) which is intended to hint that God will make them forget their sins and thus obliterate and efface from their minds all traces of the sins committed by them. This idea has been expressed in the last rendering. Thus a single small sentence has been so worded as to cover all the possible forms of forgiveness, from its lowest phase to its highest manifestation.
a
4:32, 8:30; 29:8; 64:10; 66:9.
c
9:60, 103, 104.
342
Islam has most wisely recommended both forms of giving alms, open and secret. By giving alms openly a man sets a good example to others which they may imitate. Secret almsgiving in some cases is better, because then one refrains from exposing the poverty of his less fortunate brethren, and there is also little occasion for feeling proud in giving secretly.
343
The particle min either may have been used for the sake of emphasis, or in the sense of "many" or "some."
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَذَرُوا۟ مَا بَقِىَ مِنَ ٱلرِّبَوٰٓا۟ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
Commentary:
The verse hints that the taking of interest is against God-fearingness. The Creator loves goodness and beneficence towards the poor and the needy, fair and equitable distribution of wealth among people, and peace among the nations of the world; but the system of interest strikes at the very root of these blessings. The closing words of the verse hint that the taking of interest is also against true belief.
285
Commentary:
The verse hints that the taking of interest is against God-fearingness. The Creator loves goodness and beneficence towards the poor and the needy, fair and equitable distribution of wealth among people, and peace among the nations of the world; but the system of interest strikes at the very root of these blessings. The closing words of the verse hint that the taking of interest is also against true belief.
وَإِن كَانَ ذُو عُسْرَةٍ فَنَظِرَةٌ إِلَىٰ مَيْسَرَةٍ ۚ وَأَن تَصَدَّقُوا۟ خَيْرٌ لَّكُمْ ۖ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ
伊斯兰教竭力规劝贷款给人家, 但是贷款应当是无息而行善的。借款到期要还债时, 如果借债人觉得自己处境穷困, 要给他一段暂缓的时间, 直到他觉得自己较宽裕时才归还。
کَانَ دو قسم کا ہوتا ہے۔ تامہ بھی اور ناقصہ بھی۔ ناقصہ تو اسم اور خبر پر آتا ہے جیسے کَانَ الْبُسْتَانُ مُثْمِرًا باغ میں پھل لگے ہوئے ہیں اور تامہ وہ ہے جو مفرد فعل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور اس کے بعد کا اسم اس کا فاعل ہوتا ہے اس کے کئی معنے ہوتے ہیں مثلاً واقع ہوا‘ ثابت ہوا‘ موجود ہوا‘ حاضر ہوا۔ (اقرب) اس جگہ پر ’’حاضر ہوا‘‘ کے معنے ہیں اور کان تامہ ہے۔ مراد یہ ہے کہ اگر کوئی تنگ حال ہو کر کہے کہ میں تو یکدم قرض ادا نہیں کر سکتا تو خود راس المال کی وصولی میں بھی التوا کر دینا چاہیے۔
Islam urges the giving of loans but they should be beneficent loans, without interest. If the debtor finds himself in straitened circumstances when the time for the repayment of a loan arrives, he should be granted respite till he finds himself in easier circumstances.
Commentary:
The preceding verse enjoined the taking back of the original sums only. The present verse further exhorts the creditor to grant delay to a debtor in straitened circumstances.
Creditors are exhorted to deal kindly and beneficently with their brethren so that God may also (deal with them kindly. They should remember that if they have advanced loans to others, God has also advanced certain loans to them by conferring on them His numberless favours and bounties; and if they have a right to charge interest, God has also a right to make heavy demands from them, but He does not. And if He did, what would be the fate of man?
209
伊斯兰教竭力规劝贷款给人家, 但是贷款应当是无息而行善的。借款到期要还债时, 如果借债人觉得自己处境穷困, 要给他一段暂缓的时间, 直到他觉得自己较宽裕时才归还。
2
کَانَ دو قسم کا ہوتا ہے۔ تامہ بھی اور ناقصہ بھی۔ ناقصہ تو اسم اور خبر پر آتا ہے جیسے کَانَ الْبُسْتَانُ مُثْمِرًا باغ میں پھل لگے ہوئے ہیں اور تامہ وہ ہے جو مفرد فعل کے معنے دیتا ہے اور اس کے بعد کا اسم اس کا فاعل ہوتا ہے اس کے کئی معنے ہوتے ہیں مثلاً واقع ہوا‘ ثابت ہوا‘ موجود ہوا‘ حاضر ہوا۔ (اقرب) اس جگہ پر ’’حاضر ہوا‘‘ کے معنے ہیں اور کان تامہ ہے۔ مراد یہ ہے کہ اگر کوئی تنگ حال ہو کر کہے کہ میں تو یکدم قرض ادا نہیں کر سکتا تو خود راس المال کی وصولی میں بھی التوا کر دینا چاہیے۔
287
Commentary:
The preceding verse enjoined the taking back of the original sums only. The present verse further exhorts the creditor to grant delay to a debtor in straitened circumstances.
Creditors are exhorted to deal kindly and beneficently with their brethren so that God may also (deal with them kindly. They should remember that if they have advanced loans to others, God has also advanced certain loans to them by conferring on them His numberless favours and bounties; and if they have a right to charge interest, God has also a right to make heavy demands from them, but He does not. And if He did, what would be the fate of man?
353
Islam urges the giving of loans but they should be beneficent loans, without interest. If the debtor finds himself in straitened circumstances when the time for the repayment of a loan arrives, he should be granted respite till he finds himself in easier circumstances.
لَا يُكَلِّفُ ٱللَّهُ نَفْسًا إِلَّا وُسْعَهَا ۚ لَهَا مَا كَسَبَتْ وَعَلَيْهَا مَا ٱكْتَسَبَتْ ۗ رَبَّنَا لَا تُؤَاخِذْنَآ إِن نَّسِينَآ أَوْ أَخْطَأْنَا ۚ رَبَّنَا وَلَا تَحْمِلْ عَلَيْنَآ إِصْرًا كَمَا حَمَلْتَهُۥ عَلَى ٱلَّذِينَ مِن قَبْلِنَا ۚ رَبَّنَا وَلَا تُحَمِّلْنَا مَا لَا طَاقَةَ لَنَا بِهِۦ ۖ وَٱعْفُ عَنَّا وَٱغْفِرْ لَنَا وَٱرْحَمْنَآ ۚ أَنتَ مَوْلَىٰنَا فَٱنصُرْنَا عَلَى ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ
2:234.
3:148.
这一句有力驳斥了基督替世人赎罪而受难至死的教义。它体现了两个重要原则: (1) 安拉授予律令时, 对人类的能力和自然限制总是给以应有的关心的, (2) 道德上的纯洁并不一定要求完全没有一切种类的失误和缺点。期望人类所做的一切, 只是他们要诚意尽力争取做好事而避免罪恶的事。其他的可由永久仁慈的安拉来宽赦他们。因此, 不需要基督来替世人赎罪。
كَسَبَ (Kasaba) 这个字一般指做好事。اِكْتَسَبَ (Iktasaba) 一般指做恶事。两个字都出自相同词根, 而后者较着重地指行为一方。做好事的人, 即使他们是偶然或不是自觉地出力去做的, 将得到报答; 而做恶事的人, 只有在他们深思熟虑而有意识努力去犯这些罪行的, 才受到惩罚。
在一般情况下, نِسْيَان (Nisyan) 和 خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) 是不受惩罚的, 因为它们是无意的, 或缺少动机的; 而有意的或有动机的必须受到惩罚。但是, 这里这两个字的意思是 “忘记” 和 “错误”。如果加以应有的小心的话, 它们是可以避免的。
اِصْر (Isr) 的意思是: (1) 限制人们行动的一种负担; (2) 一种很重大的责任, 如果不能完成的话, 会使人受到应得的惩罚; (3) 一种罪恶或冒犯;以及 (4) 对罪恶行为的严厉惩罚。“ 求你使我们不致像前人一样担负重担!” 这句话, 并不意味着放在我们身上的负担要比前人身上的轻些。这句话的意思是, 求你保护我们不违背对你的许约, 这样可以使我们免于承担像前人所承担那样的背逆罪过。这是为保存和保护伊斯兰教以及保护穆斯林不会招致安拉不悦的一种集体的祈祷。
اَخَذَ : جب گناہ یا غلطی کے متعلق آئے تو اس کے معنے ہوتے ہیں عَاقَبَہٗ : اسے اس کے گناہ کی سزا دی (اقرب الموارد) یہاں پکڑنے کی بجائے سزا دینا ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
اِصْرٌ کے معنے عہد‘ اقرار‘ ثقل‘ بوجھ اور اَلذَّنْبُ یعنی گناہ کے ہیں (اقرب) نیز وہ کام جو انسان کو نیکی سے روک دیں اور محروم کر دیں۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں ہے وَ یَضَعُ عَنْھُمْ اِصْرَھُمْ (اعراف: ۱۵۸) نیز اِصْرٌ اس تاکیدی عہد کو بھی کہتے ہیں جو عہد شکن کو ثواب اور نیکیوں سے محروم کر دے (مفردات) اس آیت کا یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پہلے لوگوں پر زیادہ بوجھ تھا ہم پر کم ڈالیو۔ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ جس طرح ان پر احکام الٰہی کے توڑنے پر ذمہ داری ڈالی گئی تھی اور وہ ثواب کے کاموں سے محروم ہو گئے تھے اسی طرح ہم پر ذمہ داری نہ ڈالی جائے۔ یعنی ہم عہد شکن ہو کر ثواب کے کاموں سے م
حَمَّلَہٗ: جَعَلَہٗ یَحْمِلُہٗ۔ اس سے بوجھ اٹھوایا (اقرب) اس سے مراد بھی عذاب ہے‘ یعنی ایسا عذاب ہم پر نہ آئے کہ ہم کچلے جائیں اور پھر اٹھنے کی طاقت نہ رہے۔ چنانچہ اس سے آگے ’’درگذر کر‘‘ کے الفاظ اس مفہوم کو واضح کر دیتے ہیں۔
قَوْمٌ کے معنے لوگوں کی ایک جماعت کے ہوتے ہیں۔ رشتہ داروں اور قریبیوں کے لئے بھی یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے (اقرب) پس قوم کے معنے لازما ً قوم کے نہیں ہوتے بلکہ ہر اس گروہ پر یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے جو ایک مقصد پر جمع ہوں۔ چونکہ کفار مسلمانوں کے خلاف جمع تھے اس لئے وہ ایک قوم کہلانے کے مستحق تھے۔ قَوْم کے معنے دشمنوں کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) ان معنوں کی رو سے آیت کے یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ کافر دشمنوں کے خلاف ہماری مدد کر۔ یہ معنے زیادہ لطیف ہیں لیکن چونکہ عام طور پر لوگ ان معنوں سے واقف نہیں۔ میں نے ترجمہ مشہور معنوں کی رو سے کر دیا ہے تا طبائع پر گراں نہ گذرے۔
3:148.
See 2:234.
The clause constitutes a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for man’s capacities and his natural limitations. (2) That moral purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive for good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no Atonement is needed.
The word Kasaba generally denotes the doing of good deeds and Iktasaba the doing of evil deeds. Both words are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion on the part of the doer. A man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without conscious effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with conscious effort.
In ordinary circumstances, Nisyan and Khati’ah are not punishable for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for awarding punishment. But here the words denote forgetfulness and error which can be avoided if due care is taken.
Isr means, (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a heavy responsibility the breaking of which renders one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin. The expression 'lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us,' does not mean that the burden to be laid upon us should be lighter than that which was laid upon those before us. The meaning is that we may be safeguarded against breaking Thy covenant and thus may be saved from incurring a heavy responsibility for disobedience as was incurred by those before us. This is a collective prayer for the preservation and protection of Islam and the safeguarding of Muslims against incurring the displeasure of God.
See 2:234.
3:148.
Important Words:
اصرا (responsibility). They say اصرالشیء i.e. he broke the thing. اصرہ means, be confined or detained or debarred him; he held him in custody or he restrained him. اصرالخیمة means, he provided the tent with a peg or a rope for tying. اصر (isr.) or اصر (asr) or اصر (usr) means: (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a burdensome covenant or a heavy responsibility the breaking of which makes one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin, or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The clause, Allah burdens not any soul beyond its capacity, is a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for human capacities and weaknesses. (2) That purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive after good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no atonement is needed.
The word کسب (earns) has been used here with regard to the doing of good deeds and اکتسب (incurs) for the doing of evil deeds. They are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion. Thus the words hint that a man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without concentrated effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with concentrated effort.
In ordinary circumstances, نسیان (forgetfulness) and خطاء (error) are not punishable, for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for punishment. But here the words denote a forgetfulness and an error which might have been avoided, if due care had been exercised.
As explained under Important Words above, the word اصر (responsibility) has several connot-ations, all of which are applicable here. Hence, the verse may also be translated as (a) Impose not on us a sin, i.e. enable us to avoid sin and prevent us from the doing of deeds which might make us stumble; (b) Do not punish us if we commit some sin or break some covenant; (c) Taking the expression لاتحمل علینا to mean, as it literally does, do not make it ride us or do not mount it on us, the clause may also be rendered as, do not make a responsibility or a covenant mount on us as Thou didst mount it on those before us. The simile is beautiful. divine covenants are meant to help the people in their onward march; but sometimes, through abuse or breach, they become a burden, instead of a help, thus turning into a rider in place of a riding beast. Muslims are taught to pray against such an eventuality.
The words, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us, do not mean that Muslims have been taught to wish for lighter burdens. The facts of history belie that inference. The words only mean that God may help Muslims to fulfil their responsibilities and to avoid sins as well as the consequences thereof. The previous peoples were entrusted with some responsibilities and given certain commandments which were all for their own good, but many of them failed to fulfil them and also rejected Islam to which they had been invited and thus turned a blissful guidance into a veritable means of incurring God’s displeasure. Thus, they were virtually laid under an isr or a burdensome responsibility. Muslims, being the bearers of the final and universal Shari‘ah, have been exhorted to set a better example and pray to God for success in their great task and in the fulfilment of their heavy responsibilities. The laying of burden or burdensome responsibility has been attributed to God just as in the Quranic idiom ضلالة (misguidance) is sometimes attributed to Him for which see 2:7.
The clause, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay on those before us, may also refer to Christians particularly who, by declaring the Law to be a curse, converted a divine mercy into an isr, i.e. a burden and a punishment. Muslims are thus taught to pray that for them the Shari‘ah may always remain a mercy. In this case the verse comes as a fitting preamble to the succeeding Surah of which Christianity forms the special theme.
The clause, and efface our sins and grant us Forgiveness and have Mercy on us, comprises three important invocations placed in perfect order. They not only correspond to the preceding three prayers but also constitute a perfect manifestation of a perfect treatment on the part of a perfect Master. فاعف عنا means that God may efface our sins and leave out no trace of them to be seen by men. اغفرلنا means that He may not only efface our sins but also grant us forgiveness so that He Himself may treat them as non-existent. And ارحمنا means that God may not only efface our sins and forgive us but also show positive mercy to us.
The concluding clause, help us Thou against the disbelieving people, provides a fitting ending to the Surah. The Muslims are out for a great struggle. The entire world of کفر (disbelief) is arrayed against them and the field of work, as hinted in Abraham’s prayer (2:130), is wide and far-stretched, extending over (1) heavenly signs, (2) laws and covenants, (3) wisdom and philosophy, (4) morals and spirituality, and (5) general progress. This was a stupendous task and unless God came to their help, there was little hope for that tiny Muslim community that was just emerging into existence. But God did come to their help.
a
2:234.
b
3:148.
217
这一句有力驳斥了基督替世人赎罪而受难至死的教义。它体现了两个重要原则: (1) 安拉授予律令时, 对人类的能力和自然限制总是给以应有的关心的, (2) 道德上的纯洁并不一定要求完全没有一切种类的失误和缺点。期望人类所做的一切, 只是他们要诚意尽力争取做好事而避免罪恶的事。其他的可由永久仁慈的安拉来宽赦他们。因此, 不需要基督来替世人赎罪。
218
كَسَبَ (Kasaba) 这个字一般指做好事。اِكْتَسَبَ (Iktasaba) 一般指做恶事。两个字都出自相同词根, 而后者较着重地指行为一方。做好事的人, 即使他们是偶然或不是自觉地出力去做的, 将得到报答; 而做恶事的人, 只有在他们深思熟虑而有意识努力去犯这些罪行的, 才受到惩罚。
219
在一般情况下, نِسْيَان (Nisyan) 和 خَطِيْئَة (Khati’ah) 是不受惩罚的, 因为它们是无意的, 或缺少动机的; 而有意的或有动机的必须受到惩罚。但是, 这里这两个字的意思是 “忘记” 和 “错误”。如果加以应有的小心的话, 它们是可以避免的。
220
اِصْر (Isr) 的意思是: (1) 限制人们行动的一种负担; (2) 一种很重大的责任, 如果不能完成的话, 会使人受到应得的惩罚; (3) 一种罪恶或冒犯;以及 (4) 对罪恶行为的严厉惩罚。“ 求你使我们不致像前人一样担负重担!” 这句话, 并不意味着放在我们身上的负担要比前人身上的轻些。这句话的意思是, 求你保护我们不违背对你的许约, 这样可以使我们免于承担像前人所承担那样的背逆罪过。这是为保存和保护伊斯兰教以及保护穆斯林不会招致安拉不悦的一种集体的祈祷。
1
اَخَذَ : جب گناہ یا غلطی کے متعلق آئے تو اس کے معنے ہوتے ہیں عَاقَبَہٗ : اسے اس کے گناہ کی سزا دی (اقرب الموارد) یہاں پکڑنے کی بجائے سزا دینا ترجمہ کیا گیا ہے۔
2
اِصْرٌ کے معنے عہد‘ اقرار‘ ثقل‘ بوجھ اور اَلذَّنْبُ یعنی گناہ کے ہیں (اقرب) نیز وہ کام جو انسان کو نیکی سے روک دیں اور محروم کر دیں۔ جیسے قرآن کریم میں ہے وَ یَضَعُ عَنْھُمْ اِصْرَھُمْ (اعراف: ۱۵۸) نیز اِصْرٌ اس تاکیدی عہد کو بھی کہتے ہیں جو عہد شکن کو ثواب اور نیکیوں سے محروم کر دے (مفردات) اس آیت کا یہ مطلب نہیں کہ پہلے لوگوں پر زیادہ بوجھ تھا ہم پر کم ڈالیو۔ بلکہ مراد یہ ہے کہ جس طرح ان پر احکام الٰہی کے توڑنے پر ذمہ داری ڈالی گئی تھی اور وہ ثواب کے کاموں سے محروم ہو گئے تھے اسی طرح ہم پر ذمہ داری نہ ڈالی جائے۔ یعنی ہم عہد شکن ہو کر ثواب کے کاموں سے م
3
حَمَّلَہٗ: جَعَلَہٗ یَحْمِلُہٗ۔ اس سے بوجھ اٹھوایا (اقرب) اس سے مراد بھی عذاب ہے‘ یعنی ایسا عذاب ہم پر نہ آئے کہ ہم کچلے جائیں اور پھر اٹھنے کی طاقت نہ رہے۔ چنانچہ اس سے آگے ’’درگذر کر‘‘ کے الفاظ اس مفہوم کو واضح کر دیتے ہیں۔
4
قَوْمٌ کے معنے لوگوں کی ایک جماعت کے ہوتے ہیں۔ رشتہ داروں اور قریبیوں کے لئے بھی یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے (اقرب) پس قوم کے معنے لازما ً قوم کے نہیں ہوتے بلکہ ہر اس گروہ پر یہ لفظ بولا جاتا ہے جو ایک مقصد پر جمع ہوں۔ چونکہ کفار مسلمانوں کے خلاف جمع تھے اس لئے وہ ایک قوم کہلانے کے مستحق تھے۔ قَوْم کے معنے دشمنوں کے بھی ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) ان معنوں کی رو سے آیت کے یہ معنے ہوں گے کہ کافر دشمنوں کے خلاف ہماری مدد کر۔ یہ معنے زیادہ لطیف ہیں لیکن چونکہ عام طور پر لوگ ان معنوں سے واقف نہیں۔ میں نے ترجمہ مشہور معنوں کی رو سے کر دیا ہے تا طبائع پر گراں نہ گذرے۔
a
See 2:234.
b
3:148.
292A
Important Words:
اصرا (responsibility). They say اصرالشیء i.e. he broke the thing. اصرہ means, be confined or detained or debarred him; he held him in custody or he restrained him. اصرالخیمة means, he provided the tent with a peg or a rope for tying. اصر (isr.) or اصر (asr) or اصر (usr) means: (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a burdensome covenant or a heavy responsibility the breaking of which makes one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin, or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin (Aqrab & Lane).
Commentary:
The clause, Allah burdens not any soul beyond its capacity, is a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for human capacities and weaknesses. (2) That purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive after good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no atonement is needed.
The word کسب (earns) has been used here with regard to the doing of good deeds and اکتسب (incurs) for the doing of evil deeds. They are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion. Thus the words hint that a man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without concentrated effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with concentrated effort.
In ordinary circumstances, نسیان (forgetfulness) and خطاء (error) are not punishable, for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for punishment. But here the words denote a forgetfulness and an error which might have been avoided, if due care had been exercised.
As explained under Important Words above, the word اصر (responsibility) has several connot-ations, all of which are applicable here. Hence, the verse may also be translated as (a) Impose not on us a sin, i.e. enable us to avoid sin and prevent us from the doing of deeds which might make us stumble; (b) Do not punish us if we commit some sin or break some covenant; (c) Taking the expression لاتحمل علینا to mean, as it literally does, do not make it ride us or do not mount it on us, the clause may also be rendered as, do not make a responsibility or a covenant mount on us as Thou didst mount it on those before us. The simile is beautiful. divine covenants are meant to help the people in their onward march; but sometimes, through abuse or breach, they become a burden, instead of a help, thus turning into a rider in place of a riding beast. Muslims are taught to pray against such an eventuality.
The words, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us, do not mean that Muslims have been taught to wish for lighter burdens. The facts of history belie that inference. The words only mean that God may help Muslims to fulfil their responsibilities and to avoid sins as well as the consequences thereof. The previous peoples were entrusted with some responsibilities and given certain commandments which were all for their own good, but many of them failed to fulfil them and also rejected Islam to which they had been invited and thus turned a blissful guidance into a veritable means of incurring God’s displeasure. Thus, they were virtually laid under an isr or a burdensome responsibility. Muslims, being the bearers of the final and universal Shari‘ah, have been exhorted to set a better example and pray to God for success in their great task and in the fulfilment of their heavy responsibilities. The laying of burden or burdensome responsibility has been attributed to God just as in the Quranic idiom ضلالة (misguidance) is sometimes attributed to Him for which see 2:7.
The clause, lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay on those before us, may also refer to Christians particularly who, by declaring the Law to be a curse, converted a divine mercy into an isr, i.e. a burden and a punishment. Muslims are thus taught to pray that for them the Shari‘ah may always remain a mercy. In this case the verse comes as a fitting preamble to the succeeding Surah of which Christianity forms the special theme.
The clause, and efface our sins and grant us Forgiveness and have Mercy on us, comprises three important invocations placed in perfect order. They not only correspond to the preceding three prayers but also constitute a perfect manifestation of a perfect treatment on the part of a perfect Master. فاعف عنا means that God may efface our sins and leave out no trace of them to be seen by men. اغفرلنا means that He may not only efface our sins but also grant us forgiveness so that He Himself may treat them as non-existent. And ارحمنا means that God may not only efface our sins and forgive us but also show positive mercy to us.
The concluding clause, help us Thou against the disbelieving people, provides a fitting ending to the Surah. The Muslims are out for a great struggle. The entire world of کفر (disbelief) is arrayed against them and the field of work, as hinted in Abraham’s prayer (2:130), is wide and far-stretched, extending over (1) heavenly signs, (2) laws and covenants, (3) wisdom and philosophy, (4) morals and spirituality, and (5) general progress. This was a stupendous task and unless God came to their help, there was little hope for that tiny Muslim community that was just emerging into existence. But God did come to their help.
a
3:148.
c
See 2:234.
359
The clause constitutes a powerful refutation of the doctrine of Atonement. It embodies two important principles: (1) That the commandments of God are always given with due regard for man’s capacities and his natural limitations. (2) That moral purification in this world does not necessarily signify complete freedom from all kinds of failings and shortcomings. All that man is expected to do is sincerely to strive for good and avoid sin to the best of his power, and the rest will be forgiven him by the Merciful God. So no Atonement is needed.
360
The word Kasaba generally denotes the doing of good deeds and Iktasaba the doing of evil deeds. Both words are from the same root but the latter denotes greater exertion on the part of the doer. A man will be rewarded for good deeds even if they are done casually and without conscious effort, while he will be punished for his evil deeds only if they are committed deliberately and with conscious effort.
361
In ordinary circumstances, Nisyan and Khati’ah are not punishable for they lack intention or motive which are necessary for awarding punishment. But here the words denote forgetfulness and error which can be avoided if due care is taken.
362
Isr means, (1) a burden which restrains one from motion; (2) a heavy responsibility the breaking of which renders one deserving of punishment; (3) a sin or an offence; and (4) grievous punishment of a sin. The expression 'lay not on us a responsibility as Thou didst lay upon those before us,' does not mean that the burden to be laid upon us should be lighter than that which was laid upon those before us. The meaning is that we may be safeguarded against breaking Thy covenant and thus may be saved from incurring a heavy responsibility for disobedience as was incurred by those before us. This is a collective prayer for the preservation and protection of Islam and the safeguarding of Muslims against incurring the displeasure of God.
قُلْ إِن تُخْفُوا۟ مَا فِى صُدُورِكُمْ أَوْ تُبْدُوهُ يَعْلَمْهُ ٱللَّهُ ۗ وَيَعْلَمُ مَا فِى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَمَا فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرٌ
27:75; 28:70.
علم کلام میں اللہ تعالیٰ کے علم کو دو طرح کا ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔ ایک علم ازلی ہے جو کبھی نہیں بدلتا۔ اور ایک علم وقوعہ کا ہے یعنی جب کوئی بات واقع ہو جاتی ہے تو اسے یہ علم بھی ہو جاتا ہے کہ یہ بات ہو گئی ہے۔ اسی کی طرف اس آیت میں اشارہ ہے اور اس کا یہ مفہوم نہیں کہ پہلے اللہ تعالیٰ کو علم نہیں تھا لیکن بعد میں ان باتوں کا علم ہو گیا۔
27:75; 28:70.
27:75; 28:70.
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse are addressed to the enemies of Islam. They are warned that all their open or secret machinations against Islam shall come to naught, for the obvious reason that the Almighty and the All-Knowing God had promised to protect it.
a
27:75; 28:70.
1
علم کلام میں اللہ تعالیٰ کے علم کو دو طرح کا ظاہر کیا گیا ہے۔ ایک علم ازلی ہے جو کبھی نہیں بدلتا۔ اور ایک علم وقوعہ کا ہے یعنی جب کوئی بات واقع ہو جاتی ہے تو اسے یہ علم بھی ہو جاتا ہے کہ یہ بات ہو گئی ہے۔ اسی کی طرف اس آیت میں اشارہ ہے اور اس کا یہ مفہوم نہیں کہ پہلے اللہ تعالیٰ کو علم نہیں تھا لیکن بعد میں ان باتوں کا علم ہو گیا۔
a
27:75; 28:70.
320
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse are addressed to the enemies of Islam. They are warned that all their open or secret machinations against Islam shall come to naught, for the obvious reason that the Almighty and the All-Knowing God had promised to protect it.
b
27:75; 28:70.
قُلْ إِن كُنتُمْ تُحِبُّونَ ٱللَّهَ فَٱتَّبِعُونِى يُحْبِبْكُمُ ٱللَّهُ وَيَغْفِرْ لَكُمْ ذُنُوبَكُمْ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ غَفُورٌ رَّحِيمٌ
4:70.
4:70.
The verse emphatically declares that the goal to attain Divine love is now impossible of achievement except by following the Holy Prophet. It further removes the misunderstanding that may possibly arise from 2:63 that belief in the existence of God and in the Hereafter is alone sufficient for salvation.
4:70.
Commentary:
The verse is most important inasmuch as it pertains to the attainment of the love of God which is considered by Islam to be the highest goal of human life. It constitutes an open and unqualified challenge to mankind, particularly to Christians, who claim to be under the direct leadership of the "son of God", while they and the Jews both call themselves "the children of Allah and His beloved ones" (5:19). The verse emphatically declares that the goal pertaining to the attainment of Divine love is now impossible of achievement except by accepting Islam and following the Holy Prophet Muhammad. Those who seek to love God and attain to His nearness must follow the guidance of the Prophet of Islam, which will make them the beloved ones of God. This is the only door now left open for the attainment of Divine love; and as God loves only pure souls, such men as sincerely follow Islam and act upon its teachings will be purified by Him and have their faults forgiven them.
c
4:70.
b
4:70.
322
Commentary:
The verse is most important inasmuch as it pertains to the attainment of the love of God which is considered by Islam to be the highest goal of human life. It constitutes an open and unqualified challenge to mankind, particularly to Christians, who claim to be under the direct leadership of the "son of God", while they and the Jews both call themselves "the children of Allah and His beloved ones" (5:19). The verse emphatically declares that the goal pertaining to the attainment of Divine love is now impossible of achievement except by accepting Islam and following the Holy Prophet Muhammad. Those who seek to love God and attain to His nearness must follow the guidance of the Prophet of Islam, which will make them the beloved ones of God. This is the only door now left open for the attainment of Divine love; and as God loves only pure souls, such men as sincerely follow Islam and act upon its teachings will be purified by Him and have their faults forgiven them.
b
4:70.
398
The verse emphatically declares that the goal to attain Divine love is now impossible of achievement except by following the Holy Prophet. It further removes the misunderstanding that may possibly arise from 2:63 that belief in the existence of God and in the Hereafter is alone sufficient for salvation.
وَرَسُولًا إِلَىٰ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ أَنِّى قَدْ جِئْتُكُم بِـَٔايَةٍ مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ ۖ أَنِّىٓ أَخْلُقُ لَكُم مِّنَ ٱلطِّينِ كَهَيْـَٔةِ ٱلطَّيْرِ فَأَنفُخُ فِيهِ فَيَكُونُ طَيْرًۢا بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَأُبْرِئُ ٱلْأَكْمَهَ وَٱلْأَبْرَصَ وَأُحْىِ ٱلْمَوْتَىٰ بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ ۖ وَأُنَبِّئُكُم بِمَا تَأْكُلُونَ وَمَا تَدَّخِرُونَ فِى بُيُوتِكُمْ ۚ إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَةً لَّكُمْ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
43:60; 61:7.
5:111.
“以色列人的使者” 这一句说明: 伊撒的使命的范围限于以色列人之家。他不是全世界的使者 «马太福音» 10:5-6; 15:24; 19:28。«使徒行传» 3:25, 26; 13:46。«路加福音» 19:10; 22:28-30。
طَیْر (Tair) 意指鸟。这词隐喻翱翔在精神境界中的心灵高尚的人, 正像 اَسَدْ (Asad) (字面意义为狮子) 比喻勇敢的人; دَابَّة (Dabbah) 比喻无价值的人--------人类的寄生虫 (34:15)。
خَلَقَ (Khalaqa) 的意思是: 他测量、设计、形成或计划; 安拉创造、产生以前从未存在过的物和人, 也就是说, 安拉是一切的创始者 (Lane和 لِسَانْ--------Lisan)。
هَيْئَة (Hai’ah) 意指形状; 型式; 外表; 状况; 样式或品质 (Lane)。
طِيْن (Tin) 意指泥土; 土壤; 坯模等。从比喻的意义上来说, اَلطِّيْن (At-Tin) 可以指那种具有温顺性格的人, 他们像柔软的粘土, 适於塑造成良好的类型。
أُبْرِئُ (’Ubri’u) 是原自 بَرِئَ (Bari’a), 意指他从某事中解脱出来。因此这词意味着: 我治愈疾病; 我宣布某人没有缺陷 (Lane)。
اَكْمَه (Akmah) 意指: 晚间看不见东西的人; 生来就瞎的人; 以后成为瞎子的人; 失去理性和智力的人 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。
«圣经»中没有提到为大家所公认的伊撒 (耶稣) 创造鸟这一奇迹。如果伊撒确实创造过鸟, «圣经» 就没有理由不提这事,尤其是因为创造鸟是一种奇迹, 任何-个安拉的使者以前都没有显示过类似的奇迹。提到这样的奇迹肯定会证实伊撒比所有其他先知优越, 并且会证实其以后的追随者强加他为上帝 (主) 的说法。خَلْق (Khalq) 有不同的意义: (1) 测量; 确定; 设计, (2) 形成; 做和创造等, 此节经文中所用这个词的意思为前一个意义。作为 “创造” 这个词的意思来说, 在 «古兰经» 中Khalq的行为被认为不是属于任何其他人和物的, 而是属于安拉 (13:17; 16:21; 22:74; 25:4; 31:11, 12; 35:41和46:5)。按照上面的解释并且记住 “泥土” 这词的隐喻含义, “我为你们 (的好处) 将以 (具有泥土特性的人) 创造像飞鸟形状的创造物……成为高飞的人” 这一句整段的意思是: 如果出生卑贱、但具有天生的上进能力的普通人遇到他 (安拉) 并接受其启示, 他们的一生中会经受彻底变化, 他们会从卑躬屈膝、追求实利, 关心尘世俗事不见其他东西的人变成翱翔在高尚精神穹苍中的飞鸟。这是确实发生过的事。出身卑微和受人藐视的加利利渔夫, 在高贵的训诫和他们的主人的榜样的影响下, 像鸟一样高飞, 向以色列人布讲福音。
至于医治盲人和麻疯病人, 从 «圣经» 中看来, 患有某些疾病 (麻疯, 等等) 的人们被以色列人看作是不洁净的人而不准他和其他人进行社交接触。“我宣告解放了; ”这句话的意思是, 害有这样一些病痛的人在失去了合法或社会上的种种能力和优点的情况下工作, 这些限制由伊撒去除了。或者, 伊撒过去经常给患有这些病痛的人医治。安拉派遣的先知是精神上的医生: 他们给精神上丧失视力的人们以眼睛, 给精神上的聋子以听觉, 以及恢复在精神上已死亡的人的生命 (马太福音13:15)。在这种情况下, اَكْمَه (Akmah) 这一单词可以意味着这样一种人, 他有信仰的光明, 但由于缺乏决心而经不起考验。他在白天看得见东西, 也就是说, 只要没有考验而且信仰的阳光照耀着晴空时他看得见东西, 但是夜晚来临时, 也就是说, 出现考验而不得不作出牺牲时, 他就丧失了精神上的视力而站着不动了 (参阅2:21)。同样的, اَبْرَص, Abras (麻疯) 这一单词从精神方面的意义讲, 可以意味着一个在信仰方面不完全的人, 在他身上各块健康的皮肤之间有一块块病肤。
“我将使死者复活” 这一句, 并不是说伊撒真能使死人复活。在这个世界上真正死了的人是从来也不会复活的。«古兰经» 全部教义都是绝对反对这样的一种信念的 (2:29; 23:100, 101; 21:96; 39:59, 60; 40:12; 45:27)。安拉派遣的使者给信奉他们的人的生活中带来的道德上奇迹般的改造, 以宗教的专用语来说, 称为 “使死者复生”。
整个句子的意思可以是: 伊撒告诉他的弟子应该吃些什么, 也就是他们必须使用什么来满足身体需要, 以及应该贮存什么, 也就是说贮存什么做为天国的精神财富。换句话说, 他告诉他们应该用正当合法的手段获取他们的报酬, 并且应该把他们的储蓄用于安拉的道上, 不要顾虑明天, 听它由安拉安排。(马太福音6:25, 26)。
یعنی جس طرح پرندہ انڈے سی کر بچے نکالتا ہے میں بھی اسی طرح انسانوں میں سے روحانی قابلیت کے لوگوں کو اپنی تربیت میں لے کر ایک دن اس قابل بنا دیتا ہوں کہ وہ خداتعالیٰ کی طرف روحانی پرواز کرنے والے بن جاتے ہیں۔ یہ مرادنہیں کہ میں خدا بن جاؤں گا اور نہ یہ مراد ہے کہ زندہ پرندے پیدا کروں گا۔
یہود کو حکم تھا کہ اندھوں اور مبروص کو ناپاک سمجھیں (احبار باب۱۳ و باب۲۱) مسیحؑ سے اللہ تعالیٰ نے اس ظلم کا ازالہ کروایا۔ اسی کو اس جگہ بیان کیا گیا ہے۔ لوگوں نے غلطی سے یہ سمجھ لیا کہ مادر زاد اندھوں اور مبروص کو وہ اچھا کرتے تھے۔ حالانکہ مادر زاد کے الفاظ قرآن میں نہیں۔ اور موتیا بند کے مریضوں اور مبروصوں کو عام طور پر ڈاکٹر اور حکیم اچھا کرتے رہتے ہیں مگر بدقسمتی سے مسیحؑ کے متعلق جو آیتیں آتی ہیں مسلمان ان کے وہ معنے کرتے ہیں جن سے مسیحؑ کی خدائی ثابت ہو۔
یعنی تم کو ان نیک کاموں کی خبر دوں گا جن کے کرنے سے انسان اللہ تعالیٰ کا مقرب ہو جاتا ہے۔
43:60; 61:7.
5:111.
The words "a Messenger to the Children of Israel" show that the mission of Jesus was confined to the House of Israel. He was not a World- Messenger (Matt. 10: 5, 6; 15: 24; 19: 28. Acts, 3: 25, 26; 13: 46. Luke, 19: 10; 22: 28-30).
Khalaqa means, he measured, designed, fashioned or planned; God produced or created or brought into existence a thing or being without there being any previously existing pattern or model or similitude, i.e. he originated it (Lane & Lisan).
Tin means, clay; earth; mould; etc. Figuratively, at-Tin may signify such persons as possess docile natures suitable for being moulded into any good shape like pliable clay.
Hai’ah means, form; fashion; garb; state; manner; mode or quality (Lane).
Tair means, a bird. Metaphorically the word signifies a highly spiritual man who soars high into spiritual regions as Asad (literally a lion) is used for a brave man and Dabbah for a worthless person, a worm of the earth (34:15).
’Ubri’u is derived from Bari’a which means, he was or became clear or free from a thing and signifies, I heal; I declare a person free from the defect attributed to him (Lane).
Akmah means, one who cannot see at night; one born blind; one who becomes blind afterward; one deprived of reason and understanding (Mufradat).
There is no mention in the Bible of the miracle which is popularly believed to have been performed by Jesus that he created birds. If Jesus had really created birds, there is no reason why the Bible should have omitted to mention this, particularly when the creating of birds was a miracle the like of which had never been shown before by any Messenger of God. The mention of such a miracle would certainly have established his great superiority over all other Prophets and would have lent some support to the claim to Divinity which has been foisted upon him by his later followers. Of the different meanings of Khalq—(1) measuring; determining; designing, (2) fashioning; making and creating, etc. it is in the former sense that this word has been used in this verse. In the sense of "creating," the act of Khalq has not been attributed in the Qur’an to any other being or thing except God (13:17; 16:21; 22:74; 25:4; 31:11, 12; 35:41 & 46:5). In the light of the above explanation, and keeping in
The entire clause may mean that Jesus told his disciples what they should eat, i.e. what they should spend to meet their physical needs, and what they should store up i.e. what they should lay up as spiritual treasure in Heaven. In other words he told them that their earnings should be honestly and lawfully acquired and that they should spend their savings in the way of God, having no thought for the morrow which should be left to God (Matt. 6: 25, 26).
43:60; 61:7.
5:111.
Important Words:
اخلق (I fashion out) is derived from خلق. They say خلقه meaning: (1) he measured it, or he determined its measure or proportion (e.g. they say خلق الادیم meaning, he determined the leather with a view to cutting it); (2) he designed or fashioned or planned it; (3) he made it according to a certain measure or design; (4) He (God) produced or created or brought into existence a thing or being without there being any previously existing pattern or model or similitude, i.e.He originated it; (5) he forged or fabricated a story or a lie; (6) he made a thing smooth, even and equable (Lane & Lisan).
الطین (clay) is derived from طان i.e. he made his work or deed good; he performed or executed his work or deed well. طانه الله علی الخیر means, God created him with a disposition or adaptation to that which is good, i.e. created him with a good natural disposition. طانه means, he coated or plastered it with clay or mud. طین means, clay, earth, mould, soil or mud. طینةmeans, any material sub-stance of which anything having form consists; the natural constitution or disposition of a thing. The term ابن الطین is sometimes used to signify Adam (Lane). Figuratively الطین may signify such persons as possess docile natures suitable for being moulded into any good shape like pliable clay.
الطیر (bird) which is the plural of طائر (a bird) and is also sometimes used as singular is derived from طار i.e. (1) he or it flew or moved in the air by means of wings; (2) he or it ran or moved quickly or fled. طار عقله means, his reason fled. طارت الابل means, the she-camel conceived. طار لکل منھم سھمه means, the share of each came to him. الطیر or طیر is both the plural of طائر (bird) and the noun infinitive from the verb طار. So طیر means: (1) flying birds, insects, etc.; (2) a flying bird, insect, etc., for طیر is sometimes also used as singular; (3) as an infinitive noun طیر would also give the different meanings conveyed by its verbal forms (Lane).
ھیئة (manner) is the noun infinitive from ھاء. They say ھاء الرجل meaning, the man was or became of good form and appearance or other properties denoted by ھیئة, the noun infinitive. ھاء الیه means, he desired or longed to see or find him or it. ھیأه means, he gave him or he made him have a garb or guise, etc.; he prepared or arranged it and put it in a good state. تھیأ لامر means, he became prepared for the thing, or the matter. ھیئة means, form, fashion, appearance or figure; guise or garb; state, condition or case; manner, mode or quality (Aqrab & Lane).
ابری (I heal) is derived from بری i.e. he was or became clear or free from a thing. بری من المرض means, he became free from disease, i.e. he recovered from it. بری من الدین means, he became clear of debt. ابرأه means, he cured or healed him of the disease; he declared him innocent or free from the defect attributed to him; he acquitted him (Aqrab & Lane).
الاکمه (blind) is derived from کمه i.e. he became blind; or his eyes did not see at night. کمه فلان also means, he was or became deprived of reason or understanding. کمه النھار means, the day became dark, i.e. the sun became overcast with clouds. اکمه means, one who cannot see at night; one who is born blind; one who becomes blind afterwards; one who is deprived of reason and understanding (Aqrab & Mufradat).
ابرص (leprous) is derived from برص i.e. he was or became affected with برص (leprosy) viz. a sort of whiteness that appears upon parts of the body by reason of a corrupt state of health or constitution. The moon is sometimes called الابرص because of its white hue. ارض برصاء means, a land of which the herbage has become depastured at several places so that it has become bare thereof (Aqrab & Lane). A variety of leprosy of the Hebrews (probably identical with modern leprosy) was characterized by the presence of smooth, shining, depressed white patches or scales, the hair on which participated in the whiteness, while the skin and adjacent flesh became insensible (Webster).
تاکلون (you will eat) is derived from اکل i.e. he ate; he ate up; he devoured; he consumed; he wore away, etc. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, امرت بقریة تاکل القری i.e. I have been commanded to migrate to a town (Medina) which shall devour, (i.e. subdue and conquer) other towns (Lane).
Commentary:
With this verse begins an account of Jesus’ ministry as a Prophet of God. By using the words, a Messenger to the Children of Israel, the verse makes it clear that Jesus’ mission was confined to the House of Israel. He was not a universal Messenger. In fact, as the Gospel itself states, he expressly ordered his disciples not to preach his message to any but the Israelites: "These twelve Jesus sent forth, and commanded them, saying, 'Go not into the way of the Gentiles, and into any city of the Samaritans enter ye not: but go rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel' " (Matt. 10:5, 6). It cannot be argued that this prohibition was confined to the lifetime of Jesus and that after his death his disciples were at liberty to preach to all the nations of the world, for this supposition is belied by the Gospel itself: "But when they persecute you in this city, flee ye into another: for verily I say unto you, Ye shall not have gone over the cities of Israel, till the son of man be come" (Matt. 10:23). According to this verse, the followers of Jesus were enjoined to confine their preaching to the Children of Israel till the time of his second coming. The same injunction is contained in Matt. 15: 24; 18: 11, 12; 19: 28; Acts 3: 25, 26; 13: 46; Luke 19: 10; 15: 4; 22: 28-30.
Only in Matt. 28:19 there appears some ambiguity about the mission of Jesus but on deeper reflection it becomes clear that here too it is the tribes of Israel that are meant, and not all peoples and all nations. The early disciples understood these words of Jesus in this very sense: "Now they which were scattered abroad upon the persecution that arose about Stephen travelled as far as Phenice, and Cyprus, and Antioch, preaching the word to none but unto the Jews only" (Acts 11: 19).
For a clear understanding of the other parts of the present verse, i.e. making birds of clay, etc. it is necessary to remember that it was Jesus’ habit to talk in parables—a way of talking which was predicted in the previous Scriptures to be a characteristic of his speech. Says the Gospel: "All these things spake Jesus unto the multitudes in parables; and without a parable spake he not unto them: that it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the prophet, saying, I will open my mouth in parables" (Matt. 13:34, 35). Later historians also have referred to this peculiar characteristic of Jesus: "In his popular addresses Jesus would make free use of parables. He spoke in parables to all classes but especially to the people. Without parables he was not wont to speak to them" (Enc. Bib. under Jesus). With this torchlight of history in our hands, it does not remain difficult for us to understand or explain the "signs" of Jesus as mentioned in the present verse.
There is no mention in the Bible of the miracle of creating birds popularly believed to have been performed by Jesus. If Jesus had really created birds, there is no reason why the Bible should have omitted to mention it, particularly when the creation of birds was a miracle the like of which had never been shown before by any Messenger of God. The mention of such a miracle would certainly have established his superiority over other Prophets and would have lent some support to the claim to divinity which has been foisted upon him by his later followers. Of the different meanings of خلق i.e. measuring, determining, designing or fashioning; making and creating, etc. given under Important Words above, it is in the former sense that this word has been used in this verse. In the sense of "creating'', the act of khalq has not been attributed in the Quran to any other being or thing except God. In fact, the Quran has laid the greatest emphasis on this exclusive attribute of God Who has been again and again declared to be the sole "Creator" of all things. All others to whom creation has been attributed are declared by the Quran to have been themselves created by God and to be devoid of all power to create anything (e.g. see 13:17; 16:21; 22:74; 25:4; 31:11, 12; 35:41 and 46:5). Even the silly notion that the power of creating though the unshared prerogative of God, might have been temporarily delegated by Him to another is rejected by the Quran (39:30 & 16:72).
In the light of the above explanation, and keeping in view the figurative sense of "clay", for which see Important Words above, the clause, I will fashion out for you a creation out of clay after the manner of a bird, then I will breathe into it (a new spirit) and it will become a soaring being, would mean that if ordinary men of humble origin but possessing the inherent power of growth and development came into contact with Jesus and accepted his message they would undergo a complete transformation in their lives. From men grovelling in the dust and not seeing beyond their material cares and mundane concerns, they would become converted into birds soaring high into the lofty regions of the spiritual firmament. And this is exactly what happened. The humble and despised fishermen of Galilee, under the impact of the ennobling teaching of their Master, began soaring like birds, preaching to the world of Israel the word of God and bravely facing all sorts of hardships and privations and making sacrifices that should adorn the history of any nation. Says Jesus: "I say unto you, Take no thought for your life, what ye shall eat, and what ye shall drink; nor yet for your body, what ye shall put on. Is not the life more than meat, and the body than raiment? Behold the fowls of the air: for they sow not, neither do they reap, nor gather into barns; yet your heavenly Father feedeth them. Are ye not much better than they?" (Matt. 6:25, 26).
The miracle relating to the making of birds from clay may be interpreted in another way as well. In the time of Jesus people had a special liking for the practice of occult sciences —hypnotism, mesmerism, etc. So it is possible that God granted him special power of this kind in order to impress the people and make them believe in him. In this case the sign of making birds would mean that Jesus made small clay models of birds and then through a sort of mesmerism made them appear to fly in the air. But this did not convert them into real living birds; for as soon as the influence was removed, they fell down to the ground like so many lumps of earth. This miracle of Jesus was more or less like the miracle of the rod of Moses which was temporarily made to look like a real serpent but was actually not so. But whatever the significance of the sign, it was performed, as the verse clearly puts it, by the command of Allah, and Jesus possessed no power of creation. (For fuller description see Izalah’-e-Auham by Ahmad, the Promised Messiah).
As for healing the blind and the leprous, it appears from the Bible that persons suffering from certain diseases (leprosy, etc.) were considered unclean and were, therefore, not allowed to come in contact with other men. If, therefore, the word ابری be taken to mean, "I declare to be free", the clause would signify that the legal or social disabilities and disadvantages under which persons suffering from such maladies laboured were removed by Jesus. If, however, the word be interpreted as "I heal," then the clause would mean that Jesus used to heal persons suffering from these diseases. But as indicated above, Jesus used to speak in metaphors. So just as the "creation" spoken of is spiritual creation, the diseases mentioned are spiritual diseases. The Prophets of God are spiritual physicians; they give eyes to those that have lost spiritual sight, and they give hearing to those who are spiritually deaf, and they restore life to those who are spiritually dead (see also Matt. 13:15). In this case the word اکمه (blind or one who is blind at night) would stand for such person as possesses the light of faith but being weak, cannot stand trials. He sees in the daytime, i.e. so long as there are no trials and the sun of faith shines forth unclouded; but when the night comes on, i.e. when there are trials, and sacrifices have to be made, he loses his spiritual vision and stands still (cf. 2:21). Similarly, the word ابرص(leprous) would, in the spiritual sense, stand for one who is imperfect in faith, having patches of diseased skin among healthy ones. But even if these words be taken in their physical sense, Jesus is proved to possess no peculiar power. All Prophets heal diseases and ailments by the power of prayer. In this case, however, the word اکمه (blind) would be taken in the sense of one who cannot see at night or one whose sight is weak.
The clause, I will quicken the dead, does not mean that Jesus actually brought the dead to life. Those actually dead are never restored to life in this world. Such a belief is diametrically opposed to the whole Quranic teaching (23:100, 101; 21:96; 39:59, 60; 2:29; 40:12; 45:27). The sayings of the Holy Prophet are also clear on this point. For instance, it is related that when Jabir’s father, who was a Companion of the Holy Prophet, was killed in the Battle of Uhud and the lad was much grieved, the Holy Prophet consolingly told him that God had lovingly spoken to his father in the other world and had asked him to beg of Him anything he liked, for that would be given to him. Thereupon Jabir’s father said, "Grant me, my Lord, another lease of life on earth that I may again be killed in Thy way". God replied, "I would certainly have done so, but the word has gone forth from Me that the dead shall not be sent back to the earth" (Tirmidhi & Majah).
That the so-called dead who are reported to have been raised by Jesus were not actually dead is clear from the Gospels as well. The incident described in Matt. 9:23-25 sheds some light on it. As a matter of fact, Prophets are only sent to give life to those who are spiritually dead. Jesus, Moses, Abraham and, above all, the Holy Prophet of Islam brought about a complete change in the lives of their followers. This, in religious language, is termed raising the dead to life. Literally, too, the word موتی (the dead) does not necessarily mean those physically dead. It is also used about those who are dead spiritually, morally or intellectually. The Quran freely speaks of the quickening of the dead in the sense of granting life to the spiritually dead (e.g. 3:28; 6:123; 8:43; 25:50; 36:71). In 8:25 the Holy Prophet himself has been spoken of as giving life to the dead. Says the Quran: O ye who believe, respond to Allah and the Messenger when he calls you that he may give you life. Here it is spiritual and intellectual life that is meant, for Muslims do not believe that the Holy Prophet ever brought an actually dead person to life.
The miracles of Jesus, as mentioned in this verse, have been stated in a natural order. First of all is mentioned the change in the outlook and way of life of those that came in contact with him. From men of the world, they became men of God. They rose from the dust and began soaring in the air. Then are mentioned some of the more common spiritual diseases of which Jesus cured the people; the blind were given spiritual sight and those having diseased skins were healed. Finally, the spiritually dead are declared to have received through Jesus a new life. Thus not only a natural order but a sort of progressive order is found in the verse, the climax, so far as individual reformation is concerned, being reached with the miracle relating to the quickening of the dead. But if the verse be interpreted literally, no arrangement seems to exist in the order in which the miracles are described here, i.e. (1) the creation of birds out of clay; (2) the healing of the blind; (3) the healing of those suffering from leprosy, i.e. those who had patches of disease on their skin; and (4) the raising of the dead to life.
The true climax, however, reaches in the miracle or sign mentioned in the clause, I will announce to you what you will eat and what you will store up in your houses. According to Abul-Baqa’, the words نبأ (news) and انبأ (he gave the news) are used in the Quran for announcing matters of great importance (Kulliyyat). This shows that, what Jesus is here represented as announcing to the people, are matters of supreme im-portance to his followers. The language of the verse being parabolic, the word تاکلون (you will eat) will be taken figuratively, mean, "you will subdue or conquer" (see under Important Words above). Thus the clause, I will announce to you what you will eat, would mean, "I will let you know what you will subdue or conquer", i.e. "I will announce to you the conquests you are destined to make in future". The other expression, i.e. I will also let you know what you will store up in your houses, would mean, "I will let you know the deeds which you should or would leave behind for posterity".
The entire clause may have yet another meaning. It may mean that Jesus told his disciples: (1) what they should eat, i.e. what they should spend to meet their physical needs, and (2) what they should store up, i.e. what they should lay up as a spiritual treasure in Heaven. In other words, Jesus told them that their earnings should be honestly and lawfully acquired and that they should spend their savings in the way of God, having no thought for the morrow which should be left to God (see Matt. 6:25, 26 as quoted above).
e
43:60; 61:7.
f
5:111.
237
“以色列人的使者” 这一句说明: 伊撒的使命的范围限于以色列人之家。他不是全世界的使者 «马太福音» 10:5-6; 15:24; 19:28。«使徒行传» 3:25, 26; 13:46。«路加福音» 19:10; 22:28-30。
238
طَیْر (Tair) 意指鸟。这词隐喻翱翔在精神境界中的心灵高尚的人, 正像 اَسَدْ (Asad) (字面意义为狮子) 比喻勇敢的人; دَابَّة (Dabbah) 比喻无价值的人--------人类的寄生虫 (34:15)。
239
خَلَقَ (Khalaqa) 的意思是: 他测量、设计、形成或计划; 安拉创造、产生以前从未存在过的物和人, 也就是说, 安拉是一切的创始者 (Lane和 لِسَانْ--------Lisan)。
240
هَيْئَة (Hai’ah) 意指形状; 型式; 外表; 状况; 样式或品质 (Lane)。
241
طِيْن (Tin) 意指泥土; 土壤; 坯模等。从比喻的意义上来说, اَلطِّيْن (At-Tin) 可以指那种具有温顺性格的人, 他们像柔软的粘土, 适於塑造成良好的类型。
242
أُبْرِئُ (’Ubri’u) 是原自 بَرِئَ (Bari’a), 意指他从某事中解脱出来。因此这词意味着: 我治愈疾病; 我宣布某人没有缺陷 (Lane)。
243
اَكْمَه (Akmah) 意指: 晚间看不见东西的人; 生来就瞎的人; 以后成为瞎子的人; 失去理性和智力的人 (مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat)。
244
«圣经»中没有提到为大家所公认的伊撒 (耶稣) 创造鸟这一奇迹。如果伊撒确实创造过鸟, «圣经» 就没有理由不提这事,尤其是因为创造鸟是一种奇迹, 任何-个安拉的使者以前都没有显示过类似的奇迹。提到这样的奇迹肯定会证实伊撒比所有其他先知优越, 并且会证实其以后的追随者强加他为上帝 (主) 的说法。خَلْق (Khalq) 有不同的意义: (1) 测量; 确定; 设计, (2) 形成; 做和创造等, 此节经文中所用这个词的意思为前一个意义。作为 “创造” 这个词的意思来说, 在 «古兰经» 中Khalq的行为被认为不是属于任何其他人和物的, 而是属于安拉 (13:17; 16:21; 22:74; 25:4; 31:11, 12; 35:41和46:5)。按照上面的解释并且记住 “泥土” 这词的隐喻含义, “我为你们 (的好处) 将以 (具有泥土特性的人) 创造像飞鸟形状的创造物……成为高飞的人” 这一句整段的意思是: 如果出生卑贱、但具有天生的上进能力的普通人遇到他 (安拉) 并接受其启示, 他们的一生中会经受彻底变化, 他们会从卑躬屈膝、追求实利, 关心尘世俗事不见其他东西的人变成翱翔在高尚精神穹苍中的飞鸟。这是确实发生过的事。出身卑微和受人藐视的加利利渔夫, 在高贵的训诫和他们的主人的榜样的影响下, 像鸟一样高飞, 向以色列人布讲福音。
至于医治盲人和麻疯病人, 从 «圣经» 中看来, 患有某些疾病 (麻疯, 等等) 的人们被以色列人看作是不洁净的人而不准他和其他人进行社交接触。“我宣告解放了; ”这句话的意思是, 害有这样一些病痛的人在失去了合法或社会上的种种能力和优点的情况下工作, 这些限制由伊撒去除了。或者, 伊撒过去经常给患有这些病痛的人医治。安拉派遣的先知是精神上的医生: 他们给精神上丧失视力的人们以眼睛, 给精神上的聋子以听觉, 以及恢复在精神上已死亡的人的生命 (马太福音13:15)。在这种情况下, اَكْمَه (Akmah) 这一单词可以意味着这样一种人, 他有信仰的光明, 但由于缺乏决心而经不起考验。他在白天看得见东西, 也就是说, 只要没有考验而且信仰的阳光照耀着晴空时他看得见东西, 但是夜晚来临时, 也就是说, 出现考验而不得不作出牺牲时, 他就丧失了精神上的视力而站着不动了 (参阅2:21)。同样的, اَبْرَص, Abras (麻疯) 这一单词从精神方面的意义讲, 可以意味着一个在信仰方面不完全的人, 在他身上各块健康的皮肤之间有一块块病肤。
“我将使死者复活” 这一句, 并不是说伊撒真能使死人复活。在这个世界上真正死了的人是从来也不会复活的。«古兰经» 全部教义都是绝对反对这样的一种信念的 (2:29; 23:100, 101; 21:96; 39:59, 60; 40:12; 45:27)。安拉派遣的使者给信奉他们的人的生活中带来的道德上奇迹般的改造, 以宗教的专用语来说, 称为 “使死者复生”。
245
整个句子的意思可以是: 伊撒告诉他的弟子应该吃些什么, 也就是他们必须使用什么来满足身体需要, 以及应该贮存什么, 也就是说贮存什么做为天国的精神财富。换句话说, 他告诉他们应该用正当合法的手段获取他们的报酬, 并且应该把他们的储蓄用于安拉的道上, 不要顾虑明天, 听它由安拉安排。(马太福音6:25, 26)。
1
یعنی جس طرح پرندہ انڈے سی کر بچے نکالتا ہے میں بھی اسی طرح انسانوں میں سے روحانی قابلیت کے لوگوں کو اپنی تربیت میں لے کر ایک دن اس قابل بنا دیتا ہوں کہ وہ خداتعالیٰ کی طرف روحانی پرواز کرنے والے بن جاتے ہیں۔ یہ مرادنہیں کہ میں خدا بن جاؤں گا اور نہ یہ مراد ہے کہ زندہ پرندے پیدا کروں گا۔
2
یہود کو حکم تھا کہ اندھوں اور مبروص کو ناپاک سمجھیں (احبار باب۱۳ و باب۲۱) مسیحؑ سے اللہ تعالیٰ نے اس ظلم کا ازالہ کروایا۔ اسی کو اس جگہ بیان کیا گیا ہے۔ لوگوں نے غلطی سے یہ سمجھ لیا کہ مادر زاد اندھوں اور مبروص کو وہ اچھا کرتے تھے۔ حالانکہ مادر زاد کے الفاظ قرآن میں نہیں۔ اور موتیا بند کے مریضوں اور مبروصوں کو عام طور پر ڈاکٹر اور حکیم اچھا کرتے رہتے ہیں مگر بدقسمتی سے مسیحؑ کے متعلق جو آیتیں آتی ہیں مسلمان ان کے وہ معنے کرتے ہیں جن سے مسیحؑ کی خدائی ثابت ہو۔
3
یعنی تم کو ان نیک کاموں کی خبر دوں گا جن کے کرنے سے انسان اللہ تعالیٰ کا مقرب ہو جاتا ہے۔
b
43:60; 61:7.
c
5:111.
339
Important Words:
اخلق (I fashion out) is derived from خلق. They say خلقه meaning: (1) he measured it, or he determined its measure or proportion (e.g. they say خلق الادیم meaning, he determined the leather with a view to cutting it); (2) he designed or fashioned or planned it; (3) he made it according to a certain measure or design; (4) He (God) produced or created or brought into existence a thing or being without there being any previously existing pattern or model or similitude, i.e.He originated it; (5) he forged or fabricated a story or a lie; (6) he made a thing smooth, even and equable (Lane & Lisan).
الطین (clay) is derived from طان i.e. he made his work or deed good; he performed or executed his work or deed well. طانه الله علی الخیر means, God created him with a disposition or adaptation to that which is good, i.e. created him with a good natural disposition. طانه means, he coated or plastered it with clay or mud. طین means, clay, earth, mould, soil or mud. طینةmeans, any material sub-stance of which anything having form consists; the natural constitution or disposition of a thing. The term ابن الطین is sometimes used to signify Adam (Lane). Figuratively الطین may signify such persons as possess docile natures suitable for being moulded into any good shape like pliable clay.
الطیر (bird) which is the plural of طائر (a bird) and is also sometimes used as singular is derived from طار i.e. (1) he or it flew or moved in the air by means of wings; (2) he or it ran or moved quickly or fled. طار عقله means, his reason fled. طارت الابل means, the she-camel conceived. طار لکل منھم سھمه means, the share of each came to him. الطیر or طیر is both the plural of طائر (bird) and the noun infinitive from the verb طار. So طیر means: (1) flying birds, insects, etc.; (2) a flying bird, insect, etc., for طیر is sometimes also used as singular; (3) as an infinitive noun طیر would also give the different meanings conveyed by its verbal forms (Lane).
ھیئة (manner) is the noun infinitive from ھاء. They say ھاء الرجل meaning, the man was or became of good form and appearance or other properties denoted by ھیئة, the noun infinitive. ھاء الیه means, he desired or longed to see or find him or it. ھیأه means, he gave him or he made him have a garb or guise, etc.; he prepared or arranged it and put it in a good state. تھیأ لامر means, he became prepared for the thing, or the matter. ھیئة means, form, fashion, appearance or figure; guise or garb; state, condition or case; manner, mode or quality (Aqrab & Lane).
ابری (I heal) is derived from بری i.e. he was or became clear or free from a thing. بری من المرض means, he became free from disease, i.e. he recovered from it. بری من الدین means, he became clear of debt. ابرأه means, he cured or healed him of the disease; he declared him innocent or free from the defect attributed to him; he acquitted him (Aqrab & Lane).
الاکمه (blind) is derived from کمه i.e. he became blind; or his eyes did not see at night. کمه فلان also means, he was or became deprived of reason or understanding. کمه النھار means, the day became dark, i.e. the sun became overcast with clouds. اکمه means, one who cannot see at night; one who is born blind; one who becomes blind afterwards; one who is deprived of reason and understanding (Aqrab & Mufradat).
ابرص (leprous) is derived from برص i.e. he was or became affected with برص (leprosy) viz. a sort of whiteness that appears upon parts of the body by reason of a corrupt state of health or constitution. The moon is sometimes called الابرص because of its white hue. ارض برصاء means, a land of which the herbage has become depastured at several places so that it has become bare thereof (Aqrab & Lane). A variety of leprosy of the Hebrews (probably identical with modern leprosy) was characterized by the presence of smooth, shining, depressed white patches or scales, the hair on which participated in the whiteness, while the skin and adjacent flesh became insensible (Webster).
تاکلون (you will eat) is derived from اکل i.e. he ate; he ate up; he devoured; he consumed; he wore away, etc. The Holy Prophet is reported to have said, امرت بقریة تاکل القری i.e. I have been commanded to migrate to a town (Medina) which shall devour, (i.e. subdue and conquer) other towns (Lane).
Commentary:
With this verse begins an account of Jesus’ ministry as a Prophet of God. By using the words, a Messenger to the Children of Israel, the verse makes it clear that Jesus’ mission was confined to the House of Israel. He was not a universal Messenger. In fact, as the Gospel itself states, he expressly ordered his disciples not to preach his message to any but the Israelites: "These twelve Jesus sent forth, and commanded them, saying, 'Go not into the way of the Gentiles, and into any city of the Samaritans enter ye not: but go rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel' " (Matt. 10:5, 6). It cannot be argued that this prohibition was confined to the lifetime of Jesus and that after his death his disciples were at liberty to preach to all the nations of the world, for this supposition is belied by the Gospel itself: "But when they persecute you in this city, flee ye into another: for verily I say unto you, Ye shall not have gone over the cities of Israel, till the son of man be come" (Matt. 10:23). According to this verse, the followers of Jesus were enjoined to confine their preaching to the Children of Israel till the time of his second coming. The same injunction is contained in Matt. 15: 24; 18: 11, 12; 19: 28; Acts 3: 25, 26; 13: 46; Luke 19: 10; 15: 4; 22: 28-30.
Only in Matt. 28:19 there appears some ambiguity about the mission of Jesus but on deeper reflection it becomes clear that here too it is the tribes of Israel that are meant, and not all peoples and all nations. The early disciples understood these words of Jesus in this very sense: "Now they which were scattered abroad upon the persecution that arose about Stephen travelled as far as Phenice, and Cyprus, and Antioch, preaching the word to none but unto the Jews only" (Acts 11: 19).
For a clear understanding of the other parts of the present verse, i.e. making birds of clay, etc. it is necessary to remember that it was Jesus’ habit to talk in parables—a way of talking which was predicted in the previous Scriptures to be a characteristic of his speech. Says the Gospel: "All these things spake Jesus unto the multitudes in parables; and without a parable spake he not unto them: that it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the prophet, saying, I will open my mouth in parables" (Matt. 13:34, 35). Later historians also have referred to this peculiar characteristic of Jesus: "In his popular addresses Jesus would make free use of parables. He spoke in parables to all classes but especially to the people. Without parables he was not wont to speak to them" (Enc. Bib. under Jesus). With this torchlight of history in our hands, it does not remain difficult for us to understand or explain the "signs" of Jesus as mentioned in the present verse.
There is no mention in the Bible of the miracle of creating birds popularly believed to have been performed by Jesus. If Jesus had really created birds, there is no reason why the Bible should have omitted to mention it, particularly when the creation of birds was a miracle the like of which had never been shown before by any Messenger of God. The mention of such a miracle would certainly have established his superiority over other Prophets and would have lent some support to the claim to divinity which has been foisted upon him by his later followers. Of the different meanings of خلق i.e. measuring, determining, designing or fashioning; making and creating, etc. given under Important Words above, it is in the former sense that this word has been used in this verse. In the sense of "creating'', the act of khalq has not been attributed in the Quran to any other being or thing except God. In fact, the Quran has laid the greatest emphasis on this exclusive attribute of God Who has been again and again declared to be the sole "Creator" of all things. All others to whom creation has been attributed are declared by the Quran to have been themselves created by God and to be devoid of all power to create anything (e.g. see 13:17; 16:21; 22:74; 25:4; 31:11, 12; 35:41 and 46:5). Even the silly notion that the power of creating though the unshared prerogative of God, might have been temporarily delegated by Him to another is rejected by the Quran (39:30 & 16:72).
In the light of the above explanation, and keeping in view the figurative sense of "clay", for which see Important Words above, the clause, I will fashion out for you a creation out of clay after the manner of a bird, then I will breathe into it (a new spirit) and it will become a soaring being, would mean that if ordinary men of humble origin but possessing the inherent power of growth and development came into contact with Jesus and accepted his message they would undergo a complete transformation in their lives. From men grovelling in the dust and not seeing beyond their material cares and mundane concerns, they would become converted into birds soaring high into the lofty regions of the spiritual firmament. And this is exactly what happened. The humble and despised fishermen of Galilee, under the impact of the ennobling teaching of their Master, began soaring like birds, preaching to the world of Israel the word of God and bravely facing all sorts of hardships and privations and making sacrifices that should adorn the history of any nation. Says Jesus: "I say unto you, Take no thought for your life, what ye shall eat, and what ye shall drink; nor yet for your body, what ye shall put on. Is not the life more than meat, and the body than raiment? Behold the fowls of the air: for they sow not, neither do they reap, nor gather into barns; yet your heavenly Father feedeth them. Are ye not much better than they?" (Matt. 6:25, 26).
The miracle relating to the making of birds from clay may be interpreted in another way as well. In the time of Jesus people had a special liking for the practice of occult sciences —hypnotism, mesmerism, etc. So it is possible that God granted him special power of this kind in order to impress the people and make them believe in him. In this case the sign of making birds would mean that Jesus made small clay models of birds and then through a sort of mesmerism made them appear to fly in the air. But this did not convert them into real living birds; for as soon as the influence was removed, they fell down to the ground like so many lumps of earth. This miracle of Jesus was more or less like the miracle of the rod of Moses which was temporarily made to look like a real serpent but was actually not so. But whatever the significance of the sign, it was performed, as the verse clearly puts it, by the command of Allah, and Jesus possessed no power of creation. (For fuller description see Izalah’-e-Auham by Ahmad, the Promised Messiah).
As for healing the blind and the leprous, it appears from the Bible that persons suffering from certain diseases (leprosy, etc.) were considered unclean and were, therefore, not allowed to come in contact with other men. If, therefore, the word ابری be taken to mean, "I declare to be free", the clause would signify that the legal or social disabilities and disadvantages under which persons suffering from such maladies laboured were removed by Jesus. If, however, the word be interpreted as "I heal," then the clause would mean that Jesus used to heal persons suffering from these diseases. But as indicated above, Jesus used to speak in metaphors. So just as the "creation" spoken of is spiritual creation, the diseases mentioned are spiritual diseases. The Prophets of God are spiritual physicians; they give eyes to those that have lost spiritual sight, and they give hearing to those who are spiritually deaf, and they restore life to those who are spiritually dead (see also Matt. 13:15). In this case the word اکمه (blind or one who is blind at night) would stand for such person as possesses the light of faith but being weak, cannot stand trials. He sees in the daytime, i.e. so long as there are no trials and the sun of faith shines forth unclouded; but when the night comes on, i.e. when there are trials, and sacrifices have to be made, he loses his spiritual vision and stands still (cf. 2:21). Similarly, the word ابرص(leprous) would, in the spiritual sense, stand for one who is imperfect in faith, having patches of diseased skin among healthy ones. But even if these words be taken in their physical sense, Jesus is proved to possess no peculiar power. All Prophets heal diseases and ailments by the power of prayer. In this case, however, the word اکمه (blind) would be taken in the sense of one who cannot see at night or one whose sight is weak.
The clause, I will quicken the dead, does not mean that Jesus actually brought the dead to life. Those actually dead are never restored to life in this world. Such a belief is diametrically opposed to the whole Quranic teaching (23:100, 101; 21:96; 39:59, 60; 2:29; 40:12; 45:27). The sayings of the Holy Prophet are also clear on this point. For instance, it is related that when Jabir’s father, who was a Companion of the Holy Prophet, was killed in the Battle of Uhud and the lad was much grieved, the Holy Prophet consolingly told him that God had lovingly spoken to his father in the other world and had asked him to beg of Him anything he liked, for that would be given to him. Thereupon Jabir’s father said, "Grant me, my Lord, another lease of life on earth that I may again be killed in Thy way". God replied, "I would certainly have done so, but the word has gone forth from Me that the dead shall not be sent back to the earth" (Tirmidhi & Majah).
That the so-called dead who are reported to have been raised by Jesus were not actually dead is clear from the Gospels as well. The incident described in Matt. 9:23-25 sheds some light on it. As a matter of fact, Prophets are only sent to give life to those who are spiritually dead. Jesus, Moses, Abraham and, above all, the Holy Prophet of Islam brought about a complete change in the lives of their followers. This, in religious language, is termed raising the dead to life. Literally, too, the word موتی (the dead) does not necessarily mean those physically dead. It is also used about those who are dead spiritually, morally or intellectually. The Quran freely speaks of the quickening of the dead in the sense of granting life to the spiritually dead (e.g. 3:28; 6:123; 8:43; 25:50; 36:71). In 8:25 the Holy Prophet himself has been spoken of as giving life to the dead. Says the Quran: O ye who believe, respond to Allah and the Messenger when he calls you that he may give you life. Here it is spiritual and intellectual life that is meant, for Muslims do not believe that the Holy Prophet ever brought an actually dead person to life.
The miracles of Jesus, as mentioned in this verse, have been stated in a natural order. First of all is mentioned the change in the outlook and way of life of those that came in contact with him. From men of the world, they became men of God. They rose from the dust and began soaring in the air. Then are mentioned some of the more common spiritual diseases of which Jesus cured the people; the blind were given spiritual sight and those having diseased skins were healed. Finally, the spiritually dead are declared to have received through Jesus a new life. Thus not only a natural order but a sort of progressive order is found in the verse, the climax, so far as individual reformation is concerned, being reached with the miracle relating to the quickening of the dead. But if the verse be interpreted literally, no arrangement seems to exist in the order in which the miracles are described here, i.e. (1) the creation of birds out of clay; (2) the healing of the blind; (3) the healing of those suffering from leprosy, i.e. those who had patches of disease on their skin; and (4) the raising of the dead to life.
The true climax, however, reaches in the miracle or sign mentioned in the clause, I will announce to you what you will eat and what you will store up in your houses. According to Abul-Baqa’, the words نبأ (news) and انبأ (he gave the news) are used in the Quran for announcing matters of great importance (Kulliyyat). This shows that, what Jesus is here represented as announcing to the people, are matters of supreme im-portance to his followers. The language of the verse being parabolic, the word تاکلون (you will eat) will be taken figuratively, mean, "you will subdue or conquer" (see under Important Words above). Thus the clause, I will announce to you what you will eat, would mean, "I will let you know what you will subdue or conquer", i.e. "I will announce to you the conquests you are destined to make in future". The other expression, i.e. I will also let you know what you will store up in your houses, would mean, "I will let you know the deeds which you should or would leave behind for posterity".
The entire clause may have yet another meaning. It may mean that Jesus told his disciples: (1) what they should eat, i.e. what they should spend to meet their physical needs, and (2) what they should store up, i.e. what they should lay up as a spiritual treasure in Heaven. In other words, Jesus told them that their earnings should be honestly and lawfully acquired and that they should spend their savings in the way of God, having no thought for the morrow which should be left to God (see Matt. 6:25, 26 as quoted above).
c
43:60; 61:7.
d
5:111.
419A
The words "a Messenger to the Children of Israel" show that the mission of Jesus was confined to the House of Israel. He was not a World- Messenger (Matt. 10: 5, 6; 15: 24; 19: 28. Acts, 3: 25, 26; 13: 46. Luke, 19: 10; 22: 28-30).
420
Khalaqa means, he measured, designed, fashioned or planned; God produced or created or brought into existence a thing or being without there being any previously existing pattern or model or similitude, i.e. he originated it (Lane & Lisan).
420A
Tin means, clay; earth; mould; etc. Figuratively, at-Tin may signify such persons as possess docile natures suitable for being moulded into any good shape like pliable clay.
420B
Hai’ah means, form; fashion; garb; state; manner; mode or quality (Lane).
420C
Tair means, a bird. Metaphorically the word signifies a highly spiritual man who soars high into spiritual regions as Asad (literally a lion) is used for a brave man and Dabbah for a worthless person, a worm of the earth (34:15).
420D
’Ubri’u is derived from Bari’a which means, he was or became clear or free from a thing and signifies, I heal; I declare a person free from the defect attributed to him (Lane).
420E
Akmah means, one who cannot see at night; one born blind; one who becomes blind afterward; one deprived of reason and understanding (Mufradat).
420F
There is no mention in the Bible of the miracle which is popularly believed to have been performed by Jesus that he created birds. If Jesus had really created birds, there is no reason why the Bible should have omitted to mention this, particularly when the creating of birds was a miracle the like of which had never been shown before by any Messenger of God. The mention of such a miracle would certainly have established his great superiority over all other Prophets and would have lent some support to the claim to Divinity which has been foisted upon him by his later followers. Of the different meanings of Khalq—(1) measuring; determining; designing, (2) fashioning; making and creating, etc. it is in the former sense that this word has been used in this verse. In the sense of "creating," the act of Khalq has not been attributed in the Qur’an to any other being or thing except God (13:17; 16:21; 22:74; 25:4; 31:11, 12; 35:41 & 46:5). In the light of the above explanation, and keeping in
420G
The entire clause may mean that Jesus told his disciples what they should eat, i.e. what they should spend to meet their physical needs, and what they should store up i.e. what they should lay up as spiritual treasure in Heaven. In other words he told them that their earnings should be honestly and lawfully acquired and that they should spend their savings in the way of God, having no thought for the morrow which should be left to God (Matt. 6: 25, 26).
۞ وَمِنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ مَنْ إِن تَأْمَنْهُ بِقِنطَارٍ يُؤَدِّهِۦٓ إِلَيْكَ وَمِنْهُم مَّنْ إِن تَأْمَنْهُ بِدِينَارٍ لَّا يُؤَدِّهِۦٓ إِلَيْكَ إِلَّا مَا دُمْتَ عَلَيْهِ قَآئِمًا ۗ ذَٰلِكَ بِأَنَّهُمْ قَالُوا۟ لَيْسَ عَلَيْنَا فِى ٱلْأُمِّيِّۦنَ سَبِيلٌ وَيَقُولُونَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ ٱلْكَذِبَ وَهُمْ يَعْلَمُونَ
ڈھیر قِنْطَار کا ترجمہ ہے مگر اردو میں ڈھیر نہیں کہتے۔ بلکہ کسی چیز کا ڈھیر کہتے ہیں اس لئے ہم نے مال کا لفظ زائد کر دیا ہے اور اسے بریکٹ میں رکھا ہے کیونکہ اس کے بغیر صحیح معنے ظاہر نہ ہوتے تھے۔
In the time of the Holy Prophet the idea had gained ground among the Jews that it was no sin to rob a Gentile (non-Jew) Arab of his possession and property because the latter followed a false religion. Possibly, the idea had its origin in the Jewish law of usury, which makes an invidious distinction between a Jew and a non-Jew regarding the giving and taking of interest (Exod. 22: 25; Lev. 25: 36, 37; Deut. 23: 20).
Commentary:
The words, We are not liable to blame in the matter of the unlearned, refer to a notion prevalent among Jews in the time of the Holy Prophet that it was no sin to rob the gentile Arabs of their possessions, because the latter followed a false religion. The Jews believed that they were at liberty to do as they liked concerning Muslims and would not be called to account for it. Possibly, they deduced this queer doctrine from the Jewish law of usury, which makes an invidious distinction between a Jew and a non-Jew regarding the giving and taking of interest (Exod. 22:25; Lev. 25:36, 37; Deut. 23:20, 21).
Another meaning of this verse is obtained if we take the words "trust", "treasure", "dinar", etc., in a figurative sense. The Bible contains not only prophecies about the Holy Prophet of Islam, but also clear injunctions to the People of the Book to accept him when he made his appearance. This was in the nature of a "trust" with them. But when the Promised Prophet appeared, they refused to surrender that trust, except a few of them who accepted Islam. These it is that are spoken of as returning the treasure they are trusted with, whereas those who not only rejected the Holy Prophet but even refused to admit that their scriptures contained any prophecies about him are likened to such as would not even return a "dinar" entrusted to them unless you keep standing over them, i.e. unless you force them in argument to admit the truth.
3
ڈھیر قِنْطَار کا ترجمہ ہے مگر اردو میں ڈھیر نہیں کہتے۔ بلکہ کسی چیز کا ڈھیر کہتے ہیں اس لئے ہم نے مال کا لفظ زائد کر دیا ہے اور اسے بریکٹ میں رکھا ہے کیونکہ اس کے بغیر صحیح معنے ظاہر نہ ہوتے تھے۔
364
Commentary:
The words, We are not liable to blame in the matter of the unlearned, refer to a notion prevalent among Jews in the time of the Holy Prophet that it was no sin to rob the gentile Arabs of their possessions, because the latter followed a false religion. The Jews believed that they were at liberty to do as they liked concerning Muslims and would not be called to account for it. Possibly, they deduced this queer doctrine from the Jewish law of usury, which makes an invidious distinction between a Jew and a non-Jew regarding the giving and taking of interest (Exod. 22:25; Lev. 25:36, 37; Deut. 23:20, 21).
Another meaning of this verse is obtained if we take the words "trust", "treasure", "dinar", etc., in a figurative sense. The Bible contains not only prophecies about the Holy Prophet of Islam, but also clear injunctions to the People of the Book to accept him when he made his appearance. This was in the nature of a "trust" with them. But when the Promised Prophet appeared, they refused to surrender that trust, except a few of them who accepted Islam. These it is that are spoken of as returning the treasure they are trusted with, whereas those who not only rejected the Holy Prophet but even refused to admit that their scriptures contained any prophecies about him are likened to such as would not even return a "dinar" entrusted to them unless you keep standing over them, i.e. unless you force them in argument to admit the truth.
429
In the time of the Holy Prophet the idea had gained ground among the Jews that it was no sin to rob a Gentile (non-Jew) Arab of his possession and property because the latter followed a false religion. Possibly, the idea had its origin in the Jewish law of usury, which makes an invidious distinction between a Jew and a non-Jew regarding the giving and taking of interest (Exod. 22: 25; Lev. 25: 36, 37; Deut. 23: 20).
۞ كُلُّ ٱلطَّعَامِ كَانَ حِلًّا لِّبَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ إِلَّا مَا حَرَّمَ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلُ عَلَىٰ نَفْسِهِۦ مِن قَبْلِ أَن تُنَزَّلَ ٱلتَّوْرَىٰةُ ۗ قُلْ فَأْتُوا۟ بِٱلتَّوْرَىٰةِ فَٱتْلُوهَآ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
حضرت یعقوب علیہ السلام کا ایک کشفی نام اسرائیل تھا(پرانا عہدنامہ پیدائش باب۳۲ آیت۲۸)۔
بعض چیزوں سے ان کی بیماری کی وجہ سے ان کو روکا گیا تھا۔ بنو اسرائیل نے غلطی سے ان کو حرام سمجھ لیا (پیدائش باب۳۲)۔
Certain foods which the Jews abstained from were allowed by Islam. One such thing was the sciatic nerve, to which reference is made in Gen. 32: 32. Jacob suffered from sciatica, and, for medical reasons he forbade himself the sciatic nerve as food. This was his personal matter but the Israelites made it a rule of conduct to abstain from eating the sinew.
The name Israel was bestowed upon Jacob in a vision (Gen. 32: 28).
Important Words:
کل (all) is a very common Arabic word used to express two senses: (1) all members of a group; (2) all parts of an individual thing. The word may generally be rendered as, all; whole; each; every one, etc. It is also sometimes used in the sense of "the majority of", and rarely even in the sense of "some" or "part of" (Aqrab & Taj)
Commentary:
The preceding verses emphasize the importance of complete submission to the will of God. The highest good cannot be attained without the sacrifice of most beloved things, including personal and national sentiments. The present verse cites an apt illustration. Whereas God had allowed "all food" to the Jews, the Israelites forbade themselves parts thereof on the ground that Jacob, for personal and medical considerations, abstained from partaking of them. But as the word Israel, primarily the name of Jacob, is also used about his children and descendants and has been so used in the Bible, it may also be taken in this sense in the second clause of the present verse.
By saying, All food was lawful to the Children of Israel, the Quran also refutes an objection of the People of the Book, which served as an obstacle in the way of their accepting Islam. There were certain kinds of food which the Jews abstained from eating but which were allowed by Islam. One such thing was the sciatic nerve, to which reference is made in Gen. 32:32. Jacob suffered from sciatica, and, therefore, for medical reasons he forbade himself the use of the sciatic nerve as food. This was a personal matter but the Children of Israel followed his example blindly and made it a rule of conduct to abstain from the eating of the sinew. It was not forbidden by Law, the abstention being purely voluntary.
Moreover, the incident which led to the abandonment of the sciatic nerve as food by Israel and later by the Israelites took place long before the Torah was revealed. The Torah itself does not forbid it but merely mentions it as a practice of the Jews who had, therefore, no right to object to its use by the Muslims. The objection, if valid, also held good against Abraham and many other Prophets. Besides, there are some foods which were used by Abraham and his descendants but were later forbidden by the Torah. The camel is an instance of this kind. Hence, the verse purports to say that if certain foods used by the patriarchs are allowed to other peoples, the Jews have no right to object.
It may be pointed out here that there is a difference of meaning between کل طعام (kullu-ta‘amin) and کل الطعام (kullut-ta‘ami) as used in the present verse. The former means, every kind of food, while the latter means, all food, i.e. the whole food. It appears that the Jews objected that the Muslims ate the whole meat, not excepting even the nerve.
1
حضرت یعقوب علیہ السلام کا ایک کشفی نام اسرائیل تھا(پرانا عہدنامہ پیدائش باب۳۲ آیت۲۸)۔
2
بعض چیزوں سے ان کی بیماری کی وجہ سے ان کو روکا گیا تھا۔ بنو اسرائیل نے غلطی سے ان کو حرام سمجھ لیا (پیدائش باب۳۲)۔
380
Important Words:
کل (all) is a very common Arabic word used to express two senses: (1) all members of a group; (2) all parts of an individual thing. The word may generally be rendered as, all; whole; each; every one, etc. It is also sometimes used in the sense of "the majority of", and rarely even in the sense of "some" or "part of" (Aqrab & Taj)
Commentary:
The preceding verses emphasize the importance of complete submission to the will of God. The highest good cannot be attained without the sacrifice of most beloved things, including personal and national sentiments. The present verse cites an apt illustration. Whereas God had allowed "all food" to the Jews, the Israelites forbade themselves parts thereof on the ground that Jacob, for personal and medical considerations, abstained from partaking of them. But as the word Israel, primarily the name of Jacob, is also used about his children and descendants and has been so used in the Bible, it may also be taken in this sense in the second clause of the present verse.
By saying, All food was lawful to the Children of Israel, the Quran also refutes an objection of the People of the Book, which served as an obstacle in the way of their accepting Islam. There were certain kinds of food which the Jews abstained from eating but which were allowed by Islam. One such thing was the sciatic nerve, to which reference is made in Gen. 32:32. Jacob suffered from sciatica, and, therefore, for medical reasons he forbade himself the use of the sciatic nerve as food. This was a personal matter but the Children of Israel followed his example blindly and made it a rule of conduct to abstain from the eating of the sinew. It was not forbidden by Law, the abstention being purely voluntary.
Moreover, the incident which led to the abandonment of the sciatic nerve as food by Israel and later by the Israelites took place long before the Torah was revealed. The Torah itself does not forbid it but merely mentions it as a practice of the Jews who had, therefore, no right to object to its use by the Muslims. The objection, if valid, also held good against Abraham and many other Prophets. Besides, there are some foods which were used by Abraham and his descendants but were later forbidden by the Torah. The camel is an instance of this kind. Hence, the verse purports to say that if certain foods used by the patriarchs are allowed to other peoples, the Jews have no right to object.
It may be pointed out here that there is a difference of meaning between کل طعام (kullu-ta‘amin) and کل الطعام (kullut-ta‘ami) as used in the present verse. The former means, every kind of food, while the latter means, all food, i.e. the whole food. It appears that the Jews objected that the Muslims ate the whole meat, not excepting even the nerve.
439
Certain foods which the Jews abstained from were allowed by Islam. One such thing was the sciatic nerve, to which reference is made in Gen. 32: 32. Jacob suffered from sciatica, and, for medical reasons he forbade himself the sciatic nerve as food. This was his personal matter but the Israelites made it a rule of conduct to abstain from eating the sinew.
440
The name Israel was bestowed upon Jacob in a vision (Gen. 32: 28).
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ إِن تُطِيعُوا۟ فَرِيقًا مِّنَ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ يَرُدُّوكُم بَعْدَ إِيمَٰنِكُمْ كَٰفِرِينَ
2:110; 3:150.
2:110; 3:150.
2:110; 3:150.
Commentary:
The words, any party of those who have been given the Book, refer to that party of the People of the Book who were most hostile to Islam, there being a section of them who had turned believers and others who were indifferent. Muslims have already been warned of this danger in 2:110.
b
2:110; 3:150.
b
2:110; 3:150.
387
Commentary:
The words, any party of those who have been given the Book, refer to that party of the People of the Book who were most hostile to Islam, there being a section of them who had turned believers and others who were indifferent. Muslims have already been warned of this danger in 2:110.
c
2:110; 3:150.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَتَّخِذُوا۟ بِطَانَةً مِّن دُونِكُمْ لَا يَأْلُونَكُمْ خَبَالًا وَدُّوا۟ مَا عَنِتُّمْ قَدْ بَدَتِ ٱلْبَغْضَآءُ مِنْ أَفْوَٰهِهِمْ وَمَا تُخْفِى صُدُورُهُمْ أَكْبَرُ ۚ قَدْ بَيَّنَّا لَكُمُ ٱلْءَايَٰتِ ۖ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْقِلُونَ
3:21; 4:140, 145.
9:47.
Khabal means, corruption whether of body or reason or actions; loss or deterioration; ruin or destruction; fatal poison (Aqrab).
They love to see you fall into calamity or misfortune; to perish or to become weak and broken; or they love to see that you deviate from the path of righteousness and take to a life of sin.
3:29; 4:140, 145.
9:47.
Important Words:
بطانة (intimate friends) is derived from بطن i.e. it was or became hidden. بطانة means a lining; an inner vest; a close and intimate friend or friends; a friend or friends to whom one reveals one’s secrets (Aqrab).
خبالا (corruption) is derived from خبل. They say خبله i.e. he made him or it corrupt or evil. خبله الحزن means, the grief affected and vitiated his reason. خبل الرجل عن کذا means, he confined the man and prevented him from it. خبالا means, corruption or bad condition whether of body or reason or actions; loss or deterioration; ruin or destruction; fatal poison (Aqrab).
عنتم (in trouble) is derived from عنت. They say عنت الشیء i.e. the thing became bad or corrupt. عنت فلان means, misfortune befell him and he got into trouble. عنت زید means Zaid met with a calamity and was ruined. عنت العظم means, the bone became weak and broke after it was in a good condition. عنت الرجل means, the man committed a sin (Aqrab). See also 2:221.
Commentary:
The words لایالونکم خبالا rendered as, they will not fail to corrupt you, may also mean: (1) they have no scruple in ruining you; (2) they leave no stone unturned to spoil your work; (3) they will do what they can to corrupt your religion; (4) they are always busy injuring you.
The words ودوا ما عنتم (they love to see you in trouble) may, in the light of the meanings given under Important Words above, mean: (1) they love to see you fall into calamity and misfortune; (2) they love to see you perish; (3) they love to see you become weak and broken; (4) they love to see you become sinful.
Obviously, this verse refers to avoiding such non-Muslims only as are at war with Muslims or such as seek to injure Islam in any other way. It does not require Muslims to have absolutely no relations with any non-Muslim. Elsewhere, the Quran says:
Allah forbids you not respecting those who have not fought against you on account of your religion and who have not driven you out from your homes, that you be kind to them and deal equitably with them. Surely Allah loves those who are equitable (60:9).
a
3:21; 4:140, 145.
b
9:47.
a
3:29; 4:140, 145.
b
9:47.
403
Important Words:
بطانة (intimate friends) is derived from بطن i.e. it was or became hidden. بطانة means a lining; an inner vest; a close and intimate friend or friends; a friend or friends to whom one reveals one’s secrets (Aqrab).
خبالا (corruption) is derived from خبل. They say خبله i.e. he made him or it corrupt or evil. خبله الحزن means, the grief affected and vitiated his reason. خبل الرجل عن کذا means, he confined the man and prevented him from it. خبالا means, corruption or bad condition whether of body or reason or actions; loss or deterioration; ruin or destruction; fatal poison (Aqrab).
عنتم (in trouble) is derived from عنت. They say عنت الشیء i.e. the thing became bad or corrupt. عنت فلان means, misfortune befell him and he got into trouble. عنت زید means Zaid met with a calamity and was ruined. عنت العظم means, the bone became weak and broke after it was in a good condition. عنت الرجل means, the man committed a sin (Aqrab). See also 2:221.
Commentary:
The words لایالونکم خبالا rendered as, they will not fail to corrupt you, may also mean: (1) they have no scruple in ruining you; (2) they leave no stone unturned to spoil your work; (3) they will do what they can to corrupt your religion; (4) they are always busy injuring you.
The words ودوا ما عنتم (they love to see you in trouble) may, in the light of the meanings given under Important Words above, mean: (1) they love to see you fall into calamity and misfortune; (2) they love to see you perish; (3) they love to see you become weak and broken; (4) they love to see you become sinful.
Obviously, this verse refers to avoiding such non-Muslims only as are at war with Muslims or such as seek to injure Islam in any other way. It does not require Muslims to have absolutely no relations with any non-Muslim. Elsewhere, the Quran says:
Allah forbids you not respecting those who have not fought against you on account of your religion and who have not driven you out from your homes, that you be kind to them and deal equitably with them. Surely Allah loves those who are equitable (60:9).
b
3:21; 4:140, 145.
c
9:47.
462
Khabal means, corruption whether of body or reason or actions; loss or deterioration; ruin or destruction; fatal poison (Aqrab).
463
They love to see you fall into calamity or misfortune; to perish or to become weak and broken; or they love to see that you deviate from the path of righteousness and take to a life of sin.
إِن تَمْسَسْكُمْ حَسَنَةٌ تَسُؤْهُمْ وَإِن تُصِبْكُمْ سَيِّئَةٌ يَفْرَحُوا۟ بِهَا ۖ وَإِن تَصْبِرُوا۟ وَتَتَّقُوا۟ لَا يَضُرُّكُمْ كَيْدُهُمْ شَيْـًٔا ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ بِمَا يَعْمَلُونَ مُحِيطٌ
9:50.
اَحَاطَ کے معنے بالکل تباہ کر دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ (اقرب)
9:50.
God will bring to naught all their doings and will destroy them. Muslims should not therefore fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, and He will frustrate them.
9:50.
Commentary:
The enemies of Islam, both open and secret, are grieved to see the success of believers and try to minimize it. But when Muslims meet with some failure, they rejoice and try to exaggerate it. Their object is to dishearten and discourage believers.
The words, Allah encompasses their deeds, signify that God will bring to nought all their doings and destroy them. Muslims should not, therefore, fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, Who will frustrate them.
d
9:50.
1
اَحَاطَ کے معنے بالکل تباہ کر دینے کے بھی ہوتے ہیں۔ (اقرب)
b
9:50.
405
Commentary:
The enemies of Islam, both open and secret, are grieved to see the success of believers and try to minimize it. But when Muslims meet with some failure, they rejoice and try to exaggerate it. Their object is to dishearten and discourage believers.
The words, Allah encompasses their deeds, signify that God will bring to nought all their doings and destroy them. Muslims should not, therefore, fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, Who will frustrate them.
a
9:50.
466
God will bring to naught all their doings and will destroy them. Muslims should not therefore fear them. All machinations of the enemies of Islam are known to God, and He will frustrate them.
بَلَىٰٓ ۚ إِن تَصْبِرُوا۟ وَتَتَّقُوا۟ وَيَأْتُوكُم مِّن فَوْرِهِمْ هَٰذَا يُمْدِدْكُمْ رَبُّكُم بِخَمْسَةِ ءَالَٰفٍ مِّنَ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةِ مُسَوِّمِينَ
这句话的意思是: 如果不信者又立即来攻击而不给予穆斯林有任何时间恢复, 养主将以五千个天使援助他们。天使数目的不同--------前节经文提到的数目为三干--------是由于穆斯林以后大为削弱的状况。当时他们疲惫不堪, 伤亡惨重, 因而极需援助。古来西人朝麦加走了一段距离以后, 决定重新攻击穆斯林。穆圣知道这事后, 在战斗发生的第二天就发出紧急进军令, 并且指令只有那些参加过吴候德 (اُحُدْ, Uhud) 战役的追随者可以跟他去。他们一直到了遥远的哈姆拉艾尔•阿萨德 (حَمْراءُالْاَسَدْ, Hamra’ul-Asad), 离麦地那约八英里远的一个地方。然而, 麦加人吓倒了, 没有料到穆圣和他的追随者会如此勇敢而神速地出现, 所以决定仓促退回麦加。这是由于天使在他们心中引起了恐惧。否则, 就没有理由说明为什么逃离穆斯林, 而仅在一天之前他们使穆斯林蒙受极大的损失, 使他们人数大为减少外, 更由於一天的战役而疲惫不堪及严重受伤。
سَوَّمَ عَلَیْھِمْ: اَغَارَ عَلَیْھِمْ یعنی سَوَّمَ کے معنے حملہ کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) پس مُسَوِّمِیْنَ کے معنے ہوں گے سخت حملہ کرنے والے۔
The word bala also denotes a connection between the verses and supplies the answer to the question in 3:125, viz. Will it not suffice you? Thus the meaning would be: "Yes, it will suffice us, and so will suffice a force of 5,000 angels if the enemy were to return to the attack at this very moment."
The words signify that if the disbelievers returned to the attack at once, without giving the Muslims any time to recoup themselves, God would help them with 5,000 angels. The difference in the number of angels—in the preceding verse the number mentioned being 3,000—was due to the later greatly weakened condition of the Muslims. They were at that time exhausted and badly mauled and, therefore, needed greater help. After having gone to some distance towards Mecca the Quraish decided to return and attack the Muslims again. When the Holy Prophet came to know of this, on the day following the battle, he gave immediate orders to march and directed that only those of his followers who had taken part in the Battle of Uhud should go with him. The Muslims went as far as Hamra’ul-Asad, a place about eight miles from Medina. The Meccans were, however, so overawed by this unexpectedly bold and prompt appearance of the Holy Prophet and his followers that they decided to retreat hastily to Mecca. This was due to t
Musawwimin is derived from Sawwama. They say Sawwama ‘Alaihim, i.e. he suddenly and vehemently attacked them and wrought havoc among them (Aqrab).
Important Words:
فور (immediately) is derived from فار. They say فار الماء i.e. the water gushed forth from the earth. فارت القدر means, the contents of the cooking pot vehemently boiled and rose high in it. فورة means, the intensity of heat or anger or the like. فورة النھار means, the first part of the day. فور signifies the state or condition that comes without delay. The Arabs say رجع من فوره he returned or turned back immediately without tarrying (Arab).
مسومین (attacking vehemently) is derived from سوم. They say سوم الفرس i.e. he branded the horse with a brand. سوم الخیل means, he let loose the horses for grazing. سوم علیھمmeans, he suddenly and vehemently attacked them and wrought havoc among them (Aqrab). In the verse under comment the word is used in the last-mentioned sense.
Commentary:
The verse signifies that if the disbelievers returned to the attack at once, without giving the Muslims any opportunity to recoup themselves, God would help the latter with five thousand angels. The difference in the number of angels,—in the preceding verse the number mentioned being 3,000—was due to the difference in the condition of the Muslims. They were at that time exhausted and wounded and, therefore, needed greater help than they would have needed, if the enemy attack had been delayed.
The enemy did indeed think of returning, but God prevented them from doing so. Briefly stated, the facts are that when the Quraish were retracing their steps towards Mecca, members of the Arab tribes living in the vicinity of Medina asked them about the results of the battle, and when they declared that they were victorious, these men put them to shame by saying, "If you have been really victorious, where are the spoils? What have you brought from the battlefield?" Touched to the quick by this taunt, the Quraish decided to retrieve their shame by attacking the Muslims once more. When the Holy Prophet came to know of this, on the day following the battle, he gave immediate orders to march and directed that only those of his followers who had taken part in the Battle of Uhud should join him. The Muslims went as far as Hamra’ul-Asad, a place about eight miles from Medina. The Meccans were, however, so overawed by this unexpectedly bold and prompt appearance of the Holy Prophet and his followers that they decided to retreat hastily to Mecca. This was due to the fear which the angels had inspired in their hearts. Otherwise there was no reason for them to flee from an enemy upon whom they had inflicted so heavy a loss only a day before and who, besides being very much reduced in number, were utterly exhausted and were suffering from grievous wounds as a result of the previous day’s fighting.
A recent commentator, having translated the words, من فورھم ھذا as "in headlong manner", has applied them to the Battle of Ahzab. This is not right. The fact is that verses 125 and 126, as already explained, are both connected with the Battle of Uhud and relate to the time immediately following it. The word بلی (yea) occurring in the beginning of the verse also denotes a connection between the verses and supplies the answer to the question in 3:125, viz: will it not suffice you? Thus the word بلی would here mean "yes, it will suffice, and so will suffice a force of 5,000 angels if the enemy were to return to the attack at this very moment."
276
这句话的意思是: 如果不信者又立即来攻击而不给予穆斯林有任何时间恢复, 养主将以五千个天使援助他们。天使数目的不同--------前节经文提到的数目为三干--------是由于穆斯林以后大为削弱的状况。当时他们疲惫不堪, 伤亡惨重, 因而极需援助。古来西人朝麦加走了一段距离以后, 决定重新攻击穆斯林。穆圣知道这事后, 在战斗发生的第二天就发出紧急进军令, 并且指令只有那些参加过吴候德 (اُحُدْ, Uhud) 战役的追随者可以跟他去。他们一直到了遥远的哈姆拉艾尔•阿萨德 (حَمْراءُالْاَسَدْ, Hamra’ul-Asad), 离麦地那约八英里远的一个地方。然而, 麦加人吓倒了, 没有料到穆圣和他的追随者会如此勇敢而神速地出现, 所以决定仓促退回麦加。这是由于天使在他们心中引起了恐惧。否则, 就没有理由说明为什么逃离穆斯林, 而仅在一天之前他们使穆斯林蒙受极大的损失, 使他们人数大为减少外, 更由於一天的战役而疲惫不堪及严重受伤。
4
سَوَّمَ عَلَیْھِمْ: اَغَارَ عَلَیْھِمْ یعنی سَوَّمَ کے معنے حملہ کرنے کے ہوتے ہیں (اقرب) پس مُسَوِّمِیْنَ کے معنے ہوں گے سخت حملہ کرنے والے۔
410
Important Words:
فور (immediately) is derived from فار. They say فار الماء i.e. the water gushed forth from the earth. فارت القدر means, the contents of the cooking pot vehemently boiled and rose high in it. فورة means, the intensity of heat or anger or the like. فورة النھار means, the first part of the day. فور signifies the state or condition that comes without delay. The Arabs say رجع من فوره he returned or turned back immediately without tarrying (Arab).
مسومین (attacking vehemently) is derived from سوم. They say سوم الفرس i.e. he branded the horse with a brand. سوم الخیل means, he let loose the horses for grazing. سوم علیھمmeans, he suddenly and vehemently attacked them and wrought havoc among them (Aqrab). In the verse under comment the word is used in the last-mentioned sense.
Commentary:
The verse signifies that if the disbelievers returned to the attack at once, without giving the Muslims any opportunity to recoup themselves, God would help the latter with five thousand angels. The difference in the number of angels,—in the preceding verse the number mentioned being 3,000—was due to the difference in the condition of the Muslims. They were at that time exhausted and wounded and, therefore, needed greater help than they would have needed, if the enemy attack had been delayed.
The enemy did indeed think of returning, but God prevented them from doing so. Briefly stated, the facts are that when the Quraish were retracing their steps towards Mecca, members of the Arab tribes living in the vicinity of Medina asked them about the results of the battle, and when they declared that they were victorious, these men put them to shame by saying, "If you have been really victorious, where are the spoils? What have you brought from the battlefield?" Touched to the quick by this taunt, the Quraish decided to retrieve their shame by attacking the Muslims once more. When the Holy Prophet came to know of this, on the day following the battle, he gave immediate orders to march and directed that only those of his followers who had taken part in the Battle of Uhud should join him. The Muslims went as far as Hamra’ul-Asad, a place about eight miles from Medina. The Meccans were, however, so overawed by this unexpectedly bold and prompt appearance of the Holy Prophet and his followers that they decided to retreat hastily to Mecca. This was due to the fear which the angels had inspired in their hearts. Otherwise there was no reason for them to flee from an enemy upon whom they had inflicted so heavy a loss only a day before and who, besides being very much reduced in number, were utterly exhausted and were suffering from grievous wounds as a result of the previous day’s fighting.
A recent commentator, having translated the words, من فورھم ھذا as "in headlong manner", has applied them to the Battle of Ahzab. This is not right. The fact is that verses 125 and 126, as already explained, are both connected with the Battle of Uhud and relate to the time immediately following it. The word بلی (yea) occurring in the beginning of the verse also denotes a connection between the verses and supplies the answer to the question in 3:125, viz: will it not suffice you? Thus the word بلی would here mean "yes, it will suffice, and so will suffice a force of 5,000 angels if the enemy were to return to the attack at this very moment."
471
The word bala also denotes a connection between the verses and supplies the answer to the question in 3:125, viz. Will it not suffice you? Thus the meaning would be: "Yes, it will suffice us, and so will suffice a force of 5,000 angels if the enemy were to return to the attack at this very moment."
472
The words signify that if the disbelievers returned to the attack at once, without giving the Muslims any time to recoup themselves, God would help them with 5,000 angels. The difference in the number of angels—in the preceding verse the number mentioned being 3,000—was due to the later greatly weakened condition of the Muslims. They were at that time exhausted and badly mauled and, therefore, needed greater help. After having gone to some distance towards Mecca the Quraish decided to return and attack the Muslims again. When the Holy Prophet came to know of this, on the day following the battle, he gave immediate orders to march and directed that only those of his followers who had taken part in the Battle of Uhud should go with him. The Muslims went as far as Hamra’ul-Asad, a place about eight miles from Medina. The Meccans were, however, so overawed by this unexpectedly bold and prompt appearance of the Holy Prophet and his followers that they decided to retreat hastily to Mecca. This was due to t
473
Musawwimin is derived from Sawwama. They say Sawwama ‘Alaihim, i.e. he suddenly and vehemently attacked them and wrought havoc among them (Aqrab).
وَلَا تَهِنُوا۟ وَلَا تَحْزَنُوا۟ وَأَنتُمُ ٱلْأَعْلَوْنَ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
4:105; 47:36.
4:105; 47:36.
In means, if; not; verily; because; when; etc. (Lane).
The verse embodies a very important principle how a nation or an individual can become and remain strong, the words "slacken not" being related to future dangers and "grieve not" to past errors and misfortunes. Nations decline and fall only when, either through lack of true realization of their responsibilities they begin to slacken in their efforts, or through brooding over the past, they give way to despair. The verse warns against both these dangers.
4:105; 47:36.
Important Words:
ان (if) is a common Arabic word giving a number of meanings: (1) if, (2) not, (3) verily, (4) because, (5) when, etc. (Lane).
Commentary:
The expression, Slacken not, nor grieve, embodies a very important principle of national or for that matter, personal strength, the words "slacken not" pertaining to future danger and the words "grieve not" to past errors and misfortunes. Nations fall only when, either through lack of true realization of their respon-sibilities they begin to slacken, or through brooding over the past, they give way to despair. The words warn against both these dangers.
The clause, you shall certainly have the upper hand, means that if Muslims follow the above advice, they will certainly be victorious in the end. Intervening failures are indeed no failures if the final triumph is assured. Muslims had apparently met with a reverse at Uhud, so God exhorts the Faithful to let no sort of weakness get hold of them on account of that reverse, either in body or in actions or in faith.
The Arabic clause rendered as, if you are believers, may also be rendered as "because you are believers". In this case the verse would embody a more positive promise of victory.
g
4:105; 47:36.
d
4:105; 47:36.
423
Important Words:
ان (if) is a common Arabic word giving a number of meanings: (1) if, (2) not, (3) verily, (4) because, (5) when, etc. (Lane).
Commentary:
The expression, Slacken not, nor grieve, embodies a very important principle of national or for that matter, personal strength, the words "slacken not" pertaining to future danger and the words "grieve not" to past errors and misfortunes. Nations fall only when, either through lack of true realization of their respon-sibilities they begin to slacken, or through brooding over the past, they give way to despair. The words warn against both these dangers.
The clause, you shall certainly have the upper hand, means that if Muslims follow the above advice, they will certainly be victorious in the end. Intervening failures are indeed no failures if the final triumph is assured. Muslims had apparently met with a reverse at Uhud, so God exhorts the Faithful to let no sort of weakness get hold of them on account of that reverse, either in body or in actions or in faith.
The Arabic clause rendered as, if you are believers, may also be rendered as "because you are believers". In this case the verse would embody a more positive promise of victory.
c
4:105; 47:36.
486
In means, if; not; verily; because; when; etc. (Lane).
487
The verse embodies a very important principle how a nation or an individual can become and remain strong, the words "slacken not" being related to future dangers and "grieve not" to past errors and misfortunes. Nations decline and fall only when, either through lack of true realization of their responsibilities they begin to slacken in their efforts, or through brooding over the past, they give way to despair. The verse warns against both these dangers.
إِن يَمْسَسْكُمْ قَرْحٌ فَقَدْ مَسَّ ٱلْقَوْمَ قَرْحٌ مِّثْلُهُۥ ۚ وَتِلْكَ ٱلْأَيَّامُ نُدَاوِلُهَا بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ وَلِيَعْلَمَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ وَيَتَّخِذَ مِنكُمْ شُهَدَآءَ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ لَا يُحِبُّ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ
4:105.
另外3:166说穆斯林使不信者受到的创伤是他们自己所遭受的两倍。这是指白德尔战役, 当时七十个麦加人战死, 七十人被俘, 总计一百四十人。相反, 在吴侯德战役中, 七十个穆斯林阵亡, 但没有被俘。这样, 与穆斯林自己在吴侯德战役中所受创伤相比铰, 他们使不信者在白德尔战役中遭到了两倍的创伤。然而, 只计算一下两场战役中战死者的数目, 则本节经文提到的穆斯林和不信者的损失是一样的。也可以认为本节经文指的是灾难的性质, 这在双方面是一样的。因此, 下面第166节经文可以被认为是指 (灾难的) 数量, 而这节经文是指损失的质量。
4:105.
Elsewhere (3:166), it is said that Muslims inflicted upon disbelievers an injury double of what they themselves had suffered. This refers to the Battle of Badr, when seventy Meccans were killed and seventy were taken prisoner, thus making a total of 140. In the Battle of Uhud, on the other hand, seventy Muslims were killed, but not one of them was taken prisoner. Thus Muslims had inflicted on the disbelievers a double injury in the Battle of Badr compared with what they themselves suffered in the Battle of Uhud. Taking into account, however, only those killed in the two battles, the loss of Muslims and disbelievers has been spoken of in the present verse as similar. Or the verse might be taken to refer to the nature or quality of the misfortune, which was alike in both cases. In that case verse 166 below might be taken to refer to the quantity and the present verse to the quality of the loss.
"Days of prosperity" or days of misfortune."
God being Omniscient does not stand in need of adding to His knowledge. It is only the act of distinguishing between two things that is meant here. Knowledge (‘Ilm) is of two kinds. One kind of knowledge consists in knowing a thing before it comes into existence; and the other in knowing when, and as, it actually comes into existence. Here it is the latter kind of knowledge that is meant.
The Faithful bear witness to the truth of Islam by their steadfastness and by the noble example they set in time of misfortune.
4:105.
Important Words:
یعلم (distinguish) is derived from علم which ordinarily means, he knew, but is also used in the sense of distinguishing. Ibn Jarir says under this verse that the expression لا علم عبد الله من عمر means, لاعرف ھذا من ھذا i.e. that I may distinguish ‘Abdullah from ‘Umar. The word is used in this sense in 2:144 and 2:221 also. In fact, God, being Omniscient, does not stand in need of knowing a thing, for everything is ever known to Him. It is only distinguishing between two things that is meant. Even, however, if علم is taken here in the sense of knowing, the expression may be explained by the fact that knowledge is of two kinds. One kind of knowledge consists of knowing a thing before it comes into existence; and the other kind consists of knowing it when, and as, it actually comes into existence. Here it is the latter kind of knowledge that is meant.
Commentary:
Elsewhere (in 3:166 below) it is said that Muslims inflicted upon disbelievers an injury double of what they themselves suffered. This refers to the Battle of Badr, when seventy Meccans were killed and seventy were taken prisoner, thus making a total of 140. In the Battle of Uhud, on the other hand, seventy Muslims were killed, but none of them were taken prisoner. Thus Muslims had inflicted on the disbelievers a double injury in the Battle of Badr compared with what they themselves suffered in the Battle of Uhud. Counting, however, only those killed in the two battles, the loss to Muslims and disbelievers has been spoken of in the present verse as similar. Or the verse might be taken to refer to the nature or quality of the misfortune, which was alike in both cases. In that case, verse 166 below might be taken to refer to quantity and the present verse to quality.
The word "days" is used both for the "days of success" and the "days of misfortune". Here either of these may be taken, but preferably the latter.
The words, And such days We cause to alternate, mean that even believers sometimes suffer reverses. If it were not so, then there would be little credit in being a believer. No effort is required to find or see the sun, and so one deserves no reward for it. In matters of faith, therefore, there is always present an element of secrecy, and only those who are seriously and earnestly desirous of knowing the truth discern and accept it. Hence, they become deserving of reward in the sight of God. The words also implied a prophecy that the reverse at Uhud was to be followed by victory for the Muslims; and so it actually came to pass.
The words, Allah may distinguish those who believe, signify that misfortunes are also intended to make the faith of true believers evident to all. When believers endure trials with patience and steadfastness and do not swerve from the path of faith, their sincerity becomes evident. Trials also serve to distinguish true believers from hypocrites. If there had been no trials, the hypocrisy of men like ‘Abdullah bin Ubayy and his associates would have remained undetected and unknown.
The word شھداء (witnesses) does not here mean martyrs, for a true Muslim is always a martyr if killed in the cause of God. Moreover, there is no sense in saying that the reverse at Uhud was meant to take martyrs from among Muslims. Here, therefore, the word means witnesses. The Faithful bear witness to the truth of Islam by their steadfastness and by the noble example they set in times of misfortune. They are eloquent witnesses to the truth of Islam.
The word unjust at the end of the verse signifies that in view of the facts stated above, it is unjust to find fault with Islam on the basis of such reverses.
h
4:105.
280
另外3:166说穆斯林使不信者受到的创伤是他们自己所遭受的两倍。这是指白德尔战役, 当时七十个麦加人战死, 七十人被俘, 总计一百四十人。相反, 在吴侯德战役中, 七十个穆斯林阵亡, 但没有被俘。这样, 与穆斯林自己在吴侯德战役中所受创伤相比铰, 他们使不信者在白德尔战役中遭到了两倍的创伤。然而, 只计算一下两场战役中战死者的数目, 则本节经文提到的穆斯林和不信者的损失是一样的。也可以认为本节经文指的是灾难的性质, 这在双方面是一样的。因此, 下面第166节经文可以被认为是指 (灾难的) 数量, 而这节经文是指损失的质量。
a
4:105.
424
Important Words:
یعلم (distinguish) is derived from علم which ordinarily means, he knew, but is also used in the sense of distinguishing. Ibn Jarir says under this verse that the expression لا علم عبد الله من عمر means, لاعرف ھذا من ھذا i.e. that I may distinguish ‘Abdullah from ‘Umar. The word is used in this sense in 2:144 and 2:221 also. In fact, God, being Omniscient, does not stand in need of knowing a thing, for everything is ever known to Him. It is only distinguishing between two things that is meant. Even, however, if علم is taken here in the sense of knowing, the expression may be explained by the fact that knowledge is of two kinds. One kind of knowledge consists of knowing a thing before it comes into existence; and the other kind consists of knowing it when, and as, it actually comes into existence. Here it is the latter kind of knowledge that is meant.
Commentary:
Elsewhere (in 3:166 below) it is said that Muslims inflicted upon disbelievers an injury double of what they themselves suffered. This refers to the Battle of Badr, when seventy Meccans were killed and seventy were taken prisoner, thus making a total of 140. In the Battle of Uhud, on the other hand, seventy Muslims were killed, but none of them were taken prisoner. Thus Muslims had inflicted on the disbelievers a double injury in the Battle of Badr compared with what they themselves suffered in the Battle of Uhud. Counting, however, only those killed in the two battles, the loss to Muslims and disbelievers has been spoken of in the present verse as similar. Or the verse might be taken to refer to the nature or quality of the misfortune, which was alike in both cases. In that case, verse 166 below might be taken to refer to quantity and the present verse to quality.
The word "days" is used both for the "days of success" and the "days of misfortune". Here either of these may be taken, but preferably the latter.
The words, And such days We cause to alternate, mean that even believers sometimes suffer reverses. If it were not so, then there would be little credit in being a believer. No effort is required to find or see the sun, and so one deserves no reward for it. In matters of faith, therefore, there is always present an element of secrecy, and only those who are seriously and earnestly desirous of knowing the truth discern and accept it. Hence, they become deserving of reward in the sight of God. The words also implied a prophecy that the reverse at Uhud was to be followed by victory for the Muslims; and so it actually came to pass.
The words, Allah may distinguish those who believe, signify that misfortunes are also intended to make the faith of true believers evident to all. When believers endure trials with patience and steadfastness and do not swerve from the path of faith, their sincerity becomes evident. Trials also serve to distinguish true believers from hypocrites. If there had been no trials, the hypocrisy of men like ‘Abdullah bin Ubayy and his associates would have remained undetected and unknown.
The word شھداء (witnesses) does not here mean martyrs, for a true Muslim is always a martyr if killed in the cause of God. Moreover, there is no sense in saying that the reverse at Uhud was meant to take martyrs from among Muslims. Here, therefore, the word means witnesses. The Faithful bear witness to the truth of Islam by their steadfastness and by the noble example they set in times of misfortune. They are eloquent witnesses to the truth of Islam.
The word unjust at the end of the verse signifies that in view of the facts stated above, it is unjust to find fault with Islam on the basis of such reverses.
d
4:105.
488
Elsewhere (3:166), it is said that Muslims inflicted upon disbelievers an injury double of what they themselves had suffered. This refers to the Battle of Badr, when seventy Meccans were killed and seventy were taken prisoner, thus making a total of 140. In the Battle of Uhud, on the other hand, seventy Muslims were killed, but not one of them was taken prisoner. Thus Muslims had inflicted on the disbelievers a double injury in the Battle of Badr compared with what they themselves suffered in the Battle of Uhud. Taking into account, however, only those killed in the two battles, the loss of Muslims and disbelievers has been spoken of in the present verse as similar. Or the verse might be taken to refer to the nature or quality of the misfortune, which was alike in both cases. In that case verse 166 below might be taken to refer to the quantity and the present verse to the quality of the loss.
488A
"Days of prosperity" or days of misfortune."
489
God being Omniscient does not stand in need of adding to His knowledge. It is only the act of distinguishing between two things that is meant here. Knowledge (‘Ilm) is of two kinds. One kind of knowledge consists in knowing a thing before it comes into existence; and the other in knowing when, and as, it actually comes into existence. Here it is the latter kind of knowledge that is meant.
490
The Faithful bear witness to the truth of Islam by their steadfastness and by the noble example they set in time of misfortune.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ إِن تُطِيعُوا۟ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ يَرُدُّوكُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ فَتَنقَلِبُوا۟ خَٰسِرِينَ
2:110; 3:101.
Muslims are not enjoined to eschew dealings with all non-Muslims; they are warned against following only such disbelievers as are the active enemies of Islam.
2:110; 3:101.
Commentary:
It should be noted that Muslims are not enjoined here to have no dealings with non-Muslims; they are only warned against following such disbelievers as are enemies of Islam. They should remain on the alert against these, though they need not fear them, because God is on their side, as pointed out in the next verse.
e
2:110; 3:101.
284
穆斯林不曾受告诫要停止与所有非穆斯林人士来往。他们仅受警告切勿跟从那些与伊斯兰教对敌的不信者。
a
2:110; 3:101.
433
Commentary:
It should be noted that Muslims are not enjoined here to have no dealings with non-Muslims; they are only warned against following such disbelievers as are enemies of Islam. They should remain on the alert against these, though they need not fear them, because God is on their side, as pointed out in the next verse.
b
2:110; 3:101.
497
Muslims are not enjoined to eschew dealings with all non-Muslims; they are warned against following only such disbelievers as are the active enemies of Islam.
إِن يَنصُرْكُمُ ٱللَّهُ فَلَا غَالِبَ لَكُمْ ۖ وَإِن يَخْذُلْكُمْ فَمَن ذَا ٱلَّذِى يَنصُرُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِهِۦ ۗ وَعَلَى ٱللَّهِ فَلْيَتَوَكَّلِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ
The expression, Min Ba‘dihi, translated as, "beside Him," literally means, "after Him" and may be rendered as "in opposition to Him."
Commentary:
The words من بعدہ translated as, beside Him, literally mean "after Him" and may also be rendered as "in opposition to Him". The verse throws further light on the philosophy of توکل (trust in God). In spite of making use of the necessary means, a true believer should, and in fact does, put his trust in God alone.
443
Commentary:
The words من بعدہ translated as, beside Him, literally mean "after Him" and may also be rendered as "in opposition to Him". The verse throws further light on the philosophy of توکل (trust in God). In spite of making use of the necessary means, a true believer should, and in fact does, put his trust in God alone.
516
The expression, Min Ba‘dihi, translated as, "beside Him," literally means, "after Him" and may be rendered as "in opposition to Him."
ٱلَّذِينَ قَالُوا۟ لِإِخْوَٰنِهِمْ وَقَعَدُوا۟ لَوْ أَطَاعُونَا مَا قُتِلُوا۟ ۗ قُلْ فَٱدْرَءُوا۟ عَنْ أَنفُسِكُمُ ٱلْمَوْتَ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
3:155.
4:79.
The words "said of their brethren" may mean "said concerning their brethren," i.e. Muslims; or "talked among themselves about the Muslims."
3:155.
4:79.
Commentary:
The word اخوان (brethren) may refer to both the Muslims and the hypocrites. If taken to refer to the Muslims, the expression قالوا لاخوانھم (said of their brethren) would either mean, "said concerning their brethren, the Muslims", or it would mean, "said to their brethren, the Muslims." If, however, it is taken to refer to the hypocrites, the expression would mean, "said to their own brethren", i.e. talked among themselves.
The expression, Then avert death from yourselves, embodies a prophecy about the destruction of the hypocrites. The clause would thus signify, "You stayed in your homes in order to save yourselves. Now, the time of your destruction has arrived. So protect yourselves if you can."
a
4:79.
d
3:155.
a
3:155.
b
4:79.
451
Commentary:
The word اخوان (brethren) may refer to both the Muslims and the hypocrites. If taken to refer to the Muslims, the expression قالوا لاخوانھم (said of their brethren) would either mean, "said concerning their brethren, the Muslims", or it would mean, "said to their brethren, the Muslims." If, however, it is taken to refer to the hypocrites, the expression would mean, "said to their own brethren", i.e. talked among themselves.
The expression, Then avert death from yourselves, embodies a prophecy about the destruction of the hypocrites. The clause would thus signify, "You stayed in your homes in order to save yourselves. Now, the time of your destruction has arrived. So protect yourselves if you can."
a
3:155.
b
4:79.
526
The words "said of their brethren" may mean "said concerning their brethren," i.e. Muslims; or "talked among themselves about the Muslims."
إِنَّمَا ذَٰلِكُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ يُخَوِّفُ أَوْلِيَآءَهُۥ فَلَا تَخَافُوهُمْ وَخَافُونِ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
7:28; 16:101; 35:7.
Commentary:
The expression یخوف اولیاءہ rendered in the text as, Satan only frightens his friends, may mean: (1) Satan tries to make believers fear disbelievers, who are his friends; (2) he frightens disbelievers themselves, i.e. he becomes the cause of their fear, for the friends of Satan can never be brave. In the latter case the pronoun "them" in, so fear them not, would refer to the noun الناس (people) in 3:174 above.
a
7:28; 16:101; 35:7.
291
这句话的意思是:(1) 恶魔妄图使信者畏惧不信 (道) 者--------他的朋友。(2) 恶魔通过其计谋恫吓的只是他的朋友--------不信 (道) 者。
b
7:28; 16:101; 35:7.
458
Commentary:
The expression یخوف اولیاءہ rendered in the text as, Satan only frightens his friends, may mean: (1) Satan tries to make believers fear disbelievers, who are his friends; (2) he frightens disbelievers themselves, i.e. he becomes the cause of their fear, for the friends of Satan can never be brave. In the latter case the pronoun "them" in, so fear them not, would refer to the noun الناس (people) in 3:174 above.
b
7:28; 16:101; 35:7.
532
The words mean: (1) Satan tries to make believers fear disbelievers who are his friends. (2) By his plans Satan succeeds in frightening only his friends, the disbelievers.
ٱلَّذِينَ قَالُوٓا۟ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ عَهِدَ إِلَيْنَآ أَلَّا نُؤْمِنَ لِرَسُولٍ حَتَّىٰ يَأْتِيَنَا بِقُرْبَانٍ تَأْكُلُهُ ٱلنَّارُ ۗ قُلْ قَدْ جَآءَكُمْ رُسُلٌ مِّن قَبْلِى بِٱلْبَيِّنَٰتِ وَبِٱلَّذِى قُلْتُمْ فَلِمَ قَتَلْتُمُوهُمْ إِن كُنتُمْ صَٰدِقِينَ
مراد یہ نہیں کہ آگ کہیں سے آکر اسے بھسم کر دیتی تھی بلکہ مراد اس قربانی سے تھی جو آگ میں جلا دی جاتی اور اسے سوختنی قربانی کہا جاتا تھا۔ ایسی قربانی کا رواج ہندوؤں، ایرانیوں اور یہود میں بہت تھا۔
5:33; 14:10; 40:84.
The verse answers the objection of the Jews about the burnt offerings by saying that the observance of the law regarding such offerings was no criterion to test the truth of a Prophet, because that could easily be done by an impostor. It was only "clear signs" that demonstrated and established the truth of a claimant. But even if observance of burnt offerings was the criterion of a true Prophet, the Jews had no right to raise an objection. The charge is driven home to them in the words, "Why did they reject those Prophets who strictly conformed to that law?"
5:33; 14:10; 40:84.
Commentary:
The enemies of truth never admit their defeat. They continue to seek new pretexts for refusing to believe in it. When the Jews were told that they had opposed the Prophets of God through covetousness (3:181-182), they retorted by saying that they did not oppose Muslims through covetousness but because, animals unlike them, the Muslims devoured even that which they offered as sacrifices, instead of burning them at the altar according to the Jewish Law (Lev. 1:11-17). Thus, it was not they but the Muslims who were greedy and covetous and they could not, therefore, consistently with the Law of Moses, accept the Prophet who did not observe that Law.
The Quran answers this objection by saying that the observance of the law about burnt offerings was no criterion to test the truth of a Prophet, because that could easily be done by an impostor. It was البینات (clear signs) only that demonstrated and established the truth of a claimant. But even if observance of burnt offerings was the criterion of a true Prophet, the Jews had no right to raise an objection; for in that case the question arose, why did they reject those Prophets who strictly conformed to that law? The fact that the Jewish demand referred to in the words, that which you speak of, has been mentioned in the verse separately from clear signs, shows that what the Jews spoke of was not a miracle, but that they were only referring to the law about burnt offerings, and not to the miracle of fire descending from heaven to consume a sacrifice, as is generally but wrongly believed.
a
5:33; 14:10; 40:84.
296
本节经文回答了犹太人反对火焚供品的理由。经文说, 遵守有关这种供品的法规绝不是考验先知的真诚的标准, 因为骗子也能轻而易举的做到这一点。只有 “明显的迹象” 才能证实宣称者的真诚。但即使遵守火焚供品是考验一个真诚的先知的标准, 犹太人也没有权利提出反对。这句话可使他们了解他们是应该谴责的; “他们为什么要否认那些严格遵守那条法规的先知?”
1
مراد یہ نہیں کہ آگ کہیں سے آکر اسے بھسم کر دیتی تھی بلکہ مراد اس قربانی سے تھی جو آگ میں جلا دی جاتی اور اسے سوختنی قربانی کہا جاتا تھا۔ ایسی قربانی کا رواج ہندوؤں، ایرانیوں اور یہود میں بہت تھا۔
b
5:33; 14:10; 40:84.
466
Commentary:
The enemies of truth never admit their defeat. They continue to seek new pretexts for refusing to believe in it. When the Jews were told that they had opposed the Prophets of God through covetousness (3:181-182), they retorted by saying that they did not oppose Muslims through covetousness but because, animals unlike them, the Muslims devoured even that which they offered as sacrifices, instead of burning them at the altar according to the Jewish Law (Lev. 1:11-17). Thus, it was not they but the Muslims who were greedy and covetous and they could not, therefore, consistently with the Law of Moses, accept the Prophet who did not observe that Law.
The Quran answers this objection by saying that the observance of the law about burnt offerings was no criterion to test the truth of a Prophet, because that could easily be done by an impostor. It was البینات (clear signs) only that demonstrated and established the truth of a claimant. But even if observance of burnt offerings was the criterion of a true Prophet, the Jews had no right to raise an objection; for in that case the question arose, why did they reject those Prophets who strictly conformed to that law? The fact that the Jewish demand referred to in the words, that which you speak of, has been mentioned in the verse separately from clear signs, shows that what the Jews spoke of was not a miracle, but that they were only referring to the law about burnt offerings, and not to the miracle of fire descending from heaven to consume a sacrifice, as is generally but wrongly believed.
a
5:33; 14:10; 40:84.
539
The verse answers the objection of the Jews about the burnt offerings by saying that the observance of the law regarding such offerings was no criterion to test the truth of a Prophet, because that could easily be done by an impostor. It was only "clear signs" that demonstrated and established the truth of a claimant. But even if observance of burnt offerings was the criterion of a true Prophet, the Jews had no right to raise an objection. The charge is driven home to them in the words, "Why did they reject those Prophets who strictly conformed to that law?"
يُوصِيكُمُ ٱللَّهُ فِىٓ أَوْلَٰدِكُمْ ۖ لِلذَّكَرِ مِثْلُ حَظِّ ٱلْأُنثَيَيْنِ ۚ فَإِن كُنَّ نِسَآءً فَوْقَ ٱثْنَتَيْنِ فَلَهُنَّ ثُلُثَا مَا تَرَكَ ۖ وَإِن كَانَتْ وَٰحِدَةً فَلَهَا ٱلنِّصْفُ ۚ وَلِأَبَوَيْهِ لِكُلِّ وَٰحِدٍ مِّنْهُمَا ٱلسُّدُسُ مِمَّا تَرَكَ إِن كَانَ لَهُۥ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَإِن لَّمْ يَكُن لَّهُۥ وَلَدٌ وَوَرِثَهُۥٓ أَبَوَاهُ فَلِأُمِّهِ ٱلثُّلُثُ ۚ فَإِن كَانَ لَهُۥٓ إِخْوَةٌ فَلِأُمِّهِ ٱلسُّدُسُ ۚ مِنۢ بَعْدِ وَصِيَّةٍ يُوصِى بِهَآ أَوْ دَيْنٍ ۗ ءَابَآؤُكُمْ وَأَبْنَآؤُكُمْ لَا تَدْرُونَ أَيُّهُمْ أَقْرَبُ لَكُمْ نَفْعًا ۚ فَرِيضَةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
4:177.
这节经文规定一个死者的近亲不论男女或出生的先后应得他遗产的份额。儿女、双亲、丈夫与妻子是主要继承人, 如果他们活着, 不论在什么情况下应得自己的一份, 其他有名份的亲戚只能在特殊情况下得到他们的一份。男的比女的应得的份额要多一倍, 因为他们负责维持家计 (مَعَانِی, Ma‘ani, ii.P.32)。这节经文开始时制定关于子女所得份额的比例的一般法则。一个儿子应得等于两个女儿的份额。因此, 凡是儿子和女儿都有的情况下, 就按这一法则办事。如果只有女儿而没有儿子, 经文规定把遗产的三分之二分给两个以上的女儿; 把二分之一给独生女。如果是两个女儿那应该分得多少, 经文没明确说明。但此句中用一个连接词 ف (fa, 但是), “但是如果有两个以上的女儿”, 这清楚地指出两个女儿已包括在前面 “两个女儿” 这几个字中。而且两个女人应得的份数可以在这节经文开始时所说的男女应得份数的比例中推想出来。按照那个比例, 一个儿子可得两个女儿的份数。因此, 如果有一个儿子和一个女儿, 那个儿子可得三分之二的遗产。可是, 由于一个儿子可得等于 “两个女儿” 的份额, 因此没有儿子而有两个女儿的情况下可得三分之二, 即等于经文明确说明给三个女儿相同的份额。因此, 这节经文的结构表明, 如果死者有两个女儿而没有儿子, 她们像有三个女儿的情况那样也可得三分之二的遗产。假如 «古兰经» 的这一句并不指两个女儿应得的份额, 那么, 这句用字就应该像这样, “一个男人应得一个女人两倍的份额”, 而不是像现在那样的句子。关于双亲的份额经文中谈了三种情况: (1) 如果一个人死了留下一个或几个儿女, 那么, 父母亲中每个人应得六分之一。(2) 如果一个人死后无儿女, 他的父母是惟一继承人 (死者没有妻子或丈夫), 那么, 母亲应得三分之一的财产, 其馀的三分之二归父亲所有。(3) 还有第三种情况, 实际上是第二种情况的例外。一个人死后无嗣, 他的父母亲是惟一的继承人, 但他有兄弟姐妹, 那么, 虽然他的兄弟姐妹不能继承他的财产, 但他们的存在会影响他父母亲的份额, 因为, 在这种情况下, 母亲将得六分之一 (不是像第二种情况那样得三份之一), 其余的六分之五归父亲所有。父亲在这种情况下被授予较大的份额的理由是, 父亲还要负担死者兄弟姐妹的生活。关于继承权的这一论题, 在随后的经文中继续谈下去。
4:177.
Father and mother both (Lane).
Walad means, (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. The word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
The verse prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of his family (Ma‘ani, ii. p.32). The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So, wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two- thirds of the legacy to the daughters, if there are more than two of them; and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters in case there are two is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction fa’ (but) in the clause, but if there be
4:177.
Important Words:
ابویه (his parents) is really ابوینه, the letter ن being dropped owing to اضافة. The word ابوین is the genitive of ابوان which is the dual form of اب which is originally ابو meaning, father or grandfather or any male ancestor or paternal uncle. ابوانliterally meaning "two fathers" signifies "father and mother" (Lane).
ولد (child) is very general in its significance meaning: (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. Thus the word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse combined with the last verse of the Surah give the Islamic law of inheritance in a nutshell.
Islam prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of the family (Ma‘ani, vol. ii, p. 32).
The Islamic law of inheritance is perfect and it safeguards against all evils that result from laws prescribed by, or in vogue in, other faiths and communities. It aims at a fair distribution of wealth and equal chances of progress for all. To give the property of a deceased parent to the firstborn son only or to exclude the female members from inheritance or to disinherit parents in the presence of children has proved a veritable curse for society in many ways—moral, social and economic. The Islamic law of inheritance, reinforced by the system of Zakah (prescribed alms) and by the injunction prohibiting the giving and taking of interest, provides a golden mean between capitalism and communism—the two evil extremes of the present-day economic system.
The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two-thirds of the legacy to the daughters if there are more than two of them, and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters, in case there are two, is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction فا (but) in the clause, but if there be females only, numbering more than two, clearly points to the fact that the share of two females has been referred to in the preceding words "two females". Moreover, the share of two females can be gathered from what has already been said in the beginning of the verse about the ratio between the shares of the males and the females. According to that ratio, a son is to get as much as two daughters. Thus, if there be one son and one daughter, the son will have two-thirds. But as the share of one son has been made equal to that of "two daughters", the latter, in case there is no son, will have two-thirds, viz., the same share as has been expressly fixed for three daughters. Thus, the very construction of the verse shows that if there be two daughters and no son, they too, as in the case of three daughters, will get two-thirds. If it had not been the object of the Quran to point to the share of two daughters in the clause, it would have been something like this, "a male shall have twice as much as a female", and not as it is now.
The above meaning is corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet himself. It is related that when a Companion of the Holy Prophet named Sa‘d bin Rabi‘ah died in the Battle of Uhud, leaving two daughters and one widow, his brother took away the whole property, leaving nothing for the two daughters. Thereupon the widow of Sa‘d went to the Holy Prophet and said, "Here are the two daughters of Sa‘d. Their uncle has taken the whole of his property and has left nothing for them." The Holy Prophet told her to wait till God should decide the matter. Then this verse was revealed and the Prophet called upon Sa‘d’s brother to give two-thirds of Sa‘d’s property to his two daughters and one-eighth to their mother and keep the rest for himself (Tirmidhi & Dawud).
The verse speaks of three cases as regards the share of the parents: (1) If a person dies leaving one or more children, then each of his parents shall have one-sixth; (2) If a person dies issueless and his parents are the sole heirs (there being no wife or husband of the deceased person), then the mother will have one-third of the property and the remaining two-thirds will go to the father; (3) There is a third case, which is really an exception to the second case. A man dies without issue and his parents are his sole heirs, but he has brothers or sisters. Then, although his brother or sisters will not inherit from him, yet their presence will affect the share of the parents, for, in this case, the mother will have one-sixth (instead of one-third, as in the second case) and the remaining five-sixths will go to the father. The reason why the father is awarded a larger share in this case is that the father has also to support the brothers or sisters of the deceased. The subject of inheritance is continued in the succeeding verse.
b
4:177.
314
这节经文规定一个死者的近亲不论男女或出生的先后应得他遗产的份额。儿女、双亲、丈夫与妻子是主要继承人, 如果他们活着, 不论在什么情况下应得自己的一份, 其他有名份的亲戚只能在特殊情况下得到他们的一份。男的比女的应得的份额要多一倍, 因为他们负责维持家计 (مَعَانِی, Ma‘ani, ii.P.32)。这节经文开始时制定关于子女所得份额的比例的一般法则。一个儿子应得等于两个女儿的份额。因此, 凡是儿子和女儿都有的情况下, 就按这一法则办事。如果只有女儿而没有儿子, 经文规定把遗产的三分之二分给两个以上的女儿; 把二分之一给独生女。如果是两个女儿那应该分得多少, 经文没明确说明。但此句中用一个连接词 ف (fa, 但是), “但是如果有两个以上的女儿”, 这清楚地指出两个女儿已包括在前面 “两个女儿” 这几个字中。而且两个女人应得的份数可以在这节经文开始时所说的男女应得份数的比例中推想出来。按照那个比例, 一个儿子可得两个女儿的份数。因此, 如果有一个儿子和一个女儿, 那个儿子可得三分之二的遗产。可是, 由于一个儿子可得等于 “两个女儿” 的份额, 因此没有儿子而有两个女儿的情况下可得三分之二, 即等于经文明确说明给三个女儿相同的份额。因此, 这节经文的结构表明, 如果死者有两个女儿而没有儿子, 她们像有三个女儿的情况那样也可得三分之二的遗产。假如 «古兰经» 的这一句并不指两个女儿应得的份额, 那么, 这句用字就应该像这样, “一个男人应得一个女人两倍的份额”, 而不是像现在那样的句子。关于双亲的份额经文中谈了三种情况: (1) 如果一个人死了留下一个或几个儿女, 那么, 父母亲中每个人应得六分之一。(2) 如果一个人死后无儿女, 他的父母是惟一继承人 (死者没有妻子或丈夫), 那么, 母亲应得三分之一的财产, 其馀的三分之二归父亲所有。(3) 还有第三种情况, 实际上是第二种情况的例外。一个人死后无嗣, 他的父母亲是惟一的继承人, 但他有兄弟姐妹, 那么, 虽然他的兄弟姐妹不能继承他的财产, 但他们的存在会影响他父母亲的份额, 因为, 在这种情况下, 母亲将得六分之一 (不是像第二种情况那样得三份之一), 其余的六分之五归父亲所有。父亲在这种情况下被授予较大的份额的理由是, 父亲还要负担死者兄弟姐妹的生活。关于继承权的这一论题, 在随后的经文中继续谈下去。
b
4:177.
494
Important Words:
ابویه (his parents) is really ابوینه, the letter ن being dropped owing to اضافة. The word ابوین is the genitive of ابوان which is the dual form of اب which is originally ابو meaning, father or grandfather or any male ancestor or paternal uncle. ابوانliterally meaning "two fathers" signifies "father and mother" (Lane).
ولد (child) is very general in its significance meaning: (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. Thus the word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
Commentary:
This and the succeeding verse combined with the last verse of the Surah give the Islamic law of inheritance in a nutshell.
Islam prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of the family (Ma‘ani, vol. ii, p. 32).
The Islamic law of inheritance is perfect and it safeguards against all evils that result from laws prescribed by, or in vogue in, other faiths and communities. It aims at a fair distribution of wealth and equal chances of progress for all. To give the property of a deceased parent to the firstborn son only or to exclude the female members from inheritance or to disinherit parents in the presence of children has proved a veritable curse for society in many ways—moral, social and economic. The Islamic law of inheritance, reinforced by the system of Zakah (prescribed alms) and by the injunction prohibiting the giving and taking of interest, provides a golden mean between capitalism and communism—the two evil extremes of the present-day economic system.
The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two-thirds of the legacy to the daughters if there are more than two of them, and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters, in case there are two, is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction فا (but) in the clause, but if there be females only, numbering more than two, clearly points to the fact that the share of two females has been referred to in the preceding words "two females". Moreover, the share of two females can be gathered from what has already been said in the beginning of the verse about the ratio between the shares of the males and the females. According to that ratio, a son is to get as much as two daughters. Thus, if there be one son and one daughter, the son will have two-thirds. But as the share of one son has been made equal to that of "two daughters", the latter, in case there is no son, will have two-thirds, viz., the same share as has been expressly fixed for three daughters. Thus, the very construction of the verse shows that if there be two daughters and no son, they too, as in the case of three daughters, will get two-thirds. If it had not been the object of the Quran to point to the share of two daughters in the clause, it would have been something like this, "a male shall have twice as much as a female", and not as it is now.
The above meaning is corroborated by a saying of the Holy Prophet himself. It is related that when a Companion of the Holy Prophet named Sa‘d bin Rabi‘ah died in the Battle of Uhud, leaving two daughters and one widow, his brother took away the whole property, leaving nothing for the two daughters. Thereupon the widow of Sa‘d went to the Holy Prophet and said, "Here are the two daughters of Sa‘d. Their uncle has taken the whole of his property and has left nothing for them." The Holy Prophet told her to wait till God should decide the matter. Then this verse was revealed and the Prophet called upon Sa‘d’s brother to give two-thirds of Sa‘d’s property to his two daughters and one-eighth to their mother and keep the rest for himself (Tirmidhi & Dawud).
The verse speaks of three cases as regards the share of the parents: (1) If a person dies leaving one or more children, then each of his parents shall have one-sixth; (2) If a person dies issueless and his parents are the sole heirs (there being no wife or husband of the deceased person), then the mother will have one-third of the property and the remaining two-thirds will go to the father; (3) There is a third case, which is really an exception to the second case. A man dies without issue and his parents are his sole heirs, but he has brothers or sisters. Then, although his brother or sisters will not inherit from him, yet their presence will affect the share of the parents, for, in this case, the mother will have one-sixth (instead of one-third, as in the second case) and the remaining five-sixths will go to the father. The reason why the father is awarded a larger share in this case is that the father has also to support the brothers or sisters of the deceased. The subject of inheritance is continued in the succeeding verse.
b
4:177.
573
Father and mother both (Lane).
574
Walad means, (1) a child, son, daughter or a young one; (2) children, sons, daughters, offspring or young ones. The word is used both as singular and plural, feminine and masculine (Lane).
574A
The verse prescribes suitable shares for all near relatives in the property of a deceased person without distinction of sex or order of birth. Children, parents, husbands and wives are the principal heirs who, if alive, get suitable shares in all circumstances, other relations having a title only in special cases. A male has been given double the share of a female because he has been made responsible for the maintenance of his family (Ma‘ani, ii. p.32). The verse begins by laying down a general rule as to the proportion of shares between sons and daughters. A son is to have as much as two daughters. So, wherever there are both sons and daughters, this rule will come in force. When, however, there are only daughters and no son, the verse allots two- thirds of the legacy to the daughters, if there are more than two of them; and one-half if there is only one. The share of daughters in case there are two is not expressly stated. But the use of the conjunction fa’ (but) in the clause, but if there be
۞ وَلَكُمْ نِصْفُ مَا تَرَكَ أَزْوَٰجُكُمْ إِن لَّمْ يَكُن لَّهُنَّ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَإِن كَانَ لَهُنَّ وَلَدٌ فَلَكُمُ ٱلرُّبُعُ مِمَّا تَرَكْنَ ۚ مِنۢ بَعْدِ وَصِيَّةٍ يُوصِينَ بِهَآ أَوْ دَيْنٍ ۚ وَلَهُنَّ ٱلرُّبُعُ مِمَّا تَرَكْتُمْ إِن لَّمْ يَكُن لَّكُمْ وَلَدٌ ۚ فَإِن كَانَ لَكُمْ وَلَدٌ فَلَهُنَّ ٱلثُّمُنُ مِمَّا تَرَكْتُم ۚ مِّنۢ بَعْدِ وَصِيَّةٍ تُوصُونَ بِهَآ أَوْ دَيْنٍ ۗ وَإِن كَانَ رَجُلٌ يُورَثُ كَلَٰلَةً أَوِ ٱمْرَأَةٌ وَلَهُۥٓ أَخٌ أَوْ أُخْتٌ فَلِكُلِّ وَٰحِدٍ مِّنْهُمَا ٱلسُّدُسُ ۚ فَإِن كَانُوٓا۟ أَكْثَرَ مِن ذَٰلِكَ فَهُمْ شُرَكَآءُ فِى ٱلثُّلُثِ ۚ مِنۢ بَعْدِ وَصِيَّةٍ يُوصَىٰ بِهَآ أَوْ دَيْنٍ غَيْرَ مُضَآرٍّ ۚ وَصِيَّةً مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ عَلِيمٌ حَلِيمٌ
4:177.
كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 是 (1) 一个身后没有父母, 也没有子女的人; (2) 一个既没有父亲, 也没有儿子的人。根据伊本•阿巴斯的解释, 他是一个没有儿子的人, 不管他的父亲是否活着。因此这里是该词的第三个词义 (Lane & مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat) Kalalah 的兄弟姐妹归三类: 第一类, 真正的兄弟姐妹--------同父母的子女 (这类兄弟姐妹从法律方面说称之为 اَعْيَانِی --------A‘yani); 第二类, 单属父亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 这类兄弟姐妹 (法律上称之为 عَلَّاتِی --------‘Allati); 第三类, 单属母亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 他 (她) 们的父亲与死者的父亲不是同一父亲 (这类兄弟姐妹法律上称之为 اَخْيَافِی --------Akhyafi)。在本节经文中所列举的指令正是属于上述最后一类;关于前两类兄弟姐妹的法律将在本章的最后一节经文中提到。分配给上述最后一类兄弟姐妹的份额比分配给前二类兄弟姐妹的份额要少, 理由是这一类兄弟姐妹单属母亲一方, 而另两类兄弟姐妹则属于与死者同一父亲的子女。在作为 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 死去的人的财产中, 兄弟姐妹享有相等的分配份额, 在此情况下, 通常不按二比一之比例。
“不要立意损害任何人” 这句话很重要。意思是偿还债务不应由于分配遗产而受到损害。换句话说, 在分配遗产之前要先偿还债务。
کلالہ کے جن بہن بھائیوں کے وارث ہونے کی صورت بیان کی گئی ہے‘ وہ بہن بھائی ہیں جو ماں کی طرف سے ہوں۔
4:177.
Kalalah is (1) a person who leaves behind neither parent nor child, male or female; (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn-e-‘Abbas he is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of the word (Lane & Mufradat). The brothers and sisters of a Kalalah fall under three heads: first, real brothers or sisters—offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as A‘yani): secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as ‘Allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters are technically called Akhyafi). It is to the last mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters having been given i
The words. "without intent to cause injury to any one" are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests.
4:177.
Important Words:
کلالة (one who has neither parent nor child) is derived from کل i.e. he was or became fatigued, tired or wearied and could proceed no further; he was or became one having no child and no parent, the latter meaning being based on the former, as a person having no child or parent becomes, as it were, too fatigued for the racial march. کلالة is (1) a person who leaves behind neither father nor child, male or female; or (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn ‘Abbas, کلالة is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of کلالة (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The first part of this verse determines the share of the husband and the wife in inheritance and needs no comment. The latter part deals with the case of a Kalalah, i.e. one who leaves neither parent nor child and whose property is inherited by his or her brother and sister. Now, if there is only one brother and one sister, each of them will get one-sixth. But if they are more than that, they will be sharers in one-third.
It should, however, be noted that in this respect brothers and sisters fall under three heads; firstly, real brothers or sisters, offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as اعیانی a‘yani); secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as علاتی ‘allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters being technically called اخیافی akhyafi). It is to the last-mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters being given in the last verse of this Surah.
The reader will further note that the shares allotted to the brothers and sisters of the last-mentioned class are smaller than those allotted to the brothers and sisters of the first two classes, the reason being that the brothers and sisters of this class are on the side of the mother only, while the brothers and the sisters of the other two classes are the children of the same father as the deceased.
It is also noteworthy that in the property of a person who dies as a Kalalah, as mentioned in the present verse, both brothers and sisters have equal shares, the usual ratio of two to one not being observed in their case.
The words, "without prejudice to the debt", are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests. It was in compliance with this Quranic injunction that the Holy Prophet used to have the debts paid before the payment of bequests. The rights of other people must be safeguarded before any bequest made by the deceased is complied with. So strict was the Holy Prophet in these matters that he refused to perform the funeral service of the man whose debts were likely to remain unpaid.
It may incidentally be noted here that heirs are divided into two main groups:
1. ذووالفرائض (Dhawul-Fara’id), i.e. persons to whom Islam allots a fixed and definite share (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 2/3, 1/3 or 1/6), or in the estate of a deceased person.
2. عصبات (‘Asabat), i.e. the heirs who receive the residue after the Dhawul-Fara’id have received their allotted shares.
It is, however, not necessary that a member of the first group should always remain a Dhul-Faridah. In certain cases, he may be both a Dhul-Faridah (sharer) and an ‘Asaba (residuary) and in other cases he may be simply an ‘Asaba.
The Dhawul-Fara’id (sharers) are 12 in number, four males and eight females. The males are: 1. father, 2. paternal grandfather, 3. husband and 4. half-brother on the maternal side. The females are: (1) daughter, (2) son’s daughter, (3) mother, (4) wife, (5) full sister, (6) half-sister on paternal side, (7) half-sister on maternal side, and (8) grandmother whether paternal or maternal.
The ‘Asabat (residuaries) are of four kinds: (1) ascendants of the deceased, i.e. father, paternal grandfather, etc. (2) descendants of the deceased, i.e. son, son’s son, etc. (3) descendants of the father of the deceased, i.e. full brother, brother’s son, etc. (4) descendants of the grandfather, i.e. full paternal uncle, paternal uncle’s son, etc.
a
4:177.
315
كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 是 (1) 一个身后没有父母, 也没有子女的人; (2) 一个既没有父亲, 也没有儿子的人。根据伊本•阿巴斯的解释, 他是一个没有儿子的人, 不管他的父亲是否活着。因此这里是该词的第三个词义 (Lane & مُفْرَدَات, Mufradat) Kalalah 的兄弟姐妹归三类: 第一类, 真正的兄弟姐妹--------同父母的子女 (这类兄弟姐妹从法律方面说称之为 اَعْيَانِی --------A‘yani); 第二类, 单属父亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 这类兄弟姐妹 (法律上称之为 عَلَّاتِی --------‘Allati); 第三类, 单属母亲一方的兄弟姐妹, 他 (她) 们的父亲与死者的父亲不是同一父亲 (这类兄弟姐妹法律上称之为 اَخْيَافِی --------Akhyafi)。在本节经文中所列举的指令正是属于上述最后一类;关于前两类兄弟姐妹的法律将在本章的最后一节经文中提到。分配给上述最后一类兄弟姐妹的份额比分配给前二类兄弟姐妹的份额要少, 理由是这一类兄弟姐妹单属母亲一方, 而另两类兄弟姐妹则属于与死者同一父亲的子女。在作为 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 死去的人的财产中, 兄弟姐妹享有相等的分配份额, 在此情况下, 通常不按二比一之比例。
316
“不要立意损害任何人” 这句话很重要。意思是偿还债务不应由于分配遗产而受到损害。换句话说, 在分配遗产之前要先偿还债务。
1
کلالہ کے جن بہن بھائیوں کے وارث ہونے کی صورت بیان کی گئی ہے‘ وہ بہن بھائی ہیں جو ماں کی طرف سے ہوں۔
a
4:177.
495
Important Words:
کلالة (one who has neither parent nor child) is derived from کل i.e. he was or became fatigued, tired or wearied and could proceed no further; he was or became one having no child and no parent, the latter meaning being based on the former, as a person having no child or parent becomes, as it were, too fatigued for the racial march. کلالة is (1) a person who leaves behind neither father nor child, male or female; or (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn ‘Abbas, کلالة is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of کلالة (Lane, Aqrab & Mufradat).
Commentary:
The first part of this verse determines the share of the husband and the wife in inheritance and needs no comment. The latter part deals with the case of a Kalalah, i.e. one who leaves neither parent nor child and whose property is inherited by his or her brother and sister. Now, if there is only one brother and one sister, each of them will get one-sixth. But if they are more than that, they will be sharers in one-third.
It should, however, be noted that in this respect brothers and sisters fall under three heads; firstly, real brothers or sisters, offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as اعیانی a‘yani); secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as علاتی ‘allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters being technically called اخیافی akhyafi). It is to the last-mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters being given in the last verse of this Surah.
The reader will further note that the shares allotted to the brothers and sisters of the last-mentioned class are smaller than those allotted to the brothers and sisters of the first two classes, the reason being that the brothers and sisters of this class are on the side of the mother only, while the brothers and the sisters of the other two classes are the children of the same father as the deceased.
It is also noteworthy that in the property of a person who dies as a Kalalah, as mentioned in the present verse, both brothers and sisters have equal shares, the usual ratio of two to one not being observed in their case.
The words, "without prejudice to the debt", are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests. It was in compliance with this Quranic injunction that the Holy Prophet used to have the debts paid before the payment of bequests. The rights of other people must be safeguarded before any bequest made by the deceased is complied with. So strict was the Holy Prophet in these matters that he refused to perform the funeral service of the man whose debts were likely to remain unpaid.
It may incidentally be noted here that heirs are divided into two main groups:
1. ذووالفرائض (Dhawul-Fara’id), i.e. persons to whom Islam allots a fixed and definite share (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 2/3, 1/3 or 1/6), or in the estate of a deceased person.
2. عصبات (‘Asabat), i.e. the heirs who receive the residue after the Dhawul-Fara’id have received their allotted shares.
It is, however, not necessary that a member of the first group should always remain a Dhul-Faridah. In certain cases, he may be both a Dhul-Faridah (sharer) and an ‘Asaba (residuary) and in other cases he may be simply an ‘Asaba.
The Dhawul-Fara’id (sharers) are 12 in number, four males and eight females. The males are: 1. father, 2. paternal grandfather, 3. husband and 4. half-brother on the maternal side. The females are: (1) daughter, (2) son’s daughter, (3) mother, (4) wife, (5) full sister, (6) half-sister on paternal side, (7) half-sister on maternal side, and (8) grandmother whether paternal or maternal.
The ‘Asabat (residuaries) are of four kinds: (1) ascendants of the deceased, i.e. father, paternal grandfather, etc. (2) descendants of the deceased, i.e. son, son’s son, etc. (3) descendants of the father of the deceased, i.e. full brother, brother’s son, etc. (4) descendants of the grandfather, i.e. full paternal uncle, paternal uncle’s son, etc.
a
4:177.
575
Kalalah is (1) a person who leaves behind neither parent nor child, male or female; (2) a person who leaves behind neither father nor son. According to Ibn-e-‘Abbas he is a person who leaves no son irrespective of the fact whether his father is living or not. This would thus be the third meaning of the word (Lane & Mufradat). The brothers and sisters of a Kalalah fall under three heads: first, real brothers or sisters—offspring of the same parents (such brothers or sisters are technically known as A‘yani): secondly, brothers and sisters on the side of the father only (these are technically known as ‘Allati); thirdly, brothers and sisters on the side of the mother only, their father being not the same as that of the deceased (such brothers and sisters are technically called Akhyafi). It is to the last mentioned class that the commandment given in the present verse pertains; the law with regard to the first two classes of brothers and sisters having been given i
575A
The words. "without intent to cause injury to any one" are important. They mean that the payment of debts should not suffer by the payment of bequests. In other words, debts are to be paid prior to the payment of bequests.
إِن تَجْتَنِبُوا۟ كَبَآئِرَ مَا تُنْهَوْنَ عَنْهُ نُكَفِّرْ عَنكُمْ سَيِّـَٔاتِكُمْ وَنُدْخِلْكُم مُّدْخَلًا كَرِيمًا
42:38; 53:33.
42:38; 53:33.
There is no classification of less or more grievous sins in the Qur’an. The term is rather a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to avoid is grievous. The meaning of the verse seems to be that if a person avoids doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to him, he will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word Kaba’ir (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
42:38; 53:33.
Commentary:
Truly speaking, there is no classification of more grievous and less grievous sins in the Quran. Rather, the term is a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin, and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to shun is grievous. The meaning of the verse, therefore, is that if you avoid doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to you, the result will be that you will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word کبائر (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. For instance, a person contemplates committing a theft. Now, whereas the actual commitment of theft is "grievous", the preliminary acts leading up to it would be "minor evils." If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
c
42:38; 53:33.
a
42:38; 53:33.
509
Commentary:
Truly speaking, there is no classification of more grievous and less grievous sins in the Quran. Rather, the term is a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin, and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to shun is grievous. The meaning of the verse, therefore, is that if you avoid doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to you, the result will be that you will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word کبائر (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. For instance, a person contemplates committing a theft. Now, whereas the actual commitment of theft is "grievous", the preliminary acts leading up to it would be "minor evils." If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
a
42:38; 53:33.
594
There is no classification of less or more grievous sins in the Qur’an. The term is rather a relative one. The commission of anything forbidden by God is a sin and the commission of all sins which one finds difficult to avoid is grievous. The meaning of the verse seems to be that if a person avoids doing those things the giving up of which seems difficult and burdensome to him, he will be enabled to get rid of other sins as well. Some scholars interpret the word Kaba’ir (grievous sins) as signifying the last stage of each act of sin. If one restrains oneself from committing the final act, the preliminary ones will be forgiven him.
وَإِنْ خِفْتُمْ شِقَاقَ بَيْنِهِمَا فَٱبْعَثُوا۟ حَكَمًا مِّنْ أَهْلِهِۦ وَحَكَمًا مِّنْ أَهْلِهَآ إِن يُرِيدَآ إِصْلَٰحًا يُوَفِّقِ ٱللَّهُ بَيْنَهُمَآ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلِيمًا خَبِيرًا
4:129.
4:129.
The pronoun, "you" in the expression, "if you fear" refers to the Muslim State or to the whole community collectively or the people generally.
The arbiters should preferably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real causes of differences and because also it is easier for both parties to put their differences before them.
4:129.
Important Words:
حکما (arbiter) is fromحکم. They say حکمه i.e. he made him judge. حکمor حاکم means, one who judges, a judge, an arbiter, an arbitrator or umpire between people; a ruler or governor (Lane).
Commentary:
The pronoun, used in the plural number, in the expression إن خفتم (if you fear) refers to a Muslim State, or community, or the people generally. The arbiters should prefer-ably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real cause of differences and it is easier also for both parties to put their case before them. The verse makes it clear that Islam leaves no avenue unexplored to bring about reconciliation between husband and wife before it allows them to sever the tie of marriage.
a
4:129.
a
4:129.
513
Important Words:
حکما (arbiter) is fromحکم. They say حکمه i.e. he made him judge. حکمor حاکم means, one who judges, a judge, an arbiter, an arbitrator or umpire between people; a ruler or governor (Lane).
Commentary:
The pronoun, used in the plural number, in the expression إن خفتم (if you fear) refers to a Muslim State, or community, or the people generally. The arbiters should prefer-ably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real cause of differences and it is easier also for both parties to put their case before them. The verse makes it clear that Islam leaves no avenue unexplored to bring about reconciliation between husband and wife before it allows them to sever the tie of marriage.
a
4:129.
602
The pronoun, "you" in the expression, "if you fear" refers to the Muslim State or to the whole community collectively or the people generally.
603
The arbiters should preferably be chosen from the relations of the contending parties, because they are expected to be acquainted with the real causes of differences and because also it is easier for both parties to put their differences before them.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ أَطِيعُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَأَطِيعُوا۟ ٱلرَّسُولَ وَأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَمْرِ مِنكُمْ ۖ فَإِن تَنَٰزَعْتُمْ فِى شَىْءٍ فَرُدُّوهُ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ وَٱلرَّسُولِ إِن كُنتُمْ تُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ وَٱلْيَوْمِ ٱلْءَاخِرِ ۚ ذَٰلِكَ خَيْرٌ وَأَحْسَنُ تَأْوِيلًا
4:84.
4:66.
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
4:84
4:66
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
4:84.
4:66.
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
332
为了指出对由法律恰当地指定的权威的服从就是对安拉和安拉的使者的服从, “服从” 这词是重复用在 “安拉” 和 “使者” 这两词前面, 而在那些 “当权的” 字句前面这词是省略的。体现在 “把它交给安拉和安拉的使者” 这句话中的指令可以指统治者之间的分歧, 也可以指被统治者内部的分歧。就前者而言就是, 如果统治者与被统治者对某事产生不同意见, 就应该按照 «古兰经» 的教导来决定;如意见不能一致就在圣行和圣训中找根据。可是, 如果 «古兰经»、圣行和圣训对此问题均未曾提到, 就应该留待有权处理穆斯林之间事务的当局去解决。这节经文似乎提到了那些特别跟国家大事有关的事情。在这方面的基本指令是, 对权力的完全服从不能超过安拉和他的使者的服从。可是, “如果对于社会问题等有不同意见和争论” 正如经文提及:“如果你们有分歧”, 那么, 应该按伊斯兰经典而不是按任何其它法律。
a
4:84.
b
4:66.
533
Important Words:
اولی الامر (those in authority) is made up of two words: (1) اولی which is originally اولوا meaning, possessors of or possessing or having; and (2) امر meaning, rule, authority, command, affair or matter, etc. اولی الامر means: (1) those who possess or hold authority command or rule; and (2) the learned men who, as it were, possess authority in knowledge (Taj & Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law is in reality obedience to God and His Messenger.
The clause, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, means that in case of difference, the matter should be referred to the Quran and the authentic Sunnah and Hadith of the Holy Prophet. The injunction may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case, the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the authentic Sunnah and Hadith. If, however, the Quran, the Sunnah and Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left in the hands of those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims; and the latter are enjoined to abide by their decision even if they do not see eye to eye with them, because true obedience consists in obeying against one’s will and judgement. The words, refer it to Allah and His Messenger, may also mean that in case of a difference between the people and those in authority, the former are enjoined to do as Allah and His Messenger have bidden them to do on such occasions, i.e. that in such a case they should obey those in authority.
Primarily, however, the words, if you differ, do not refer to any differences between the rulers and the ruled but to disagreements arising among the ruled themselves. In this case the injunction embodied in the verse is that in matters pertaining to discipline and administration, Muslims should obey those in authority, but in disputes and differences regarding social matters, etc. they should be guided by the Law of Islam and not by other laws. This is the interpretation which Ibn Kathir (iii. 130-31) has adopted and which is in keeping with the context. The next verse also refers only to disputes among the ruled, and not to those between rulers and ruled.
The words, those in authority, in their wider significance include even such non-Muslims as may happen to be in authority over Muslims. In this case the additional words منکم would not mean "from among you" but simply "among you", i.e. "over you". The practice of the Holy Prophet as well as his sayings make it clear that in secular matters Muslims should obey even such of their rulers as are not Muslims.
a
4:84
b
4:66
623
The word "obey" which has been repeated before the words "Allah" and "Messenger" has been omitted before the words, those who are in authority, in order to point out that obedience to the authority properly constituted by Law amounts to obedience to God and His Messenger. The injunction embodied in the words, "refer it to Allah and His Messenger" may either relate to differences between the rulers and the ruled or to those among the ruled themselves. In the former case the significance is that if there is a matter on which disagreement arises between the rulers and the ruled, it should be decided in the light of the Quranic teaching, or failing that, in that of the Sunnah and the Hadith. If, however, the Qur’an, the Sunnah and the Hadith are silent on the question, it should be left to those in whom is vested the authority to manage the affairs of Muslims. The verse seems to refer to matters concerning particularly the affairs of the State. The basic commandment in this respect is that all obedien
وَإِذَا كُنتَ فِيهِمْ فَأَقَمْتَ لَهُمُ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ فَلْتَقُمْ طَآئِفَةٌ مِّنْهُم مَّعَكَ وَلْيَأْخُذُوٓا۟ أَسْلِحَتَهُمْ فَإِذَا سَجَدُوا۟ فَلْيَكُونُوا۟ مِن وَرَآئِكُمْ وَلْتَأْتِ طَآئِفَةٌ أُخْرَىٰ لَمْ يُصَلُّوا۟ فَلْيُصَلُّوا۟ مَعَكَ وَلْيَأْخُذُوا۟ حِذْرَهُمْ وَأَسْلِحَتَهُمْ ۗ وَدَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ لَوْ تَغْفُلُونَ عَنْ أَسْلِحَتِكُمْ وَأَمْتِعَتِكُمْ فَيَمِيلُونَ عَلَيْكُم مَّيْلَةً وَٰحِدَةً ۚ وَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكُمْ إِن كَانَ بِكُمْ أَذًى مِّن مَّطَرٍ أَوْ كُنتُم مَّرْضَىٰٓ أَن تَضَعُوٓا۟ أَسْلِحَتَكُمْ ۖ وَخُذُوا۟ حِذْرَكُمْ ۗ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ أَعَدَّ لِلْكَٰفِرِينَ عَذَابًا مُّهِينًا
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. As many as eleven different forms in which the Prayer was said on different occasions are described in the Hadith (Muhit).
The verse observes a difference between Aslihah (arms) and Hidhr (precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should never be neglected. See also 4:72.
Commentary:
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of the Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. Apparently the Holy Prophet alone seems to have been addressed here, but really the verse possesses general application. When a Muslim army is about to say their Prayer in congregation, half of them should say the Prayer with the Imam, carrying their arms, and the other half should stand facing the enemy, to fight him or repulse his attack, as the case may be. When the first half have finished one Rak‘at, they should retire to take the place of those who are facing the enemy. The latter should then come forward and say one Rak‘at with the Imam.
As many as eleven different ways in which these Prayers were said on different occasions are described in the Hadith(for details see Al-Bahrul-Muhit). In some cases, each of the two parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer, while the Imam said two. In other cases, each of the parties said two Rak‘at, one Rak‘at with the Imam and the other alone, thus all saying two Rak‘at. On yet other occasions each of the two parties said two rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam, the Imam himself having said four Rak‘at—two Rak‘at with each party. These different methods were observed in different circumstances. If the danger was great, each of the parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam while the Imam himself said two; but if the danger was not so great, each party said two Rak‘ats while the Imam said four. Again, methods varied with the varying position of the army. If the enemy, for instance, was in front of the Imam, the congregation followed a method different from that which they followed on other occasions.
To sum up, whereas Prayer in a state of simple journey consists of two Rak‘ats in such Prayers as ordinarily consist of four Rak‘ats, the Prayer in time of fear may assume different forms, the more important being:
(a) Splitting up the worshippers into two parties, each party either saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and then retiring, or saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and the other part separately, the number of Rak‘ats performed by the worshippers being either one or two as the case may be (the present verse);
(b) Shortening the duration of Prayers only (the preceding verse);
(c) Doing away with all form and repeating the words of Prayer while walking, running or riding (2:240).
The verse observes a difference between: اسلحة (arms) and حذر (means of defence or simply precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should always be adhered to and never neglected. See also 4:72.
571
Commentary:
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of the Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. Apparently the Holy Prophet alone seems to have been addressed here, but really the verse possesses general application. When a Muslim army is about to say their Prayer in congregation, half of them should say the Prayer with the Imam, carrying their arms, and the other half should stand facing the enemy, to fight him or repulse his attack, as the case may be. When the first half have finished one Rak‘at, they should retire to take the place of those who are facing the enemy. The latter should then come forward and say one Rak‘at with the Imam.
As many as eleven different ways in which these Prayers were said on different occasions are described in the Hadith(for details see Al-Bahrul-Muhit). In some cases, each of the two parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer, while the Imam said two. In other cases, each of the parties said two Rak‘at, one Rak‘at with the Imam and the other alone, thus all saying two Rak‘at. On yet other occasions each of the two parties said two rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam, the Imam himself having said four Rak‘at—two Rak‘at with each party. These different methods were observed in different circumstances. If the danger was great, each of the parties said only one Rak‘at of Prayer with the Imam while the Imam himself said two; but if the danger was not so great, each party said two Rak‘ats while the Imam said four. Again, methods varied with the varying position of the army. If the enemy, for instance, was in front of the Imam, the congregation followed a method different from that which they followed on other occasions.
To sum up, whereas Prayer in a state of simple journey consists of two Rak‘ats in such Prayers as ordinarily consist of four Rak‘ats, the Prayer in time of fear may assume different forms, the more important being:
(a) Splitting up the worshippers into two parties, each party either saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and then retiring, or saying one part of its Prayer with the Imam and the other part separately, the number of Rak‘ats performed by the worshippers being either one or two as the case may be (the present verse);
(b) Shortening the duration of Prayers only (the preceding verse);
(c) Doing away with all form and repeating the words of Prayer while walking, running or riding (2:240).
The verse observes a difference between: اسلحة (arms) and حذر (means of defence or simply precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should always be adhered to and never neglected. See also 4:72.
660
Whereas the preceding verse spoke of Prayer in time of fear in the case of individuals, the present one gives the details of the manner of its performance when the Faithful are in the form of a company or group and the Prayer is to be performed in congregation. As many as eleven different forms in which the Prayer was said on different occasions are described in the Hadith (Muhit).
661
The verse observes a difference between Aslihah (arms) and Hidhr (precautions). Whereas the former may be put aside in moments of comparative security, the latter should never be neglected. See also 4:72.
وَلَا تَهِنُوا۟ فِى ٱبْتِغَآءِ ٱلْقَوْمِ ۖ إِن تَكُونُوا۟ تَأْلَمُونَ فَإِنَّهُمْ يَأْلَمُونَ كَمَا تَأْلَمُونَ ۖ وَتَرْجُونَ مِنَ ٱللَّهِ مَا لَا يَرْجُونَ ۗ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَكِيمًا
3:147.
3:147.
3:147.
Commentary:
The expression, you hope from Allah, does not merely signify "hoping to get a reward or recompense", but also includes "hoping to win the pleasure of God and attain His nearness." There can be no bigger incentive for making sacrifices in the cause of religion than the hope that one will thereby win the pleasure and nearness of one’s Lord and Master.
c
3:147.
a
3:147.
573
Commentary:
The expression, you hope from Allah, does not merely signify "hoping to get a reward or recompense", but also includes "hoping to win the pleasure of God and attain His nearness." There can be no bigger incentive for making sacrifices in the cause of religion than the hope that one will thereby win the pleasure and nearness of one’s Lord and Master.
a
3:147.
إِن يَدْعُونَ مِن دُونِهِۦٓ إِلَّآ إِنَٰثًا وَإِن يَدْعُونَ إِلَّا شَيْطَٰنًا مَّرِيدًا
اِنَاثْ (Inath) 这个词包括所有虚假的神, 不论是活的或死的。这个词用来表明所有虚假的神是虚弱和无用的。
ہم نے اِنَاثًا کا ترجمہ بے جان چیزیں کیا ہے۔ یہ لغت کے مطابق ہے۔ (دیکھو مفردات راغب و لسان العرب و تفسیر فتح البیان جلد۲ صفحہ ۳۱۶)
واؤ کا ترجمہ ’’بلکہ‘‘ کیا گیا ہے کیونکہ یہی اردو کے محاورہ کے مطابق بلکہ عربی کے محاورہ کے بھی مطابق ہے۔
The word Inath includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of false deities.
Important Words:
اناثا (lifeless objects) is the plural of انثی which is derived from انث which means, it was or became female or feminine; or it (iron, etc.) was or became soft. انثی means, female; feminine; of the female sex or feminine gender. اناث, which is the plural of انثی, also means, inanimate or lifeless things; small stars (Lane).
مریدا (rebellious) is derived from مرد i.e. he was or became rebellious and transgressed proper limits. مارد means, one who rebels and transgresses proper limits. مرید means, mischievous, haughty and rebellious (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word اناث (lifeless objects) explained above includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of the false deities.
The use of the word "Satan" in the verse signifies that idolaters, while invoking their deities, in reality invoke Satan, because it is at his bidding that they invoke false gods.
The verse provides two reasons for the statement made in the previous verse: (1) the worship of false gods does the idolaters no good; (2) it positively does them harm, because it strengthens their relation with Satan, who is the avowed enemy of a man and a rebel against the true God.
346
اِنَاثْ (Inath) 这个词包括所有虚假的神, 不论是活的或死的。这个词用来表明所有虚假的神是虚弱和无用的。
1
ہم نے اِنَاثًا کا ترجمہ بے جان چیزیں کیا ہے۔ یہ لغت کے مطابق ہے۔ (دیکھو مفردات راغب و لسان العرب و تفسیر فتح البیان جلد۲ صفحہ ۳۱۶)
2
واؤ کا ترجمہ ’’بلکہ‘‘ کیا گیا ہے کیونکہ یہی اردو کے محاورہ کے مطابق بلکہ عربی کے محاورہ کے بھی مطابق ہے۔
584
Important Words:
اناثا (lifeless objects) is the plural of انثی which is derived from انث which means, it was or became female or feminine; or it (iron, etc.) was or became soft. انثی means, female; feminine; of the female sex or feminine gender. اناث, which is the plural of انثی, also means, inanimate or lifeless things; small stars (Lane).
مریدا (rebellious) is derived from مرد i.e. he was or became rebellious and transgressed proper limits. مارد means, one who rebels and transgresses proper limits. مرید means, mischievous, haughty and rebellious (Aqrab).
Commentary:
The word اناث (lifeless objects) explained above includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of the false deities.
The use of the word "Satan" in the verse signifies that idolaters, while invoking their deities, in reality invoke Satan, because it is at his bidding that they invoke false gods.
The verse provides two reasons for the statement made in the previous verse: (1) the worship of false gods does the idolaters no good; (2) it positively does them harm, because it strengthens their relation with Satan, who is the avowed enemy of a man and a rebel against the true God.
671
The word Inath includes all false deities, whether living or dead. The word has been used to point to the utter weakness and helplessness of false deities.
إِن يَشَأْ يُذْهِبْكُمْ أَيُّهَا ٱلنَّاسُ وَيَأْتِ بِـَٔاخَرِينَ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ ذَٰلِكَ قَدِيرًا
۞ يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ كُونُوا۟ قَوَّٰمِينَ بِٱلْقِسْطِ شُهَدَآءَ لِلَّهِ وَلَوْ عَلَىٰٓ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَوِ ٱلْوَٰلِدَيْنِ وَٱلْأَقْرَبِينَ ۚ إِن يَكُنْ غَنِيًّا أَوْ فَقِيرًا فَٱللَّهُ أَوْلَىٰ بِهِمَا ۖ فَلَا تَتَّبِعُوا۟ ٱلْهَوَىٰٓ أَن تَعْدِلُوا۟ ۚ وَإِن تَلْوُۥٓا۟ أَوْ تُعْرِضُوا۟ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ خَبِيرًا
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی خاطر سچی گواہی دیا کرو۔
5:9.
The expression, "against yourselves" may also signify "against your people or kith and kin". The words "parents and kindred" have been added to emphasize the force of the injunction.
The words also mean, lest you deviate.
5:9.
Important Words:
اولی (more regardful) is derived from ولی. They say ولیه i.e. he was or became near unto him; he loved him and was a friend to him. ولی الشیء means, he managed and looked after the thing. الولی means, friend; one who loves; helper; one who looks after your affairs. اولی means, more entitled, having a better right (Aqrab). They say فلان اولی بکذا i.e. such a one is more entitled to such a thing or has a better right or better title or claim to it; or is more deserving or worthy of it; or is more competent or fit for it (Lane). اولی also means, more regardful or more thoughtful or more considerate (Kashshaf & Muhit).
Commentary:
As in the settlement of differences between husband and wife, a subject dealt with in the preceding verses, witnesses have often to be called in, therefore the Quran here fittingly turns to that subject.
The expression, be witnesses for Allah, means that one should bear witness truly for the sake of God and in strict accordance with His injunctions. The words علی انفسکم rendered as "against yourselves" may also be rendered as "against your people or against your kith and kin", signifying that one should give true evidence in all cases, even against the members of one’s own community or one’s near relations or even when one’s own honour or property is at stake.
The words, parents or kindred, have been added to increase the force of the injunction, i.e. you should give true evidence not only against the members of your own community, but even against those who are closely related to you by blood—your own parents and others near and dear. As one has to more often bear witness against other people than against near relatives, therefore, the former class of persons has been put before the latter.
e
5:9.
352
“不利于你们自己” 这一用语, 也可意指 “不利于你们的宗教或亲戚朋友。” “父母和亲戚” 这几个字, 是加上去强调这一旨令的。
1
یعنی خداتعالیٰ کی خاطر سچی گواہی دیا کرو۔
a
5:9.
600
Important Words:
اولی (more regardful) is derived from ولی. They say ولیه i.e. he was or became near unto him; he loved him and was a friend to him. ولی الشیء means, he managed and looked after the thing. الولی means, friend; one who loves; helper; one who looks after your affairs. اولی means, more entitled, having a better right (Aqrab). They say فلان اولی بکذا i.e. such a one is more entitled to such a thing or has a better right or better title or claim to it; or is more deserving or worthy of it; or is more competent or fit for it (Lane). اولی also means, more regardful or more thoughtful or more considerate (Kashshaf & Muhit).
Commentary:
As in the settlement of differences between husband and wife, a subject dealt with in the preceding verses, witnesses have often to be called in, therefore the Quran here fittingly turns to that subject.
The expression, be witnesses for Allah, means that one should bear witness truly for the sake of God and in strict accordance with His injunctions. The words علی انفسکم rendered as "against yourselves" may also be rendered as "against your people or against your kith and kin", signifying that one should give true evidence in all cases, even against the members of one’s own community or one’s near relations or even when one’s own honour or property is at stake.
The words, parents or kindred, have been added to increase the force of the injunction, i.e. you should give true evidence not only against the members of your own community, but even against those who are closely related to you by blood—your own parents and others near and dear. As one has to more often bear witness against other people than against near relatives, therefore, the former class of persons has been put before the latter.
c
5:9.
682
The expression, "against yourselves" may also signify "against your people or kith and kin". The words "parents and kindred" have been added to emphasize the force of the injunction.
682A
The words also mean, lest you deviate.
مَّا يَفْعَلُ ٱللَّهُ بِعَذَابِكُمْ إِن شَكَرْتُمْ وَءَامَنتُمْ ۚ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ شَاكِرًا عَلِيمًا
2:159.
Shukr on the part of God consists in forgiving a person or commending him or regarding him with satisfaction, goodwill or favour and hence necessarily recompensing him or rewarding him (Lane).
2:159.
Commentary:
شکر (gratitude) on the part of man is to have a due sense of the favours of God and render thanks for them both by words of mouth and by action; and on the part of God, it is to give proper rewards to men for their obedience and righteousness. See also 1:2.
c
2:159.
353
شُكْر (Shukr) 用于安拉时是表示安拉宽恕一个人, 或者赞扬他, 或者对他感到满意及有好意或恩宠的意思, 因此必然给他报偿或酬答。(Lane)
c
2:159.
611
Commentary:
شکر (gratitude) on the part of man is to have a due sense of the favours of God and render thanks for them both by words of mouth and by action; and on the part of God, it is to give proper rewards to men for their obedience and righteousness. See also 1:2.
c
2:159.
690
Shukr on the part of God consists in forgiving a person or commending him or regarding him with satisfaction, goodwill or favour and hence necessarily recompensing him or rewarding him (Lane).
إِن تُبْدُوا۟ خَيْرًا أَوْ تُخْفُوهُ أَوْ تَعْفُوا۟ عَن سُوٓءٍ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَفُوًّا قَدِيرًا
Commentary:
The verse further enlarges on the idea contained in the preceding verse, at the same time hinting that as far as possible man should try to pardon the wrongs done him by his brethren; for is not God, before Whom all of us will one day stand, the great Pardoner and the Effacer of sins?
613
Commentary:
The verse further enlarges on the idea contained in the preceding verse, at the same time hinting that as far as possible man should try to pardon the wrongs done him by his brethren; for is not God, before Whom all of us will one day stand, the great Pardoner and the Effacer of sins?
يَسْتَفْتُونَكَ قُلِ ٱللَّهُ يُفْتِيكُمْ فِى ٱلْكَلَٰلَةِ ۚ إِنِ ٱمْرُؤٌا۟ هَلَكَ لَيْسَ لَهُۥ وَلَدٌ وَلَهُۥٓ أُخْتٌ فَلَهَا نِصْفُ مَا تَرَكَ ۚ وَهُوَ يَرِثُهَآ إِن لَّمْ يَكُن لَّهَا وَلَدٌ ۚ فَإِن كَانَتَا ٱثْنَتَيْنِ فَلَهُمَا ٱلثُّلُثَانِ مِمَّا تَرَكَ ۚ وَإِن كَانُوٓا۟ إِخْوَةً رِّجَالًا وَنِسَآءً فَلِلذَّكَرِ مِثْلُ حَظِّ ٱلْأُنثَيَيْنِ ۗ يُبَيِّنُ ٱللَّهُ لَكُمْ أَن تَضِلُّوا۟ ۗ وَٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمٌۢ
4:12.
4:27.
4:13.
4:13 经文谈及一种 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者), 只有母方的兄弟和姐妹。本节中述及另一种 كَلَالَةْ (身后无父母子女者) 他既有父方的又有母方的兄弟和姐妹, 或者只有父方的。把现在注释的经文同4:13经文比较一下, 就清楚地可以看出, 前一种兄弟姐妹分得的份量比后一种要少的明显理由。
这部分继承法刻意与4:12, 13经文中述及的法律分开来处理。«古兰经» 在详细论述犹太人针对伊撒的攻击以后, 在本章末尾又回到 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者) 这个论题上来。这样, {除了使有关 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 的法律完整以外} 要求人们注意伊撒在精神上的无继承性, 他在某种意义上说, 也是一个 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah)。伊撒是在没有父亲的媒介下出生的, 他死后没有精神继承人。伊本, 阿巴斯给 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 下的定义是一个没有子女的人。伊撒在精神上是 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah), 因为他死后没有精神继承人。
میرے ایک استاد کہا کرتے تھے کہ اس جگہ کلالہ سے مراد مسیحؑ ہے کیونکہ اوپر انہی کا ذکر ہے۔ واللہ اعلم بالصواب۔
کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کے متعلق ایک حکم سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں گزر چکا ہے۔ اس جگہ کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کا جو مسئلہ بیان کیا گیا ہے‘ وہ پہلے سے مختلف ہے۔ سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں یہ ذکر تھا کہ اگر کلالہ مر جائے اس کے بہن بھائی ماں کی طرف سے ہوں تو ان کو ۶ / ۱ یا ۳ / ۱ ملے گا۔ لیکن اِس جگہ اس کلالہ کا ذکر ہے جس کے بہن بھائی ماں اور باپ دونوں کی طرف سے ہوں یا صرف باپ کی طرف سے۔
4:12.
4:27.
4:13.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring and who has brothers and sisters from the side of mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the law dealt with in 4:12, 13. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews, the Qur’an reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who in a sense was also a Kalalah. Jesus was born without the agency of a father, and he
4:13.
4:12.
4:27.
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word کلالة see 4:13.
Commentary:
ولد (child) means, child or children whether male or female, but as کلالة (kalalah) means, one having no child and no parent, the words ولا والد (and neither parent) may be taken as being understood after the words لیس له ولد. The word اثنتین (lit. two) here means two or more sisters. This meaning is supported by a verdict of the Holy Prophet in which he applied this verse to the case of Jabir who died, leaving seven sisters (Jarir, vi. 24). The word اخوة (brethren) here includes sisters and brothers both, as the words رجالا و نساء (both men and women), forming case in apposition with اخوة indicate.
This verse, placed as it is in between the verses dealing with the Christians and their false doctrines, appears to be rather misplaced. But as the following note will show, it is very fittingly placed here, furnishing a striking proof of the Quran as well as its present arrangement being the work of God.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah (one who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring) who had brothers and sisters from the side of his mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the main portion of the law dealt with in 4:12, 13 in the beginning of the Surah. The object in doing so is not far to seek. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews and clearing his position, the Quran reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw, by a most fitting parable, our attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who, in a sense, was also a Kalalah. He was born without the agency of a father, and he left behind no spiritual successor to succeed him in his prophetic office, which was, after his death, inherited by the Ishmaelites. In this case the words, If a man dies, leaving no child, may also signify that Jesus was a Kalalah, not in the sense that spiritually speaking he had neither parents nor child, but in the restricted sense that he had no child. See 4:13 under Important Words where Ibn ‘Abbas defines a Kalalah as simply one who leaves no child. Thus Jesus was spiritually a Kalalah in the sense that he left behind no spiritual successor. Compare also the prophecy, "I will raise them a prophet from among their brethren" (Deut. 18:18).
a
4:12.
b
4:27.
e
4:13.
367
4:13 经文谈及一种 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者), 只有母方的兄弟和姐妹。本节中述及另一种 كَلَالَةْ (身后无父母子女者) 他既有父方的又有母方的兄弟和姐妹, 或者只有父方的。把现在注释的经文同4:13经文比较一下, 就清楚地可以看出, 前一种兄弟姐妹分得的份量比后一种要少的明显理由。
这部分继承法刻意与4:12, 13经文中述及的法律分开来处理。«古兰经» 在详细论述犹太人针对伊撒的攻击以后, 在本章末尾又回到 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah, 身后无父母子女者) 这个论题上来。这样, {除了使有关 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 的法律完整以外} 要求人们注意伊撒在精神上的无继承性, 他在某种意义上说, 也是一个 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah)。伊撒是在没有父亲的媒介下出生的, 他死后没有精神继承人。伊本, 阿巴斯给 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah) 下的定义是一个没有子女的人。伊撒在精神上是 كَلَالَةْ (Kalalah), 因为他死后没有精神继承人。
1
میرے ایک استاد کہا کرتے تھے کہ اس جگہ کلالہ سے مراد مسیحؑ ہے کیونکہ اوپر انہی کا ذکر ہے۔ واللہ اعلم بالصواب۔
کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کے متعلق ایک حکم سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں گزر چکا ہے۔ اس جگہ کلالہ کے ورثہ کی تقسیم کا جو مسئلہ بیان کیا گیا ہے‘ وہ پہلے سے مختلف ہے۔ سورۃ نساء کی آیت۱۳ میں یہ ذکر تھا کہ اگر کلالہ مر جائے اس کے بہن بھائی ماں کی طرف سے ہوں تو ان کو ۶ / ۱ یا ۳ / ۱ ملے گا۔ لیکن اِس جگہ اس کلالہ کا ذکر ہے جس کے بہن بھائی ماں اور باپ دونوں کی طرف سے ہوں یا صرف باپ کی طرف سے۔
a
4:13.
b
4:12.
c
4:27.
639
Important Words:
For the meaning of the word کلالة see 4:13.
Commentary:
ولد (child) means, child or children whether male or female, but as کلالة (kalalah) means, one having no child and no parent, the words ولا والد (and neither parent) may be taken as being understood after the words لیس له ولد. The word اثنتین (lit. two) here means two or more sisters. This meaning is supported by a verdict of the Holy Prophet in which he applied this verse to the case of Jabir who died, leaving seven sisters (Jarir, vi. 24). The word اخوة (brethren) here includes sisters and brothers both, as the words رجالا و نساء (both men and women), forming case in apposition with اخوة indicate.
This verse, placed as it is in between the verses dealing with the Christians and their false doctrines, appears to be rather misplaced. But as the following note will show, it is very fittingly placed here, furnishing a striking proof of the Quran as well as its present arrangement being the work of God.
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah (one who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring) who had brothers and sisters from the side of his mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the main portion of the law dealt with in 4:12, 13 in the beginning of the Surah. The object in doing so is not far to seek. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews and clearing his position, the Quran reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw, by a most fitting parable, our attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who, in a sense, was also a Kalalah. He was born without the agency of a father, and he left behind no spiritual successor to succeed him in his prophetic office, which was, after his death, inherited by the Ishmaelites. In this case the words, If a man dies, leaving no child, may also signify that Jesus was a Kalalah, not in the sense that spiritually speaking he had neither parents nor child, but in the restricted sense that he had no child. See 4:13 under Important Words where Ibn ‘Abbas defines a Kalalah as simply one who leaves no child. Thus Jesus was spiritually a Kalalah in the sense that he left behind no spiritual successor. Compare also the prophecy, "I will raise them a prophet from among their brethren" (Deut. 18:18).
a
4:12.
b
4:27.
c
4:13.
715
In 4:13 mention was made of one kind of Kalalah who leaves behind neither a parent nor an offspring and who has brothers and sisters from the side of mother only. The present verse refers to a Kalalah who has brothers and sisters from both his parents, or from the side of his father only. By comparing the verse under comment with 4:13 it becomes clear that for obvious reasons the share allotted to the former class of brothers and sisters is less than that allotted to those of the latter class.
This part of the law of inheritance has been purposely treated separately from the law dealt with in 4:12, 13. After dealing at some length with the charges levelled against Jesus by the Jews, the Qur’an reverts to the subject of Kalalah at the end of the Surah, thus seeking (beside completing the law relating to Kalalah) to draw attention to the spiritual heirlessness of Jesus who in a sense was also a Kalalah. Jesus was born without the agency of a father, and he
قَالَ رَجُلَانِ مِنَ ٱلَّذِينَ يَخَافُونَ أَنْعَمَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِمَا ٱدْخُلُوا۟ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلْبَابَ فَإِذَا دَخَلْتُمُوهُ فَإِنَّكُمْ غَٰلِبُونَ ۚ وَعَلَى ٱللَّهِ فَتَوَكَّلُوٓا۟ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
3:161; 5:12; 9:51.
قرآن مجید کے رُو سے غالباً حضرت موسٰیؑ اور حضرت ہارونؑ مراد ہیں یا یشوع اور کالب (بائبل کے بیان کے مطابق) جو اس ملک کا حال دریافت کرنے کے لئے بھیجے گئے تھے (گنتی باب۱۴ آیت۵‘۶)
3:161; 5:12; 9:51.
The "two men" spoken of here are generally supposed to be Joshua, the son of Nun; and Caleb, the son of Jephunneh (Num. 14:6). But from the context Moses and Aaron appear more likely to be the "two men" here referred to. The word Rajul (man) is expressive of manliness and courage. That these two brave men were Moses and Aaron themselves may also be inferred from the fact that Moses prayed for himself and his brother, Aaron (5:26). God does not name these two men but simply speaks of them as "two brave men" in order to praise their manliness and courage and also to condemn by implication the cowardice of the other Israelites who were with them.
3:161; 5:12; 9:51.
Important Words:
علیھم (against them). The word علی as a particle has several meanings. Here it gives the meaning of "against" (Lane). The Quran says: ولھم علی ذنب i.e. and they have a crime or offence standing against me (26:15). In his Arabic Grammar, Wright says that the particle علی is sometimes used in "a hostile sense in which case it can be generally rendered as 'against' or 'upon', as in خرج علیه i.e. he went out against him or he rebelled against him."
Commentary:
The two "men" spoken of here are generally supposed to be Joshua, the son of Nun, and Caleb, the son of Jephunneh (Num. 14:6). But from the context Moses and Aaron appear more likely to be the two "men" here referred to.
The word رجل (man) is thus here expressive of manliness and courage. By using this word, the Quran means to say that of that big host of cowardly people there were only two men who were truly brave and courageous. That these two brave men were Moses and Aaron themselves may also be inferred from the fact that when these two "men" spoke to their people, and urged them to "enter" the land, the latter, in reply, addressed none other but Moses, saying, O Moses, we will never enter it so long as they remain in it (5:25), thus making it clear that it was Moses himself who had spoken to them the words contained in this verse. Again, when the people refused to obey Moses, he is reported to have prayed to God, saying, My Lord, I have power over none but myself and my brother, therefore make Thou a distinction between us and the rebellious people (5:26). Now, if the two "men" had been other than Moses and Aaron, they should have certainly been included in his prayer by Moses, because they had deserved it by boldly offering to enter the land in spite of resistance, exhorting others also to do so. But Moses prayed only for himself and his brother, which shows that the two men whom God praises as "men", (i.e. brave men) and of whom He speaks as His favoured ones were Moses and Aaron themselves. God does not name them but simply speaks of them as رجلان i.e. "two brave men" in order to praise their manliness and courage and at the same time to condemn by implication the cowardice of the other Israelites who were with them.
The expression, enter the gate advancing against them, possesses a spiritual connotation as well. For every person there is a "holy land", which is his goal and paradise. Allah has "ordained" this "holy land" for man (5:22) because he has been created for it. But the cowardly and the low-spirited are always afraid of entering it. They are too timorous to face "the rebellious ones", i.e. the evil ones and their own evil inclinations. They desire to enter Heaven without deserving it, without any exertion on their part, without facing and fighting their evil passions and without fighting those who stand in their way. They tremble and quail before the trials and tribulations that confront them. But here, too, God has created for every person "two men", i.e. two wise counsellors who encourage him and exhort him not to be afraid of difficulties and to follow undauntedly the path that leads to eternal happiness and everlasting bliss. These two counsellors are (1) human reason and (2) man’s pure and unsullied nature. These two go on telling man and urging him that he need only be up and doing and God will help him. He should boldly face trials and God will make everything easy for him, and he will come out of the struggle victorious and triumphant. Most men, however, wish that the power of their enemies should break of itself, but it cannot break without their using the weapon of self-sacrifice. "Forty years", as hinted in 5:27 below, is the time required by man to attain to perfect manhood. This is a sufficiently long time. If he does not mend his ways during this period and defies the dictates of reason and conscience, he is lost, and there is little hope for him. But if he makes up his mind boldly to meet the evil influences, he may be saved. He need only take heart and make bold to enter the struggle, and what appears to him to be a thick jungle of difficulties will turn out to be a garden, the seeming "Hell" assuming the form of a veritable "Heaven".
a
3:161; 5:12; 9:51.
2
قرآن مجید کے رُو سے غالباً حضرت موسٰیؑ اور حضرت ہارونؑ مراد ہیں یا یشوع اور کالب (بائبل کے بیان کے مطابق) جو اس ملک کا حال دریافت کرنے کے لئے بھیجے گئے تھے (گنتی باب۱۴ آیت۵‘۶)
a
3:161; 5:12; 9:51.
660
Important Words:
علیھم (against them). The word علی as a particle has several meanings. Here it gives the meaning of "against" (Lane). The Quran says: ولھم علی ذنب i.e. and they have a crime or offence standing against me (26:15). In his Arabic Grammar, Wright says that the particle علی is sometimes used in "a hostile sense in which case it can be generally rendered as 'against' or 'upon', as in خرج علیه i.e. he went out against him or he rebelled against him."
Commentary:
The two "men" spoken of here are generally supposed to be Joshua, the son of Nun, and Caleb, the son of Jephunneh (Num. 14:6). But from the context Moses and Aaron appear more likely to be the two "men" here referred to.
The word رجل (man) is thus here expressive of manliness and courage. By using this word, the Quran means to say that of that big host of cowardly people there were only two men who were truly brave and courageous. That these two brave men were Moses and Aaron themselves may also be inferred from the fact that when these two "men" spoke to their people, and urged them to "enter" the land, the latter, in reply, addressed none other but Moses, saying, O Moses, we will never enter it so long as they remain in it (5:25), thus making it clear that it was Moses himself who had spoken to them the words contained in this verse. Again, when the people refused to obey Moses, he is reported to have prayed to God, saying, My Lord, I have power over none but myself and my brother, therefore make Thou a distinction between us and the rebellious people (5:26). Now, if the two "men" had been other than Moses and Aaron, they should have certainly been included in his prayer by Moses, because they had deserved it by boldly offering to enter the land in spite of resistance, exhorting others also to do so. But Moses prayed only for himself and his brother, which shows that the two men whom God praises as "men", (i.e. brave men) and of whom He speaks as His favoured ones were Moses and Aaron themselves. God does not name them but simply speaks of them as رجلان i.e. "two brave men" in order to praise their manliness and courage and at the same time to condemn by implication the cowardice of the other Israelites who were with them.
The expression, enter the gate advancing against them, possesses a spiritual connotation as well. For every person there is a "holy land", which is his goal and paradise. Allah has "ordained" this "holy land" for man (5:22) because he has been created for it. But the cowardly and the low-spirited are always afraid of entering it. They are too timorous to face "the rebellious ones", i.e. the evil ones and their own evil inclinations. They desire to enter Heaven without deserving it, without any exertion on their part, without facing and fighting their evil passions and without fighting those who stand in their way. They tremble and quail before the trials and tribulations that confront them. But here, too, God has created for every person "two men", i.e. two wise counsellors who encourage him and exhort him not to be afraid of difficulties and to follow undauntedly the path that leads to eternal happiness and everlasting bliss. These two counsellors are (1) human reason and (2) man’s pure and unsullied nature. These two go on telling man and urging him that he need only be up and doing and God will help him. He should boldly face trials and God will make everything easy for him, and he will come out of the struggle victorious and triumphant. Most men, however, wish that the power of their enemies should break of itself, but it cannot break without their using the weapon of self-sacrifice. "Forty years", as hinted in 5:27 below, is the time required by man to attain to perfect manhood. This is a sufficiently long time. If he does not mend his ways during this period and defies the dictates of reason and conscience, he is lost, and there is little hope for him. But if he makes up his mind boldly to meet the evil influences, he may be saved. He need only take heart and make bold to enter the struggle, and what appears to him to be a thick jungle of difficulties will turn out to be a garden, the seeming "Hell" assuming the form of a veritable "Heaven".
a
3:161; 5:12; 9:51.
734
The "two men" spoken of here are generally supposed to be Joshua, the son of Nun; and Caleb, the son of Jephunneh (Num. 14:6). But from the context Moses and Aaron appear more likely to be the "two men" here referred to. The word Rajul (man) is expressive of manliness and courage. That these two brave men were Moses and Aaron themselves may also be inferred from the fact that Moses prayed for himself and his brother, Aaron (5:26). God does not name these two men but simply speaks of them as "two brave men" in order to praise their manliness and courage and also to condemn by implication the cowardice of the other Israelites who were with them.
يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَتَّخِذُوا۟ ٱلَّذِينَ ٱتَّخَذُوا۟ دِينَكُمْ هُزُوًا وَلَعِبًا مِّنَ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ وَٱلْكُفَّارَ أَوْلِيَآءَ ۚ وَٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ
3:29, 119; 4:145; 5:52; 60:10.
6:71; 7:52.
In 5:52 Muslims were forbidden to make friends with disbelievers because of the latter’s hostile and belligerent attitude towards them. The present verse gives the reason for that commandment, but does not mean that Muslims are prevented from having friendly dealings of any kind with all disbelievers or from doing good to them and treating them kindly.
3:29, 119; 4:145; 5:52; 60:10.
6:71; 7:52.
Commentary:
This verse further explains the previous verses about the principle underlying the befriending of disbelievers. Muslims are not allowed to have friendly relations with people who scoff at their religion and mock at their Prophet. It would kill a Muslim’s self-respect if he were to do so, and who can be more jealous and more self-respecting than a true Muslim? In 5:52, Muslims are forbidden to make friends with disbelievers because of their hostile and belligerent attitude towards them; in the present verse they are forbidden to do so because they scoff at their religion. This, however, does not mean that they are prevented from having dealings of any kind with disbelievers or from doing good to them and treating them kindly. In this connection see also 60:9, 10.
The word کفار (disbelievers) when used in contrast to the People of the Book means, "disbelievers from among idolaters"; but when used generally, it is applied both to the People of the Book and the idolaters. Here it refers to idolaters.
c
3:29, 119; 4:145; 5:52; 60:10.
d
6:71; 7:52.
382
5:52经文禁止穆斯林和不信的人交朋友, 因为后者对他们抱着敌意和好战的态度。这节经文说明了那个律令的理由, 但这并不意味着阻止穆斯林与不信的人有任何友好的交往, 或向他们做好事, 或友善地对待他们。
b
3:29, 119; 4:145; 5:52; 60:10.
c
6:71; 7:52.
688
Commentary:
This verse further explains the previous verses about the principle underlying the befriending of disbelievers. Muslims are not allowed to have friendly relations with people who scoff at their religion and mock at their Prophet. It would kill a Muslim’s self-respect if he were to do so, and who can be more jealous and more self-respecting than a true Muslim? In 5:52, Muslims are forbidden to make friends with disbelievers because of their hostile and belligerent attitude towards them; in the present verse they are forbidden to do so because they scoff at their religion. This, however, does not mean that they are prevented from having dealings of any kind with disbelievers or from doing good to them and treating them kindly. In this connection see also 60:9, 10.
The word کفار (disbelievers) when used in contrast to the People of the Book means, "disbelievers from among idolaters"; but when used generally, it is applied both to the People of the Book and the idolaters. Here it refers to idolaters.
a
3:29, 119; 4:145; 5:52; 60:10.
b
6:71; 7:52.
761
In 5:52 Muslims were forbidden to make friends with disbelievers because of the latter’s hostile and belligerent attitude towards them. The present verse gives the reason for that commandment, but does not mean that Muslims are prevented from having friendly dealings of any kind with all disbelievers or from doing good to them and treating them kindly.